MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

Programming Guide
VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302

www.danfoss.com/drives

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Contents

Contents
1 Introduction

1.1 Software Version

1.2 Approvals

1.3 Symbols

1.4 Definitions

1.4.1 Frequency Converter

1.4.2 Input

1.4.3 Motor

1.4.4 References

1.4.5 Miscellaneous

1.5 Safety

1.6 Electrical Wiring

2 How to Programme

12

2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels

12

2.1.1 The LCD-Display

13

2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters

14

2.1.3 Display Mode

15

2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs

15

2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up

16

2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions

16

2.1.7 Initial Commissioning

17

2.1.8 Main Menu Mode

19

2.1.9 Parameter Selection

19

2.1.10 Changing Data

20

2.1.11 Changing a Text Value

20

2.1.12 Changing

20

2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value

20

2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step

20

2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of Indexed Parameters

20

2.1.16 LCP Keys

22

2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings

22

3 Parameter Descriptions

24

3.1 Parameter Selection

24

3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display

25

3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor

36

3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes

57

3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps

64

3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings

74

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Contents

3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out

80

3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out

100

3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers

108

3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options

114

3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus

123

3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus

123

3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet

123

3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control

124

3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions

142

3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information

153

3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs

159

3.18 Parameters: 17-** Motor Feedb. Option

165

3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2

167

3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features

168

3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option

171

4 Parameter Lists

174

4.1 Parameter Lists and Options

4.1.1 Introduction

174

4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

175

5 Troubleshooting

211

5.1 Status Messages

211

5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages

Index

174

211
223

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Introduction

1 1

1 Introduction
1.1 Software Version

CM

Common mode

CT

Constand Torque

DC

Direct current

DI

Digital Input

DM

Differential mode

D-TYPE

Drive Dependent

EMC

Electro Magnetic Compatibility

The software version number can be seen from

ETR

Electronic Thermal Relay

parameter 15-43 Software Version.

fJOG

Motor frequency when jog function is

activated

Programming Guide
Software version: 7.11
This Programming Guide can be used for all FC 300 frequency
converters with software version 7.11.

Table 1.1 Software Version

1.2 Approvals

1.3 Symbols
The following symbols are used in this manual.

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
result in death or serious injury.

fM

Motor frequency

fMAX

The maximum output frequency the frequency

converter applies on its output

fMIN

The minimum motor frequency from

frequency converter

fM,N

Nominal motor frequency

FC

Frequency converter

Gram

Hiperface

Hiperface is a registered trademark by

Stegmann

hp

Horsepower

HTL

HTL encoder (10-30 V) pulses - High-voltage

Transistor Logic

Hz

Hertz

IINV

Rated Inverter Output Current

ILIM

Current limit

IM,N

Nominal motor current

IVLT,MAX

The maximum output current

IVLT,N

The rated output current supplied by the

frequency converter

CAUTION

kHz

Kilohertz

LCP

Local Control Panel

lsb

Least significant bit

Meter

mA

Milliampere

NOTICE

MCM

Mille Circular Mil

Indicates important information, including situations that

may result in damage to equipment or property.

MCT

Motion Control Tool

mH

Millihenry Inductance

min

Minute

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could

result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used
to alert against unsafe practices.

1.3.1 Abbreviations
60 AVM

60 Asynchronous Vector Modulation

Ampere/AMP

AC

Alternating current

AD

Air discharge

AI

Analog Input

AMA

Automatic Motor Adaptation

AWG

American wire gauge

Degrees Celsius

CD

Contant discharge

ms

Millisecond

msb

Most significant bit

VLT

Efficiency of the frequency converter defined

as ratio between power output and power
input

nF

Nanofarad

NLCP

Numerical Local Control Panel

Nm

Newton Meters

ns

Synchronous Motor Speed

On-line/Off-line
Parameters

Changes to on-line parameters are activated

immediately after the data value is changed.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1 1

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Introduction

Pbr,cont.

Rated power of the brake resistor (average

power during continuous braking)

IVLT,N
Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.

PCB

Printed Circuit Board

PCD

Process Data

UVLT,MAX
Maximum output voltage.

PELV

Protective Extra Low Voltage

Pm

Frequency converter nominal output power as

HO

PM,N

Nominal motor power

PM motor

Permanent Magnet motor

Process PID

The PID regulator maintains the desired speed,

pressure, temperature, etc.

Rbr,nom

The nominal resistor value that ensures a

brake power on motor shaft of 150/160% for 1
minute

RCD

Residual Current Device

Regen

Regenerative terminals

Rmin

Minimum permissible brake resistor value by

frequency converter

RMS

Root Mean Square

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute

Rrec

Resistor value and resistance of the brake

resistor

Second

SFAVM

Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous Vector

Modulation

STW

Status Word
Switch Mode Power Supply

THD

Total Harmonic Distortion

TLIM

Torque limit

TTL

TTL encoder (5 V) pulses - Transistor Transistor

Logic

UM,N

Nominal motor voltage

Volts
Variable Torque

VVCplus

Voltage Vector Control

cross reference
footnote
parameter name, parameter group name,
parameter option

IVLT,MAX
Maximum output current.

Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,

Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF] key.

Group 2

Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog

and Freeze output

1.4.3 Motor
Motor Running
Torque generated on output shaft and speed from zero
RPM to max. speed on motor.
fJOG
Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
digital terminals).
fM
Motor frequency.

fM,N
Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
IM
Motor current (actual).
IM,N
Rated motor current (nameplate data).
nM,N
Rated motor speed (nameplate data).

link

1.4.1 Frequency Converter

Group 1

fMIN
Minimum motor frequency.

Conventions
Numbered lists indicate procedures.
Bullet lists indicate other information and description of
illustrations.
Italicised text indicates

1.4 Definitions

Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in

group 2.

fMAX
Maximum motor frequency.

Table 1.2 Abbreviations

Control command
Start and stop the connected motor by means of LCP and
digital inputs.
Functions are divided into 2 groups.

Table 1.3 Function Groups

SMPS

VT

1.4.2 Input

ns
Synchronous motor speed
ns =

2 par . 1 23 60 s
par . 1 39

nslip
Motor slip.
PM,N
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).
TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Introduction

UM
Instantaneous motor voltage.

1 1

RefMIN
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
reference. The minimum reference value set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference.

UM,N
Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
175ZA078.10

Torque
Pull-out

1.4.5 Miscellaneous
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Voltage input, -10 to +10 V DC.
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA.

rpm

Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque

Break-away torque
VLT
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the
ratio between the power output and the power input.
Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control
commands - see Table 1.3.
Stop command
See Control commands.

Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA

AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for
the connected motor at standstill.
Brake Resistor
The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
regenerative braking power increases the intermediate
circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
CT Characteristics
Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and cranes.
Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.

1.4.4 References
Analog Reference
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be
voltage or current.
Binary Reference
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port.
Preset Reference
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100%
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via
the digital terminals.
Pulse Reference
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
(terminal 29 or 33).
RefMAX
Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.

Digital Outputs
The frequency converter features 2 Solid State outputs that
can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
ETR
Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation
based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
the motor temperature.
Hiperface
Hiperface is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
Initialising
If initialising is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation
Mode), the frequency converter returns to the default
setting.
Intermittent Duty Cycle
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or nonperiodic duty.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1 1

Introduction

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

LCP
The Local Control Panel makes up a complete interface for
control and programming of the frequency converter. The
control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m
from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel with the
installation kit option.
NLCP
Numerical Local Control Pandel interface for control and
programming of the frequency converter. The display is
numerical and the panel is used to display process values.
The NLCP has no storing and copy functions.
lsb
Least significant bit.
msb
Most significant bit.
MCM
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for
cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067mm2.
On-line/Off-line Parameters
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate
changes to off-line parameters.
Process PID
The PID control maintains the desired speed, pressure,
temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to
match the varying load.

Smart Logic Control (SLC)

The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed
when the associated user-defined events are evaluated as
true by the Smart Logic Control. (Parameter group 13-**
Smart Logic Control (SLC).
STW
Status Word
FC Standard Bus
Includes RS-485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
8-30 Protocol.
THD
Total Harmonic Distortion states the total contribution of
harmonic.
Thermistor
A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter or
motor).
Trip
A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency
converter is subject to an over-temperature or when the
frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or
mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause of the
fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal
safety.

Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder

An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in
applications where great accuracy in speed control is
required.

Trip Locked
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a
short circuit on the output. A locked trip can only be
cancelled by disconnecting mains, removing the cause of
the fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter.
Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
to reset automatically. The Trip Locked state may not be
used for personal safety.

RCD
Residual Current Device.

VT Characteristics
Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.

Set-up
Save parameter settings in 4 Set-ups. Change between the
4 parameter Set-ups and edit one Set-up, while another
Set-up is active.

VVCplus
If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the dynamics
and the stability, both when the speed reference is
changed and in relation to the load torque.

PCD
Process Control Data
Power Cycle
Switch off the mains until display (LCP) is dark then turn
power on again.

SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous
Vector Modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost
constant.

60 AVM
Switching pattern called 60 Asynchronous Vector
Modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
Power Factor
The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
Power factor =

3 x U x I 1 cos
3 x U x IRMS

The power factor for 3-phase control:

=

I1
I1 x cos1
=
since cos1 = 1
IRMS
IRMS

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Introduction

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency

converter imposes a load on the mains supply.
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the
same kW performance.
2
2
2
IRMS = I2
1 + I 5 + I 7 + .. + I n

In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different

harmonic currents are low.
The frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high
power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the
mains supply.

1.5 Safety

2.

The motor may start while setting the

parameters. If this compromises personal safety
(e.g. personal injury caused by contact with
moving machine parts). Prevent motor starting,
for instance by use of the Safe Torque Off
function or secure disconnection of the motor
connection.

3.

A motor that has been stopped with the mains

supply connected, may start if faults occur in the
electronics of the frequency converter, through
temporary overload, or if a fault in the power
supply grid or motor connection is remedied. If
unintended start must be prevented for personal
safety reasons (e.g. risk of injury caused by
contact with moving machine parts), the normal
stop functions of the frequency converter are not
sufficient. In such cases, disconnect mains supply
or activate Safe Torque Off.

WARNING
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of
the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause
death, serious personal injury or damage to the
equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety
regulations, must be complied with.
Safety Regulations
1.
Disconnect mains supply to the frequency
converter whenever repair work is to be carried
out. Check that the mains supply has been
disconnected and that the necessary time has
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply
plugs.
2.

[Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and

consequently, it must not be used as a safety
switch.

3.

Ground the equipment properly, protect the user

against supply voltage and protect the motor
against overload in accordance with applicable
national and local regulations.

4.

The earth leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA.

5.

Protection against motor overload is not included

in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to
data value [4] ETR trip 1 or data value [3] ETR
warning 1.

6.

Do not remove the plugs for the motor and

mains supply while the frequency converter is
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
mains plugs.

7.

The frequency converter has more voltage

sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24
V DC are installed. Check that all voltage sources
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before commencing repair work.

1 1

Warning against unintended start

1.
The motor can be stopped with digital
commands, bus commands, references or a local
stop, while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. These stop functions are not sufficient
to prevent unintended motor start and thus
prevent personal injury caused by e.g. contact
with moving parts. To consider personal safety,
disconnect the mains supply or activate the Safe
Torque Off function.

NOTICE
When using Safe Torque Off, always follow the
instructions in Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions for
Danfoss VLT Frequency Converters.
4.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Control signals from, or internally within, the

frequency converter may in rare cases be
activated in error, be delayed or fail to occur
entirely. When used in situations where safety is
critical, e.g. when controlling the electromagnetic
brake function of a hoist application, these
control signals must not be relied on exclusively.

Introduction

1 1

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

WARNING
High Voltage
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after
the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been
disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor
connection for kinetic back up.
Systems where frequency converters are installed must,
if necessary, be equipped with additional monitoring
and protective devices according to the valid safety
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
the prevention of accidents etc. Modifications on the
frequency converters by means of the operating
software are allowed.

NOTICE
Hazardous situations shall be identified by the machine
builder/integrator who is responsible for taking
necessary preventive means into consideration.
Additional monitoring and protective devices may be
included, always according to valid national safety
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
the prevention of accidents.
Crane, Lifts and Hoists
The controlling of external brakes must always have a
redundant system. The frequency converter can in no

circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with

relevant standards, e.g.
Hoists and cranes: IEC 60204-32
Lifts: EN 81
Protection Mode
Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC link voltage
is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
minimise losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
motor.
In hoist applications, protection mode is not usable
because the frequency converter usually is unable to leave
this mode again and therefore it extends the time before
activating the brake, which is not recommended.
Protection mode can be disabled by setting
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault to zero which
means that the frequency converter trips immediately, if
one of the hardware limits is exceeded.

NOTICE
It is recommended to disable Protection mode in
hoisting applications (parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at
Inverter Fault = 0)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Introduction

1 1

3 Phase
power
input

DC bus

+10Vdc

Switch Mode
Power Supply
10Vdc
24Vdc
15mA 130/200mA

88 (-)
89 (+)
50 (+10 V OUT)

Motor

Brake
resistor

(R+) 82

(R-) 81

S201
ON

53 (A IN)

S202
ON

54 (A IN)

1 2

0/-10Vdc +10Vdc
0/4-20 mA

(U) 96
(V) 97
(W) 98
(PE) 99

1 2

0/-10Vdc +10Vdc
0/4-20 mA

91 (L1)
92 (L2)
93 (L3)
95 PE

130BC931.10

1.6 Electrical Wiring

relay1

ON=0/4-20mA
OFF=0/-10Vdc +10Vdc

03

55 (COM A IN)

* relay2

12 (+24V OUT)

01
06

13 (+24V OUT)
18 (D IN)

04

19 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

(COM A OUT) 39

(COM D IN)

27

(D IN/OUT)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

24V

S801

Analog Output
0/4-20 mA

ON=Terminated
OFF=Open

ON

24V

1 2

(D IN/OUT)

400Vac, 2A

(A OUT) 42

0V
*
29

240Vac, 2A

05

P 5-00
24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

20

240Vac, 2A

02

5V
24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)
S801

0V
32 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

33 (D IN)

24V (NPN)
0V (PNP)

RS-485
Interface

0V
RS-485

(N RS-485) 69
(P RS-485) 68
(COM RS-485) 61

**

*
37 (D IN)

: Chassis
: Earth

Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in FC 301.
** Do not connect cable screen.
Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases and depending on installation result in 50/60 Hz earth loops
due to noise from mains supply cables.
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the
frequency converter to avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on the
digital input may disturb the analog input signal.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

12

13

18

19

27

0 VDC

Digital input wiring

130BT106.10

+24 VDC

PNP (Source)

29

32

33

20

130BA681.10

Input polarity of control terminals

37

12

0 VDC

NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring
13

18

19

27

130BT107.11

Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

+24 VDC

29

32

33

20

Illustration 1.5 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables

37

1.6.1 Start/Stop

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)

NOTICE

Start/Stop

Control cables must be screened/armoured.

Speed

See section Grounding of Screened Control Cables in the

Design Guide for the correct termination of control cables.
Start/Stop
[18]

Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop

10

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Safe Stop

130BA155.12

P 5-12 [0]

P 5-10 [8]

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No
operation (Default coast inverse)
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available)

+24V

1 1

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Introduction

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

1.6.2 Pulse Start/Stop

P 5 - 12 [6]

P 5 - 10[9]

+24V
12

13

18

130BA156.12

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, [9] Latched

start.
Terminal 27= 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, [6] Stop inverse.
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available).

19

27

29

32

33

20

37

12

+24V

18

Par. 5-10

27

Par. 5-12

29

Par. 5-13

32

Par. 5-14

1 1

130BA021.12

Introduction

37

Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down

Start

Stop inverse

1.6.4 Potentiometer Reference

Safe Stop

Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)

Speed

Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V

Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM

Speed RPM
P 6-15

+10V/30mA

Start (27)

130BA154.11

Switch S201 = OFF (U)

Start (18)

39 42 50 53 54 55

Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop

1.6.3 Speed Up/Down

Ref. voltage
P 6-11 10V

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9]
Start (default)
Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [19]
Freeze reference

1 k

Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference

Terminal 29 = 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [21]

Speed up
Terminal 32 = 5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input [22]
Speed down

NOTICE
Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x=series type).

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

11

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

2 How to Programme
130BA018.13

2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local

Control Panels
The easiest programming of the frequency converter is
performed by the graphical LCP (LCP 102). Consult the
frequency converter Design Guide, when using the Numeric
Local Control Panel (LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
1.
Graphical display with Status lines.
2.

Status
1234rpm

Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

4.

Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

Status

Status line: Status messages displaying text.

NOTICE

12

ck

OK

On

Alarm
Log

Warn.
Alarm

If some operation is delaying the start-up, the LCP

displays the INITIALISING message until it is ready.
Adding or removing options may delay the start-up.

Main
Menu

Info

c.

Quick
Menu

l
ce

Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data

defined or selected by the user. By pressing
[Status], up to one extra line can be added.

n
Ca

b.

Run OK

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Illustration 2.1 Control Panel (LCP)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

43,5Hz

43,5Hz

All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can

show up to 5 items of operating data while displaying
[Status].
Display lines:
a.
Status line: Status messages displaying icons and
graphic.

10,4A

Menu keys and indicator lights - changing

parameters and switching between display
functions.

3.

1(0)

Ba

2 2

How to Programme

Reset

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

The LCD-display has backlight and a total of 6 alphanumeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the selected set-up as well as the
programming set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.

On

43 RPM

! 1(1)
5.44 A

25.3kW

130BP074.10

Status

2.9%

Status

Quick
Menu

Main
Menu

Alarm
Log

Illustration 2.4 LCP Keys

! Pwr.card temp (W29)

Auto Remote Running

Illustration 2.2 Bottom Section

The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in

parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming
another set-up than the active set-up, the number of the
programmed set-up appears to the right.
Display contrast adjustment
Press [Status] and [] for darker display
Press [Status] and [] for brighter display

[Status]
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic
Control.
Press [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
changing back to Display mode from either the Quick
Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also
use [Status] to toggle single or double read-out mode.
[Quick Menu]
allows quick access to different Quick Menus such as Quick
Menu

Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via

the LCP, unless a password has been created via
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
Indicator lights (LEDs)
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
the LCP.
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter
receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal or 24 V
external supply. At the same time, the back light is on.

LCP Keys
The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter Set-up, including choice of display indication
during normal operation.

1.4 Hz

Middle section

Bottom section

Alarm

Illustration 2.3 Indicator lights (LEDs)

Bottom section
always shows the state of the frequency converter in
Status mode.
Top section

2 2

Warn.

Top section
shows up to 2 measurements in normal operating status.
Middle section
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).

130BP044.10

2.1.1 The LCD-Display

130BP045.10

How to Programme

Green LED/On: Control section is working.

Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning.
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

My Personal Menu
Quick Set-up
Changes Made
Loggings

Press [Quick Menu] to program the parameters belonging

to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch directly
between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
[Main Menu]
is used for programming all parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
and Quick Menu mode.
Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down
[Main Menu] for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
direct access to any parameter.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13

[Alarm Log]
displays an Alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the
navigation keys to manoeuvre to the alarm number and
press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of
the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode.
[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation
structure.
[Cancel]
last change or command is cancelled as long as the
display has not been changed.
[Info]
supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
information whenever help is needed.
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel].
Back

[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand
on] Key on LCP
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus override a start command via the LCP.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated

[Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto On]

Reset
Coasting stop inverse
Reversing
Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake

[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.

Illustration 2.5 Back

Cancel

Illustration 2.6 Cancel

[Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.

Info

Illustration 2.7 Info

NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
[Auto On].

Navigation Keys
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu]
and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.
[OK]
is used for selecting a parameter marked by the cursor and
for enabling the change of a parameter.
Local Control Keys
for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP.

Hand
on

Off

Illustration 2.8 Local Control Keys

Auto
on

Reset

130BP046.10

2 2

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding
down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.

2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings

between Multiple Frequency
Converters
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,
store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software Tool.

14

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Quick
Menu

Main
Menu

Alarm
Log

2 2

In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables

can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.

It is possible to toggle between 3 status read-out screens

by pressing [Status].
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen - see below.

Info

OK

On

2.1.3 Display Mode

2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of ReadOuts

el
nc
Ca

Ba
ck

Status

130BA027.10

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

Warn.

Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to

each of the operating variables. When options are
mounted, additional measurements are available. Define
the links via parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large, and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.

Alarm

Hand
on

Off

Auto
on

Reset

Illustration 2.9 LCP

Data storage in LCP

NOTICE

Stop the motor before performing this operation.

1.
Go to 0-50 LCP Copy

Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display

Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale
and digits after a possible decimal point. By larger numeric
value of a parameter fewer digits are displayed after the
decimal point.
Ex.: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
Operating variable

Unit

Parameter 16-00 Control Word

hex

Parameter 16-01 Reference [Unit]

[unit]

Parameter 16-02 Reference [%]

Parameter 16-03 Status Word

hex

Parameter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

Parameter 16-10 Power [kW]

[kW]

Parameter 16-11 Power [hp]

[HP]

Parameter 16-12 Motor Voltage

[V]

Parameter 16-13 Frequency

[Hz]

Parameter 16-14 Motor current

[A]

NOTICE

Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm]

Nm

Stop the motor before performing this operation.

1.
Go to 0-50 LCP Copy

Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]

[RPM]

Parameter 16-18 Motor Thermal

2.

Press the [OK] key

3.

Select [1] All to LCP

4.

Press the [OK] key

All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated

by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy
the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well.
Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter

Parameter 16-20 Motor Angle

2.

Press the [OK] key

Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage

3.

Select [2] All from LCP

Parameter 16-32 Brake Energy /s

kW

Press the [OK] key

Parameter 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min

kW

Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp.

Parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal

Parameter 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current

4.

The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now

transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].

Parameter 16-38 SL Controller State

parameter 16-39 Control Card Temp.

Parameter 16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Parameter 16-50 External Reference

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

15

Status
207RPM

Parameter 16-52 Feedback[Unit]

[Unit]

1 (1)
5.25A

24.4 kW

1.1

6.9

Parameter 16-53 Digi Pot Reference

Hz

Parameter 16-60 Digital Input

1.3

bin

Parameter 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting V

Parameter 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting V

Parameter 16-64 Analog Input 54

[mA]

Parameter 16-66 Digital Output [bin]

[bin]

Parameter 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]

[Hz]

Parameter 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]

[Hz]

Parameter 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

[Hz]

Parameter 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

[Hz]

Illustration 2.11 Status Screen II

Status Screen III

This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic
Control. For further information, see
chapter 3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control.

Parameter 16-71 Relay Output [bin]

Parameter 16-72 Counter A

Status

Parameter 16-73 Counter B

778 RPM

16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1

hex

16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

hex

16-84 Comm. Option STW

hex

16-85 FC Port CTW 1

hex

16-86 FC Port REF 1

hex

1.2

Auto Remote Running

Parameter 16-62 Analog Input 53

parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

130BP062.10

Unit

Parameter 16-51 Pulse Reference

1 (1)
0.86 A

4.0 kW

State: 0 off 0 (off )

When: Do: Auto Remote Running

Illustration 2.12 Status Screen III

16-90 Alarm Word

16-92 Warning Word
Parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word

2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up

Table 2.1 Measurements

Status Screen I
This read-out state is standard after start-up or initialisation.
Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement
links to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2
and 3).
See the operating variables shown in Illustration 2.10.
Status
799 RPM
1.1

0.000

1.2
2

7.83 A

1 (1)
36.4 kw

2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions

Press [Quick Menus] to see a list of different areas
contained in the Quick menu.
Select My Personal Menu to display the selected personal
parameters. These parameters are selected in
parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
parameters can be added in this menu.

53.2 %
Auto Remote Ramping

The frequency converter can be used for practically all

assignments. The frequency converter offers a choice
between 2 programming modes - a Main Menu and a
Quick Menu mode.
The former provides access to all parameters. The latter
takes the user through a few parameters making it
possible to start operating the frequency converter.
Change a parameter in either Main Menu mode or Quick
Menu mode.

1.3

Illustration 2.10 Status Screen I

Status Screen II
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2) shown in
Illustration 2.11.
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power and
frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
lines.

16

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

130BP063.10

Operating variable

130BP041.10

2 2

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

0RPM
0.00A
Quick Menus

1(1)

Q1 My Personal Menu
Q2 Quick Setup
Q4 Smart Setup
Q5 Changes Made

Select Changes made to get information about:

130BC916.10

How to Programme

Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus

Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a limited amount of

parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
default setting for the other parameters considers the
desired control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).

the last 10 changes. Use the [] [] navigation

keys to scroll between the last 10 changed
parameters.

the changes made since default setting.

2 2

Select Loggings to get information about the display line

read-outs. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed.
It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for
later reference.

The parameter selection is effected with the navigation

keys. The parameters in Table 2.2 are accessible.
Parameter

Setting

Parameter 0-01 Language

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]

[kW]

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage

[V]

Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency

[Hz]

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current

[A]

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

[RPM]

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

[0] No function*

Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor

Adaptation (AMA)

[1] Enable complete

AMA

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference

[RPM]

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

[RPM]

Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

[s]

Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down

Time

[s]

Parameter 3-13 Reference Site

Table 2.2 Selection of Parameter
* If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
terminal 27 is necessary.

2.1.7 Initial Commissioning

The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by pressing [Quick Menu] and following the quick set-up
procedure using LCP 102 (read Table 2.3 from left to right). The example applies to open loop applications.
Press
Quick
Menu

Q2 Quick Menu

Parameter 0-01 Language

OK

Set language

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]

OK

Set Motor nameplate power

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

OK

17

2 2

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage

OK

Set Nameplate voltage

Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency

OK

Set Nameplate frequency

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current

OK

Set Nameplate current

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

OK

Set Nameplate speed in RPM

If terminal default is Coast
inverse it is possible to change
this setting to No function. No
connection to terminal 27 is
then needed for running AMA

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

OK

Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor

Adaptation (AMA)

OK

Set desired AMA function.

Enable complete AMA is
recommended

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference

OK

Set the minimum speed of the

motor shaft

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

OK

Set the maximum speed of the

motor shaft

Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up

Time

OK

Set the ramping up time with

reference to synchronous
motor speed, ns

Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down

Time

OK

Set the ramping down time

with reference to synchronous
motor speed, ns

Parameter 3-13 Reference Site

OK

Set the site from where the

reference must work

Table 2.3 Quick Set-up Procedure

18

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

Another easy way of commissioning the frequency

converter is by using the Smart Application Setup (SAS),
which can also be found under the Quick Menu. Follow
the indications on the successive screens for setting up the
applications listed.
[Info] can be used throughout the SAS to see help
information for various selections, settings, and messages.
The following 3 applications are included:

2.1.9 Parameter Selection

In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
The following parameter groups are accessible:

Mechanical Brake
Conveyor
Pump/Fan

Group no. Parameter group

The following 4 field-busses can be selected:

Profibus

0-**

Operation/Display

1-**

Load/Motor

Profinet
DeviceNet
EthernetIP
NOTICE

2-**

Brakes

3-**

References/Ramps

4-**

Limits/Warnings

5-**

Digital In/Out

6-**

Analog In/Out

7-**

Controls

8-**

Comm. and Options

NOTICE

9-**

Profibus

10-**

CAN Fieldbus

The Smart Set-up runs automatically on the first powerup of the frequency converter or after a reset to factory
settings. If no action is taken, the SAS screen automatically disappears after 10 min.

11-**

Reserved Com. 1

12-**

Ethernet

13-**

Smart Logic

14-**

Special Functions

15-**

Drive Information

16-**

Data Readouts

17-**

Motor Feedb. Option

18-**

Data Readouts 2

30-**

Special Features

32-**

MCO Basic Settings

33-**

MCO Adv. Settings

34-**

MCO Data Readouts

35-**

Sensor Input Option

The start conditions are ignored while in the wizard.

2.1.8 Main Menu Mode

1107 RPM

3.84 A

Main menu
0 - ** Operation/Display

1 (1)

130BP066.10

Start the Main Menu mode by pressing [Main Menu]. The

read-out shown below appears on the display.
The middle and bottom sections on the display show a list
of parameter groups which can be selected by toggling []
and [] keys.

1 - ** Load/Motor
2 - ** Brakes
3 - ** Reference / Ramps

Table 2.4 Accessible Parameter Goups

After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with

the navigation keys.
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
number and name as well as the selected parameter value.

Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode

740RPM
Basic Settings

Each parameter has a name and number which remain the

same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main
Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The
first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates
the parameter group number.

0 -01 Language

10.64A

1 [1]
0-0*

130BP067.10

All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.

However, depending on the choice of configuration
(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can
be "missing". E.g. open loop hides all the PID parameters,
and other enabled options make more parameter groups
visible.

[0] English

Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

19

2 2

729RPM

6.21A

Load depen. setting

The procedure for changing data is the same in the Quick

Menu and the Main Menu mode. Press [OK] to change the
selected parameter.
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a
text value.

2.1.11 Changing a Text Value

0 -01 Language

Illustration 2.18 Saving a Data Value

If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,

select a digit with [] [].
635 RPM
Start Adjustments

0.44 A

1 (1)
1- 7*

1 - 71 Start Delay
00.0s

[0] English

Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value

Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit

If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,

change the selected data value by means of the [] []
navigation keys as well as the [] [] navigation keys. Press
[] [] keys to move the cursor horizontally.

Load depen. setting

1 - 60 Low speed load

1.78 A

1(1)
1- 6*

Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [] [].

The selected digit is indicated by the cursor. Place the
cursor on the digit to save and press [OK].

957RPM

11.58A

Start Adjustments

1 (1)
1-7*

1-71 High starting torque time

130BP072.10

2.1.12 Changing

113 RPM

130BP073.10

1 [1]
0-0*

16 0%

130BP068.10

10.64 A

1 - 60 Low speed load

compensation

2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of

Numeric Data Value

If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text

value with the [] [] keys.
Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
740RPM
Basic Settings

1(1)
1- 6*

130BP070.10

2.1.10 Changing Data

130BP069.10

2 2

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

0. 4s

Illustration 2.20 Saving

compensation
100%

2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step

Illustration 2.17 Changing a Data Value

Press [] [] keys to change the data value. [] increases

the data value, and [] decreases the data value. Place the
cursor on the value to save and press [OK].

Certain parameters can be changed step by step or

infinitely varying. This applies to 1-20 Motor Power [kW],
1-22 Motor Voltage and 1-23 Motor Frequency.
The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
data values and as numeric data values infinitely varying.

2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of

Indexed Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.
Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log which
can be read out. Select a parameter, press [OK], and use
[] [] to scroll through the value log.

20

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

How to Programme

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Numerical display.

2.

Menu keys and indicator lights - changing

parameters and switching between display
functions.

3.

Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

4.

Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).

Status
2

Menu

Display line: Status messages displaying icons and

numeric value
Indicator lights (LEDs)
Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.

Warn.

Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm.

Alarm

Select one of the following modes:

Status

Quick Setup

Auto
on

Reset

OK

On

Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning.

LCP keys
[Menu]

Main
Menu

Hand
on

Off

Illustration 2.21 LCP Keys

Main Menu
Status Mode
Displays the status of the frequency converter or the
motor.
If an alarm occurs the NLCP automatically switches to
status mode.
A number of alarms can be displayed.

NOTICE
Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 Numerical
Local Control Panel.

22.8

rpm

130BP077.10

Quick
Setup

ck

1.

Setup

Ba

The following instructions are valid for the Numerical LCP

(LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:

130BA191.10

Use parameter 3-10 Preset Reference as another example:

Select the parameter, press [OK], and use [] [] to scroll
through the indexed values. To change the parameter
value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the
value by pressing [] []. Press [OK] to accept the new
setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
parameter.

Setup 1

Illustration 2.22 Status Mode

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

21

2 2

A 17

2 2

130BP078.10

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

How to Programme

Setup 1

Illustration 2.23 Alarm

Main Menu/Quick Setup

is used for programming all parameters or only the
parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 earlier in chapter 2.1 The Graphical and Numerical
Local Control Panels).
When the value flashes, press [] or [] to change
parameter values.
Select Main Menu by pressing [Menu] a number of times.
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press [OK]
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK]
If the parameter is an array parameter select the array
number and press [OK]
Select the wanted data value and press [OK]
Parameters with functional choices display values such as
[1], [2], etc. For a description of the different choices, see
the individual description of the parameters in
chapter 3 Parameter Descriptions

P 2-03
Menu

Status

Quick
Setup

130BP079.10

[Back]
for stepping backwards
[] [] are used for manoeuvring between commands and
within parameters.

Setup 1

Main
Menu

Illustration 2.25 LCP Keys

Coasting stop inverse

Reversing
Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
DC brake

[Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
[Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.

130BP046.10

Reset

2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings

Initialise the frequency converter to default settings in 2
ways.
Recommended initialisation (via
parameter 14-22 Operation Mode)
1.
Select 14-22 Operation Mode
2.

22

Reset

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.

Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP.

Auto
on

[Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]

An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs

has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
[Auto On].

2.1.16 LCP Keys

Off

NOTICE

Illustration 2.24 Main Menu/Quick Setup

Hand
on

[Hand On]
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand
on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus overrides a 'start' command via the LCP.
The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated:

Press [OK]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

How to Programme

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.

Select [2] Initialisation

4.

Press [OK]

5.

Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the

display turns off.

6.

Reconnect the mains supply - the frequency

converter is now reset.

2 2

14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except:

Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter

8-30 Protocol
Parameter 8-31 Address
Parameter 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
Parameter 8-35 Minimum Response Delay
Parameter 8-36 Max Response Delay
Parameter 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's

Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to

parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time

Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to

parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time

Manual initialisation
1.

Disconnect from mains and wait until the display

turns off.

2.

2a

Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at

the same time while power up for LCP
102, Graphical Display

2b

Press [Menu] - [OK] while power up for

LCP 101, Numerical Display

3.

Release the keys after 5 s.

4.

The frequency converter is now programmed

according to default settings.

This procedure initialises all except:

Parameter 15-00 Operating hours
Parameter 15-03 Power Up's
Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's
Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's

NOTICE
A manual initialisation also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (parameter 14-50 RFI Filter) and fault
log settings.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

23

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3 Parameter Descriptions
3.1 Parameter Selection

16-** Readout parameters

Parameters are grouped into various parameter groups for

easy selection of the correct parameters for optimised
operation of the frequency converter.

17-** Encoder Option parameters

0-** Operation and Display parameters

18-** Readout 2 parameters

30-** Special Features

Basic Settings, set-up handling

32-** MCO Basic Settings parameters

Display and Local Control Panel parameters for

selecting readouts, setting up selections and
copying functions

1-** Load and Motor parameters include all load and

motor related parameters

33-** MCO Adv. Settings parameters

34-** MCO Data Readouts
35-** Sensor Input Option parameters

2-** Brake parameters

NOTICE

DC brake

To see if a parameter can be used in a specific control

mode, use Table 4.3.

Dynamic brake (Resistor brake)

Mechanical brake
Overvoltage Control

3-** References and ramping parameters include DigiPot

function
4-** Limits Warnings; setting of limits and warning
parameters
5-** Digital inputs and outputs include relay controls
6-** Analog inputs and outputs
7-** Controls; Setting parameters for speed and process
controls
8-** Communication and option parameters for setting of
RS-485 and USB port parameters.
9-** Profibus parameters
10-** DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus parameters
12-** Ethernet parameters
13-** Smart Logic Control parameters
14-** Special function parameters
15-** Drive information parameters

24

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display

Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the
frequency converter, function of the LCP keys and configuration of the LCP display.

3.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings

Option:

Function:

[51] Bahasa
Indonesia

Part of Language package 2

[52] Hrvatski

Part of Language package 3

3 3

0-02 Motor Speed Unit

Option: Function:

0-01 Language
Option:

0-01 Language

NOTICE

Function:

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.

Defines the language to be used in the

display. The frequency converter is
delivered with 4 different language
packages English and German are included
in all packages. English cannot be erased
or manipulated.

The display showing depends on settings in

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional
Settings. The default setting of parameter 0-02 Motor

[0]

English

Part of Language packages 1 - 4

[1]

Deutsch

Part of Language packages 1 - 4

Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional Settings depends on

which region of the world the frequency converter is
supplied to, but can be re-programmed as required.

[2]

Francais

Part of Language package 1

NOTICE

[3]

Dansk

Part of Language package 1

[4]

Spanish

Part of Language package 1

[5]

Italiano

Part of Language package 1

[6]

Svenska

Part of Language package 1

[7]

Nederlands

Part of Language package 1

Changing the Motor Speed Unit resets certain

parameters to their initial value. It is
recommended to select the motor speed unit
first, before modifying other parameters.
[0] RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and
parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of motor speed (RPM).

[10] Chinese

Part of Language package 2

[20] Suomi

Part of Language package 1

[22] English US

Part of Language package 4

[27] Greek

Part of Language package 4

[28] Bras.port

Part of Language package 4

NOTICE

[36] Slovenian

Part of Language package 3

[39] Korean

Part of Language package 2

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

[40] Japanese

Part of Language package 2

[41] Turkish

Part of Language package 4

[42] Trad.Chinese

Part of Language package 2

[43] Bulgarian

Part of Language package 3

[44] Srpski

Part of Language package 3

[45] Romanian

Part of Language package 3

[46] Magyar

Part of Language package 3

[47] Czech

Part of Language package 3

[48] Polski

Part of Language package 4

[49] Russian

Part of Language package 3

[50] Thai

Part of Language package 2

[1] Hz

Selects display of motor speed variables and

parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).

0-03 Regional Settings

Option:

[0] * International

Function:

Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for

setting the motor power in kW and sets the
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
to 50 Hz.

[1]

US

Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for

setting the motor power in hp and sets the
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
to 60 Hz.

0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand)

Option:

Function:
Selects the operating mode upon
reconnection of the frequency converter to
mains voltage after power down in Hand
(local) operation mode.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

25

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand)

0-10 Active Set-up

Option:

Option:

[0]

Resume

Function:
Restarts the frequency converter, maintaining
the same and the same start/stop settings
(applied by [Hand On/Off]) as before the
frequency converter was powered down.

[1] * Forced stop, Restarts the frequency converter with a saved

ref=old
local reference, after mains voltage reappears
and after pressing [Hand On].
[2]

[1] * Set-up 1

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

[9]

Multi Setup

Forced stop, Resets the local reference to 0 upon

ref=0
restarting the frequency converter.

Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to one or

all other set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before
switching between set-ups where parameters marked not
changeable during operation have different values. To
avoid conflicting settings of the same parameter within 2
different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are
not changeable during operation are marked FALSE in the
parameter lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists.
0-11 Edit Set-up
Option:

[0]

Factory
setup

[1] * Set-up 1

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

[9]

Active Setup

Function:
Select the set-up to control the frequency
converter functions.

26

Function:
Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.
programmed) during operation; either the
active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups.

0-10 Active Set-up

Factory
setup

Remote selection of set-ups using digital

inputs and the serial communication port. This
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop the
frequency converter before making changes to
open- and closed loop functions

Define and control the individual parameter set-ups.

The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can
be programmed independently of each other. This makes
the frequency converter very flexible and able to solve
advanced control functionality problems, often saving the
cost of external control equipment. For example these can
be used to program the frequency converter to operate
according to one control scheme in one set-up (e.g. motor
1 for horizontal movement) and another control scheme in
another set-up (e.g. motor 2 for vertical movement).
Alternatively they can be used by an OEM machine builder
to identically program all their factory fitted frequency
converters for different machine types within a range to
have the same parameters and then during production/
commissioning simply select a specific set-up depending
on which machine the frequency converter is installed on.
The active set-up (i.e. the set-up in which the frequency
converter is currently operating) can be selected in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the LCP.
Using Multi set-up it is possible to switch between set-ups
with the frequency converter running or stopped, via
digital input or serial communication commands. If it is
necessary to change set-ups whilst running, ensure
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is programmed as
required. Using parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up it is possible to
edit parameters within any of the set-ups whilst continuing
the frequency converter operation in its active set-up
which can be a different set-up to that being edited. Using
parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy it is possible to copy parameter
settings between the set-ups to enable quicker commissioning if similar parameter settings are required in
different set-ups.

[0]

[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 separate

parameter set-ups within which all parameters
can be programmed.

set-up uses the settings from

3.2.2 0-1* Set-up Operations

Option:

Function:

Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss

data set, and can be used as a data source
when returning the other set-ups to a known
state.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data

source to return the other set-ups to a known
state.
[1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited
freely during operation, independently of the
active set-up.

Can also be edited during operation. Edit the

selected set-up from a range of sources: LCP,
FC RS-485, FC USB or up to 5 fieldbus sites.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

130BA199.10

Set-up
1
2

0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option:

Function:
Set-up 2 are synchronised (or linked). Synchronisation can be performed in 2 ways:

P 0-11

1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in

parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up and set

parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to [1] Set-up

1. This starts the linking (synchronising) process.

Set-up

0 RPM
0.00A
Set-up Handling
0-12 This Set-up Linked to

P 0-11

1(1)
0-1*

130BP075.10

[1] Setup 1
4

Illustration 3.2 Set-up 1

Set-up
1
2

OR

P 0-11

2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-

to to [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking process.

0 RPM
0.00A
Set-up Handling
0-12 This Set-up Linked to

PLC Fieldbus
Set-up
1

[2] Setup 2

P 0-11

1(1)
0-1*

130BP076.10

up 2. Then set parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked

Illustration 3.3 Set-up 2

3
4

After the link is complete,

Illustration 3.1 Edit Set-up

parameter 0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups reads

{1,2} to indicate that all not changeable during
operation parameters are now the same in Setup 1 and Set-up 2. If there are changes to a
not changeable during operation parameter,

0-12 This Set-up Linked to

Option:

Function:
To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up
to another during operation, link set-ups
containing parameters which are not
changeable during operation. The link ensures
synchronising of the not changeable during
operation parameter values when moving from
one set-up to another during operation. Not
changeable during operation parameters can
be identified by the label FALSE in the
parameter lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists.

e.g. parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs), in Setup 2, they are also changed automatically in
Set-up 1. A switch between Set-up 1 and Set-up
2 during operation is now possible.
[0] * Not linked
[1]

Set-up 1

[2]

Set-up 2

[3]

Set-up 3

[4]

Set-up 4

Parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by

Multi set-up in parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.
Multi set-up is used to move from one set-up
to another during operation (i.e. while the
motor is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Setup 2 whilst the motor is running. Programme in
Set-up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

27

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Array [5]

Option:

Range:
0*

3 3

[0 255 ]

Performance
Monitor

[15]

Readout: actual
setup

[37]

Display Text 1

{0}

{1,2}

[38]

Display Text 2

{1,2}

[39]

Display Text 3

{3}

[748]

PCD Feed Forward

{4}

[953]

Profibus Warning
Word

[1005]

Readout Transmit
Error Counter

[1006]

Readout Receive
Error Counter

[1007]

Readout Bus Off

Counter

Function:

[-2147483648 2147483647 ]

View the setting of parameter 0-11 Edit Set-

[1013]

Warning Parameter

[1230]

Warning Parameter

[1472]

Legacy Alarm Word

[1473]

Legacy Warning
Word

[1474]

Leg. Ext. Status

Word

[1501]

Running Hours

No display value selected.

up for each of the 4 different

communication channels. When the
number is displayed as a hex number, as it
is in the LCP, each number represents one
channel.
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; F
means factory setting; and A means active
set-up. The channels are, from right to left:
LCP, FC-bus, USB, HPFB1-5.
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means

[1502]

kWh Counter

[1580]

Fan Running Hours

that the FC bus selected Set-up 2 in

[1600]

Control Word

Present control word

parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up, the LCP selected

Set-up 1 and all others used the active setup.

[1601]

Reference [Unit]

Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up and slow-down) in selected
unit.

[1602]

Reference %

Total reference (sum of digital/

analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up and slow-down) in percent.

[1603]

Status Word

Present status word.

[1605]

Main Actual Value

[%]

Actual value as a percentage.

0-15 Readout: actual setup

Function:

[0 - 255 ] Makes it possible to read out the active set-up,

also when multi set-up is selected in
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.

3.2.3 0-2* LCP Display

Define the variables displayed in the Graphical Local
Control Panel.

NOTICE
Refer to 0-37 Display Text 1, 0-38 Display Text 2 and
0-39 Display Text 3 for information on how to write
display texts.

28

[9]

LCP value

Range:

0*

None

0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel

Range:

[0]

Index

Table 3.2 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are

linked

0*

Select a variable for display in line

1, left position.

Function:
View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of
0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter has one
index for each parameter set-up. The parameter
value displayed for each index represents which
set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up.

Function:

[1609]

Custom Readout

[1610]

Power [kW]

Actual power consumed by the

motor in kW.

[1611]

Power [hp]

Actual power consumed by the

motor in hp.

[1612]

Motor Voltage

Voltage supplied to the motor.

[1613]

Frequency

Motor frequency, i.e. the output

frequency from the frequency
converter in Hz

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

[1614]

Motor current

Phase current of the motor

measured as effective value.

[1647]

Motor Phase W
Current

[1615]

Frequency [%]

Motor frequency, i.e. the output

frequency from the frequency
converter in percent.

[1648]

Speed Ref. After

Ramp [RPM]

[1650]

External Reference

Sum of the external reference as a

percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/
pulse/bus.

[1651]

Pulse Reference

Frequency in Hz connected to the

digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33).

[1652]

Feedback[Unit]

Reference value from programmed

digital input(s).

[1653]

Digi Pot Reference

[1616]

Torque [Nm]

Actual motor torque in Nm

[1617]

Speed [RPM]

Speed in RPM (revolutions per

minute) i.e. the motor shaft speed
in closed loop.

[1618]

Motor Thermal

Thermal load on the motor,

calculated by the ETR function.

[1619]

KTY sensor
temperature

[1657]

Feedback [RPM]

[1660]

Digital Input

Signal states form the 6 digital

terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and
33). There are 16 bits in total, but
only six of them are used. Input 18
corresponds to the leftmost of the
used bits. Signal low = 0; Signal
high = 1.

[1620]

Motor Angle

[1621]

Torque [%] High

Res.

[1622]

Torque [%]

[1623]

Motor Shaft Power

[kW]

[1661]

[1624]

Calibrated Stator
Resistance

Terminal 53 Switch
Setting

Setting of input terminal 54.

Current = 0; Voltage = 1.

[1662]

Analog Input 53

[1625]

Torque [Nm] High

Actual value at input 53 either as a

reference or protection value.

[1630]

DC Link Voltage

Intermediate circuit voltage in the

frequency converter.

[1663]

Terminal 54 Switch
Setting

Setting of input terminal 54.

Current = 0; Voltage = 1.

[1632]

Brake Energy /s

Present brake power transferred to

an external brake resistor.
Stated as an instantaneous value.

[1664]

Analog Input 54

Actual value at input 54 either as

reference or protection value.

[1665]

Brake Energy /2
min

Brake power transferred to an

external brake resistor. The mean
power is calculated continuously
for the most recent 120 s.

Analog Output 42
[mA]

Actual value at output 42 in mA.

[1633]

[1634]

Heatsink Temp.

Present motor load as a

percentage of the rated motor
torque.

Present heat sink temperature of

the frequency converter. The cutout limit is 95 5 C; cutting back
in occurs at 70 5 C.

Use 6-50 Terminal 42 Output to

select the value to be shown.

[1666]

Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.

[1667]

Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency

applied at terminal 29 as an
impulse input.

[1668]

Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency

applied at terminal 33 as an
impulse input.

[1635]

Inverter Thermal

Percentage load of the inverters.

[1636]

Inv. Nom. Current

Nominal current of the frequency

converter.

[1669]

Pulse Output #27

[Hz]

Actual value of impulses applied to

terminal 27 in digital output mode.

[1637]

Inv. Max. Current

Maximum current of the frequency

converter.

[1670]

Pulse Output #29

[Hz]

Actual value of impulses applied to

terminal 29 in digital output mode.

[1638]

SL Controller State

State of the event executed by the

control.

[1671]

Relay Output [bin]

[1672]

Counter A

Application dependent (e.g. SLC

Control)

[1639]

Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card.

[1645]

Motor Phase U
Current

[1673]

Counter B

Application dependent (e.g. SLC

Control)

[1646]

Motor Phase V
Current

[1674]

Prec. Stop Counter

Display the actual counter value.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

29

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Option:

Option:

[1675]

Analog In X30/11

Function:
Actual value at input X30/11 either
as reference or protection value.

[1676]

Analog In X30/12

Actual value at input X30/12 either

as reference or protection value.

[1677]

Analog Out X30/8

[mA]

Actual value at output X30/8 in

mA. Use parameter 6-60 Terminal
X30/8 Output to select the value to
be shown.

[3110]

Bypass Status Word

[3111]

Bypass Running
Hours

[3401]

PCD 1 Write to
MCO

[3402]

PCD 2 Write to
MCO

[3403]

PCD 3 Write to
MCO

[1678]

Analog Out X45/1

[mA]

[3404]

PCD 4 Write to
MCO

[1679]

Analog Out X45/3

[mA]

[3405]

PCD 5 Write to
MCO

[1680]

Fieldbus CTW 1

Control word (CTW) received from

the Bus Master.

[3406]

PCD 6 Write to
MCO

[1682]

Fieldbus REF 1

Main reference value sent with

control word from the Bus Master.

[3407]

PCD 7 Write to
MCO

[1684]

Comm. Option STW Extended fieldbus communication

option status word.

[3408]

PCD 8 Write to
MCO

[3409]

[1685]

FC Port CTW 1

Control word (CTW) received from

the Bus Master.

PCD 9 Write to
MCO

[3410]

[1686]

FC Port REF 1

Status word (STW) sent to the Bus

Master.

PCD 10 Write to
MCO

[3421]

PCD 1 Read from

MCO

[3422]

PCD 2 Read from

MCO

[3423]

PCD 3 Read from

MCO

[3424]

PCD 4 Read from

MCO

[1687]

Bus Readout Alarm/

Warning

[1689]

Configurable
Alarm/Warning
Word

[1690]

Alarm Word

One or more alarms in a hex code.

[1691]

Alarm Word 2

One or more alarms in a hex code.

[3425]

[1692]

Warning Word

One or more warnings in a hex

code.

PCD 5 Read from

MCO

[3426]

PCD 6 Read from

MCO

[1693]

Warning Word 2

One or more warnings in a hex

code.

[3427]

PCD 7 Read from

MCO

[1694]

Ext. Status Word

One or more status conditions in a

hex code.

[3428]

PCD 8 Read from

MCO

[1836]

Analog Input X48/2

[mA]

[3429]

PCD 9 Read from

MCO

[1837]

Temp. Input X48/4

[3430]

PCD 10 Read from

MCO

[1838]

Temp. Input X48/7

[1839]

Temp. Input X48/10

[3440]

Digital Inputs

[1860]

Digital Input 2

[3441]

Digital Outputs

Process PID Error

[3450]

Actual Position
Commanded
Position

[1890]
[1891]

Process PID Output

[3451]

[1892]

Process PID
Clamped Output

[3452]

[1893]

Process PID Gain

Scaled Output

Actual Master
Position

[3453]

[3019]

Wobble Delta Freq.

Scaled

Slave Index
Position

30

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small

Option:

Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. The options

Function:

[3454]

Master Index
Position

[3455]

Curve Position

are the same as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

Option:

Function:

[1610 *] *

Power [kW]

3 3

[3456]

Track Error

[3457]

Synchronizing Error

[3458]

Actual Velocity

Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are the same

[3459]

Actual Master
Velocity

as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. The options are

[3460]

Synchronizing
Status

0-23 Display Line 2 Large

the same as those listed in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

Option:

Function:

[1613] *

Frequency

[3461]

Axis Status

[3462]

Program Status

0-24 Display Line 3 Large

[3464]

MCO 302 Status

Select a variable for display in line 3.

[3465]

MCO 302 Control

[3470]

MCO Alarm Word 1

[3471]

MCO Alarm Word 2

[4285]

Active Safe Func.

[4286]

Safe Option Info

[9913]

Idle time

[9914]

Paramdb requests
in queue

[9917]

tCon1 time

[9918]

tCon2 time

[9919]

Time Optimize
Measure

[9920]

HS Temp. (PC1)

[9921]

HS Temp. (PC2)

[9922]

HS Temp. (PC3)

[9923]

HS Temp. (PC4)

[9924]

HS Temp. (PC5)

[9925]

HS Temp. (PC6)

[9926]

HS Temp. (PC7)

[9927]

HS Temp. (PC8)

[9951]

PC Debug 0

[9952]

PC Debug 1

[9953]

PC Debug 2

[9954]

PC Debug 3

[9955]

PC Debug 4

[9956]

Fan 1 Feedback

[9957]

Fan 2 Feedback

[9958]

PC Auxiliary Temp

[9959]

Power Card Temp.

Option:

in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

0-25 My Personal Menu

Range:
Size
related*

[0 9999 ]

Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the

Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick
Menu] key on the LCP. The parameters are

3.2.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout

It is possible to customise the display elements for various
purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to speed
(Linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in
0-30 Custom Readout Unit) *Display Text. Text string stored
in a parameter.

Function:

[0] * None Select a variable for display in line 1, middle

position. The options are the same as listed for
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.

Function:

displayed in the Q1 Personal Menu in the

order they are programmed into this array
parameter. Delete parameters by setting the
value to 0000.
For example, this can be used to provide
quick, simple access to just one or up to 50
parameters which require changing on a
regular basis (e.g. for plant maintenance
reasons) or by an OEM to enable simple
commissioning of their equipment.

0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small

Option:

Function:

[1602 *] * Reference % The options are the same as those listed

Custom Readout
The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings
in 0-30 Custom Readout Unit, 0-31 Custom Readout Min
Value (linear only), parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max
Value, 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM],
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] and actual
speed.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

31

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

130BT105.12

Custom Readout (Value)

P 16-09
Custom Readout
Unit P 0-30
Max value
P 0-32

3 3
rU
ea
Li n

Min value
Linear
units only
P 0-31

.s
e.g
it (

d
ua

tic
ra

d
ee

it
Un

d
an

w)
fl o

e)
ur

ss
re
(P

ic

b
Cu

it
Un

)
er
ow
(P

Motor Speed
Motor Speed
High limit
P 4-13 (RPM)
P 4-14 (Hz)

Illustration 3.4 Custom Readout

The relation depends on the type of unit selected in

0-30 Custom Readout Unit:

0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout

Option:
[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

[60]

[70]

mbar

[71]

bar

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[80]

kW

Function:

[120] GPM
Unit Type

Speed Relation

[121] gal/s

Dimensionless

[122] gal/min

Speed

[123] gal/h

Flow, volume

[124] CFM

Flow, mass

Linear

[125] ft/s

Velocity

[126] ft/min

Length

[127] ft/h

Temperature

[130] lb/s

Pressure

Quadratic

[131] lb/min

Power

Cubic

[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s

Table 3.3 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types

[141] ft/min
[145] ft

0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout

Option:

[160] F

Function:

[170] psi

It is possible to program a value to be shown in

the display of the LCP. The value has a linear,
squared or cubed relation to speed. This relation
depends on the unit selected (see Table 3.3). The
actual calculated value can be read in
parameter 16-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in
the display be selecting [16-09] Custom Readout in
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to

[171] lb/in
[172] in WG
[173] ft WG
[180] HP

0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout

Range:

Function:

[0] *

None

[1]

[5]

PPM

This parameter sets the min.

value of the custom defined
readout (occurs at zero speed).
Only possible to set different
from 0 is when selecting a

[10]

1/min

linear unit in

[11]

rpm

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

parameter 0-30 Unit for Userdefined Readout. For Quadratic

and Cubic units the minimum
value will be 0.

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

0-24 Display Line 3 Large.

32

0 CustomReadoutUnit*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

[ -999999.99 par. 0-32

CustomReadoutUnit]

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

0-32 Custom Readout Max Value

0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP

Range:

Option:

100 CustomReadoutUnit*

Function:
[ par. 0-31 999999.99
CustomReadoutUnit]

the set value for 4-13 Motor

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
Unit).

[0 25 ]

Password. Otherwise define the password in

0-60 Main Menu Password.

Function:
Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
display by selecting [37] Display Text 1 in

switches to Off mode. When pressed again,

the LCP switches to Hand on mode.
[4] Hand Off/On Same as [3] but a password is required (see
w. Passw.
option [2] Password).

0-41 [Off] Key on LCP

Option:

parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display

[0] Disabled

Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,

[1] Enabled

0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3

Large.

0*

[0 25 ]

Key on LCP is included in the Quick Menu, then

define the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
Password.

Function:
Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical

0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP

display by selecting [38] Display Text 2 in

Option:

parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display

Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3
Large.

[0] Disabled

0*

[0 25 ]

Function:
Avoid accidental start of the frequency converter
in Auto mode.

[1] Enabled
[2] Password Avoids unauthorised start in Auto mode. If
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included in

0-39 Display Text 3

Range:

Function:
Avoids accidental stop of the frequency converter.

[2] Password Avoids unauthorised stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]

0-38 Display Text 2

Range:

3 3

[3] Hand Off/On When [Hand On] is pressed once, the LCP

[9] Enabled, ref

=0

0-37 Display Text 1

0*

the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu

This parameter sets the max

value to be shown when the
speed of the motor has reached
Speed High Limit [RPM] or

Range:

Function:

the Quick Menu, then define the password in

Function:

parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.

Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical

display by selecting [39] Display Text 3 in
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3

0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP

Option:
[0] Disabled

Large.

Function:
No effect when [Reset] is pressed. Avoids
accidental alarm reset.

[1] Enabled
[2] Password

3.2.5 0-4* LCP Keypad

Enable, disable and password protect individual keys on
the LCP.
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
Option:
[0] Disabled

Function:
No effect when [Hand On] is pressed. Select
[0] Disabled to avoid accidental start of the

parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included

in the Quick Menu, then define the password
in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
[7] Enabled
without OFF

Resets the frequency converter without setting

[8] Password
without OFF

Resets the frequency converter without setting

frequency converter in Hand on mode.

[1] Enabled

The LCP switches to Hand on mode directly

when [Hand on] is pressed.

[2] Password

After pressing [Hand on] a password is

Avoids unauthorised resetting. If

it in Off mode.
it in Off mode. A password is required when
pressing [Reset] (see [2]).

required. If parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on

LCP is in included in My Personal Menu, define

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

33

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.2.6 0-5* Copy/Save

0-51 Set-up Copy

Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these

parameters for saving and copying set-ups from one
frequency converter to another.
0-50 LCP Copy

Option:
[4] Copy to setup 4

Copies all parameters in the present

Programming Set-up (defined in
0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 4.

[9] Copy to all

Option:

Function:

Function:

Copies the parameters in the present set-up

over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.

[2]

[3]

0-60 Main Menu Password

Range:

[0] * No copy
[1]

3.2.7 0-6* Password

All to LCP

Copies all parameters in all set-ups

from the frequency converter memory
to the LCP memory.

All from LCP

Copies all parameters in all set-ups

from the LCP memory to the frequency
converter memory.

Size indep. from

LCP

Copy only the parameters that are

independent of the motor size. The
latter selection can be used to
programme several frequency
converters with the same function
without disturbing motor data.

100 *

[-9999 9999 ]

Function:
Define the password for access to the Main
Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is
set to [0] Full access, this parameter will be
ignored.

0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password

Option:
[0] * Full access

Function:
Disables password defined in
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.

[1]

LCP: Read
only

Prevent unauthorised editing of Main Menu

parameters.

[2]

LCP: No
access

Prevent unauthorised viewing and editing of

Main Menu parameters.

[3]

Bus: Read
only

Read-only functions for parameters on

Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
No access to parameters is allowed via
Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.

[4]

File from MCO to

LCP

[5]

File from LCP to

MCO

[6]

Data from DYN to

LCP

[4]

Bus: No
access

[7]

Data from LCP to

DYN

[5]

[9]

Safety Par. from

LCP

All: Read only Read-only function for parameters on LCP,

Fieldbus or FC standard bus.

[6]

All: No access No access from LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard

bus is allowed.

[10] Delete LCP copy

data

Use to delete the copy after the

transfer is complete.

0-51 Set-up Copy

Option:

Function:

[0] No copy

No function

[1] Copy to setup 1

Copies all parameters in the present

Programming Set-up (defined in

NOTICE
A more complex password protection is available for
OEMs upon request.

0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 1.

[2] Copy to setup 2

Copies all parameters in the present

Programming Set-up (defined in

0-65 Quick Menu Password

Range:

0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 2.

[3] Copy to setup 3

If [0] Full access is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu

Password, 0-65 Personal Menu Password and 0-66 Access to
Personal Menu w/o Password are ignored.

Copies all parameters in the present

Programming Set-up (defined in

200*

[-9999 9999 ]

0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 3.

34

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Define the password for access to the Quick
Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
parameter 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o
Password is set to [0] Full access, this
parameter is ignored.

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password

If 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full access
then this parameter is ignored.

Option:

Function:

[0] * Full access

Disables the password defined in

3 3

parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.

[1]

LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorised editing of Quick

Menu parameters.

[3]

Bus: Read only Read only functions for Quick Menu

parameters on Fieldbus and/or FC standard
bus.

[5]

All: Read only

Read only function for Quick Menu

parameters on LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard
bus.

0-67 Bus Password Access

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 9999 ] Writing to this parameter enables users to

unlock the frequency converter from bus/MCT
10 Set-up Software.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

35

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor

1-01 Motor Control Principle

Option:

3.3.1 1-0* General Settings

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.

Define whether the frequency converter operates in speed

mode or torque mode; and whether the internal PID
control should be active or not.

Select which motor control principle to

employ.

1-00 Configuration Mode

Option:

Function:
Select the application control principle to be
used when a Remote Reference (i.e. via analog
input or fieldbus) is active. A Remote Reference

[0] U/f

Characteristic - U and parameter 1-56 U/f

parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0] Linked

Characteristic - F.

to Hand/Auto or [1] Remote.

Enables speed control (without feedback signal
from motor) with automatic slip compensation
for almost constant speed at varying loads.
Compensations are active but can be disabled in
parameter group 1-0* Load/Motor. The speed
control parameters are set in parameter group
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
[1] Speed
closed
loop

Enables Speed closed loop control with feedback. Obtain full holding torque at 0 RPM.
For increased speed accuracy, provide a
feedback signal and set the speed PID control.
The speed control parameters are set in
parameter group 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.

[2] Torque

Enables torque closed loop control with feedback. Only possible with Flux with motor
feedback option, parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle. FC 302 only.

[3] Process

Enables the use of process control in the

frequency converter. The process control

Special motor mode, for parallel connected

motors in special motor applications. When U/f
is selected the characteristic of the control
principle can be edited in parameter 1-55 U/f

can only be active when

[0] Speed
open loop

Function:

[1] VVC+

Voltage Vector Control principle suitable for

most applications. The main benefit of VVCplus
operation is that it uses a robust motor model.

[2] Flux
sensorless

Flux Vector control without encoder feedback,

for simple installation and robustness against
sudden load changes. FC 302 only.

[3] Flux w/
Very high accuracy speed and torque control,
motor feedb suitable for the most demanding applications.
FC 302 only.

The best shaft performance is normally achieved using

either of the 2 Flux Vector control modes [2] Flux sensorless
and [3] Flux with encoder feedback.

NOTICE
An overview of possible combinations of the settings in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle can be found in
chapter 4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive
Control Modes.

parameters are set in parameter groups 7-2*

[4] Torque
open loop

Process Ctrl. Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.

1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source

Enables the use of torque open loop in VVCplus

Option:

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

group 7-1* Torque PI Control.

[5] Wobble

Enables the wobble functionality in

parameter 30-00 Wobble Mode to

Select the interface at which to receive

feedback from the motor.

parameter 30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled.

[6] Surface
Winder

Enables the surface winder control specific

parameters in parameter group 7-2* Process Ctrl.

[1] * 24V encoder

Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.

[7] Extended
PID Speed
OL

Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2*

[8] Extended
PID Speed
CL

Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2*

36

Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.

Function:

NOTICE

mode (parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle).

The torque PID parameters are set in parameter

A and B channel encoder, which can be

connected to the digital input terminals
32/33 only. Terminals 32/33 must be
programmed to No operation.

[2]

MCB 102

Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Encoder module option which can be

configured in parameter group 17-1* Inc. Enc.
Interface, FC 302 only.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source

1-04 Overload Mode

Option:

Option:

[3]

MCB 103

Function:

Function:

NOTICE

Optional resolver interface module which can

be configured in parameter group 17-5*

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

Resolver Interface.
[4]

[5]

MCO
Encoder 1
X56

Encoder interface 1 of the optional

programmable motion controller MCO 305.

MCO
Encoder 2
X55

Encoder interface 2 of the optional

programmable motion controller MCO 305.

Use this parameter to configure the frequency

converter for either High or Normal overload.
When selecting the frequency converter size,
always review the technical data in the
Operating Instructions or the Design Guide to
know the available output current.

1-03 Torque Characteristics

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

[0] * High
torque

Allows up to 160% over torque.

[1]

For oversized motor - allows up to 110% over

torque.

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

Normal
torque

1-05 Local Mode Configuration

Select the torque characteristic required.
VT and AEO are both energy saving operations.
[0]
*

[1]

Constant
torque

Motor shaft output provides constant torque

under variable speed control.

Variable
torque

Motor shaft output provides variable torque

under variable speed control. Set the variable

Option:

Function:
Select which application configuration mode
(parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), i.e.
application control principle, to use when a
Local (LCP) Reference is active. A Local
Reference can be active only when
parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0]

torque level in parameter 14-40 VT Level.

[2]

Auto
Energy
Optim.

Automatically optimises energy consumption by

minimising magnetisation and frequency via
parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation and
parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency.

Constant
Power

The function provides a constant power in the

field weakening area.
The torque shape of motor mode is used as a
limit in the generator mode. This is done to limit
the power in generator mode that otherwise
becomes considerable larger than in motor
mode, due to the high DC-link voltage available
in generator mode.

[0]

Speed
open loop

[1]

Speed
Closed
Loop

[2] * As mode
par 1-00

1-06 Clockwise Direction

Option:

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

This relationship with the constant power is

illustrated in Illustration 3.5:
T[Nm]
Tnom

P[W]

Pnom

T
nom 2nom [rad/S]

Function:

NOTICE

Pshaft W = mech rad / s T Nm

130BB655.10

[5]

Linked to Hand/Auto or [2] Local. By default the

local reference is active in Hand Mode only.

This parameter defines the term Clockwise

corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
easy change of direction of shaft rotation without
swapping motor wires.
[0] * Normal Motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when the
frequency converter is connected U U; V V,

Illustration 3.5 Constant Power

and W W to motor.
[1]

Inverse Motor shaft turns in counter clockwise direction

when the frequency converter is connected U U;
V V, and W W to motor.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

37

3 3

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust

parameter 1-14 Damping Gain

This parameter is only valid for FC 302 and only in combination

with a PM motor with feedback.

parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration

Range:
0*

Function:

[Manual]

The functionality of this option depends on

the type of the feedback device. This option
sets the frequency converter to use the motor
angle offset entered in parameter 1-41 Motor
Angle Offset if an absolute feedback device is
used.
If an incremental feedback device is selected
the frequency converter automatically adjusts
the motor angle offset on the first start after
the power up or when the motor data is
changed.

[1] Auto

The frequency converter adjusts the motor

angle offset automatically on the first start
after the power up or when the motor data is
changed no matter what feedback device is
selected. This means that options [0] and [1]
are identical for the incremental encoder.

[2] Auto Every

Start
[3] Off

The frequency converter adjusts the motor

angle offset automatically on every start or
when the motor data is changed.

parameter 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current

parameter 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode
parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]

NOTICE
Standard parameters still need configuration (e.g.
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency etc.).
Application

Settings

Low inertia applications

ILoad/IMotor <5

1-17 Voltage filter time const. to be

increased by factor 5 to 10
1-14 Damping Gain should be
reduced
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
should be reduced (<100%)

Low inertia applications

50>ILoad/IMotor >5

Keep calculated values

High inertia applications

ILoad/IMotor > 50

1-14 Damping Gain,

Selecting this option turns the automatic offset

adjustment off.

Speed Filter Time Const. should be

increased
High load at low speed
<30% (rated speed)

3.3.2 1-1* Special Settings

3.3.3 PM Settings

Table 3.4 Recommendations for VVCplus Applications

If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase

1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter
can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.

If [2] Std. PM, non salient is selected in

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor
parameters manually, in the following order:

Adjust starting torque in 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.

100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.

1.

parameter 1-24 Motor Current

2.

parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

3.

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

4.

parameter 1-39 Motor Poles

5.

parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

6.

parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

7.

parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

The following parameters have been added for PM motors.

parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset
parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust

38

1-17 Voltage filter time const. should

be increased
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
should be increased (>100% for
longer time can overheat the motor)

NOTICE
The parameters within this parameter group cannot be
adjusted while the motor is running.

parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time

Const. and parameter 1-16 High

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Application

Settings

1-11 Motor Model

Low inertia applications

Keep calculated values

High inertia applications

parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low

Speed
Increase speed to a value between
default and maximum depending on
application.
Set ramp times matching the
application. Too fast ramp up causes
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast
ramp down causes an overvoltage
trip.

Option:

High load at low speed

parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low

Speed
Increase speed to a value between
default and maximum depending on
application.

Table 3.5 Recommendations for FLUX Applications

Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting
torque.
Option:

Select the motor design type.

[0] * Asynchron

For asynchronous motors.

[1]

For salient or non-salient PM motors.

PM motors are divided into 2 groups,
with either surface-mounted (non-salient)
or interior (salient) magnets.

[3]

SynRM

1-11 Motor Model

Option:

[11] Danfoss
OGD V206

Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is

selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Only available for T4, T5 in 0.75-3 kW.
Settings are loaded automatically for this
specific motor.

OGD Auto-Detection and Model Change Function

The function is activated when one of the following
options is selected: either [10] Danfoss OGD LA10 or [11]
Danfoss OGD V206 in parameter 1-11 Motor Model.
The frequency converter checks if the correct OGD model
is selected. If a wrong OGD model is selected, the
frequency converter performs the following actions:

Trips
Issues an alarm
Sets the parameters defined for the correct model
type
Waits for the Reset signal from the operator

The model check takes place every time the frequency

converter gets a start signal from the LCP, a digital input
or a fieldbus.

Function:

PM, non salient

SPM

are loaded automatically for this specific

motor.

1-10 Motor Construction

Function:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter is valid for FC 302 and
FCD 302 only.

1-14 Damping Gain

Range:
140
%*

Function:

[0 The damping gain stabilises the PM machine to

250 %] run the PM machine smooth and stable. The
value of damping gain controls the dynamic
performance of the PM machine. High damping
gain gives high dynamic performance and low
damping gain gives low dynamic performance.
The dynamic performance is related to the
machine data and load type. If the damping gain
is too high or low the control becomes unstable.

1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.

Automatically sets the manufacturers values
for the selected motor. If the default value [1]
is used, settings must be determined

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[0.01 - 20
s]

manually, according to the choice in

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
[1]

[2]

Std.
Asynchron

Default motor model when [0]* Asynchron is

selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Enter motor parameter manually.

Std. PM, non Selectable when [1] PM, non salient SPM is
salient
selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Enter motor parameter manually.

[10] Danfoss
OGD LA10

This time constant is used below 10%

rated speed. Obtain quick control
through a short damping time
constant. However, if this value is too
short, the control gets unstable.

1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.

Range:
Size related*

Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is

selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Only available for T4, T5 in 1.5-3 kW. Settings

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0.01 - 20
s]

This time constant is used above 10%

rated speed. Obtain quick control
through a short damping time
constant. However, if this value is too
short, the control gets unstable.

39

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-17 Voltage filter time const.

1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range:

Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[0.001 - 1
s]

3 3

Reduces the influence of high

frequency ripple and system
resonance in the calculation of supply
voltage. Without this filter, the ripples
in the currents can distort the
calculated voltage and affect the
stability of the system.

1-18 Min. Current at No Load

Range:
0 %*

Function:
nominal rated output of the unit. This
parameter is visible in LCP if
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [1] US

1-22 Motor Voltage

Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[ 10 1000 V]

Enter the nominal motor voltage

according to the motor nameplate
data. The default value corresponds to
the nominal rated output of the unit.

Function:

[0 - 50 %] Adjust this parameter to achieve a smoother

motor operation.

1-23 Motor Frequency

Range:

3.3.4 1-2* Motor Data

Size
related*

This parameter group contains input data from the

nameplate on the connected motor.

Function:
[20 1000
Hz]

Min - Max motor frequency: 20-1000 Hz.

Select the motor frequency value from the
motor nameplate data. If a value different
from 50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, adapt the
load independent settings in
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed to parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency.
For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors,
set the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. To

NOTICE
Changing the value of these parameters affects the
setting of other parameters.

run at 87 Hz, adapt parameter 4-13 Motor

NOTICE

Speed High Limit [RPM] and

1-20 Motor Power [kW], 1-21 Motor Power [HP], 1-22 Motor
Voltage and 1-23 Motor Frequency have no effect when
1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.

Range:

Function:
[ 0.09 3000.00
kW]

1-24 Motor Current

Range:
Size
related*

1-20 Motor Power [kW]

Size
related*

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.

Function:
[ 0.10 10000.00 A]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Enter the nominal motor power in kW
according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output of the unit.

1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[10 - 60000
RPM]

This parameter is visible in LCP if

parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [0]
International.

4 sizes down, 1 size up from

nominal unit rating.

Range:
Size
related*

40

Enter the value from the motor nameplate

data. The default value corresponds to the
nominal rated output. This parameter is
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient

Function:
[ 0.09 3000.00
hp]

Function:
[0.1 10000
Nm]

available when parameter 1-10 Motor

1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Size
related*

Enter the nominal motor speed

value from the motor nameplate
data. The data are used for
calculating motor compensations.
nm,n = ns - nslip.

1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

NOTICE

Range:

Enter the nominal motor current

value from the motor nameplate
data. The data are used for
calculating torque, motor
protection etc.

Enter the nominal motor power in hp

according to the motor nameplate data.
The default value corresponds to the

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

SPM, i.e. the parameter is valid for PM and

non-salient SPM motors only.

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

NOTICE

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
The AMA function optimises dynamic motor
performance by automatically optimising the
advanced motor parameters
(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) at motor
standstill.
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand
on] after selecting [1] or [2] Enable Reduced
AMA. See also the section Automatic Motor
Adaptation in the Design Guide. After a normal
sequence, the display reads: "Press [OK] to
finish AMA". After pressing [OK], the frequency
converter is ready for operation.
[0]

Off

[1]

Enable
Complete
AMA

Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the

rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance
X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main
reactance Xh. Do not select this option if an LC
filter is used between the frequency converter
and the motor.
FC 301: The Complete AMA does not include Xh
measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value
is determined from the motor database. RS is
the best adjustment method (see 1-3* Adv.
Motor Data).
It is recommended to obtain the Advanced
Motor Data from the motor manufacturer to
enter into parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
through parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
for best performance.
Complete AMA cannot be performed on
permanent magnet motors.

[2]

Enable
Reduced
AMA

Performs a reduced AMA of the stator

resistance Rs in the system only. This option is
available for standard asynchronous motors and
non-salient PM motors.

Note:

For the best adaptation of the frequency

converter, run AMA on a cold motor.

AMA cannot be performed while the motor is

running.

It is important to set motor parameter group 1-2* Motor

Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA
algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve
optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to
10 min, depending on the power rating of the motor.

NOTICE
Avoid generating external torque during AMA.

NOTICE
If one of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor
Data is changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles, the advanced motor
parameters, return to default setting.

NOTICE
AMA works problem-free on 1 motor size down, typically
works on 2 motor sizes down, rarely works on 3 sizes
down and never work on 4 sizes down. Keep in mind
that the accuracy of the measured motor data is poorer
when operating on motors smaller than nominal
frequency converter size.

3.3.5 1-3* Adv. Motor Data

Parameters for advanced motor data. Ensure that the
motor data in parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-39 Motor Poles match the motor. The default
settings are based on standard motor values. If the motor
parameters are not set correctly, a malfunction of the
frequency converter system may occur. If the motor data
are unknown, running an AMA (Automatic Motor
Adaptation) is recommended. See
parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
Parameter groups 1-3* Adv. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor
Data II cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.

NOTICE
A simple check of the X1 + Xh sum value is to divide the
line to line motor voltage by the sqrt(3) and divide this
value by the motor no load current. [VL-L/sqrt(3)]/INL =
X1 + Xh, see Illustration 3.6. These values are important
to magnetise the motor properly. For high pole motors it
is highly recommended to perform this check.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

41

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

U1

P 1-36
RFe

P 1-35
Xh

130BA065.12

P 1-34
X'2

P 1-33
X1

P 1-30
Rs

I1

1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)

Range:

Function:
motor. All compensations are
reset to 100%.
2.

P 1-31
R'r

3.

Asynchronous Motor

NOTICE

1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

Size
related*

Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) does not have effect

when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.

Function:
[ 0.0140 140.0000
Ohm]

Set the line to common stator resistance

value. Enter the value from a motor
datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold
motor.

NOTICE

1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)

Range:
Size
related*

For salient PM motors and

synchronous reluctance motors:
AMA is not available.
If only line-line data are available,
divide the line-line value by 2 to
achieve the line to common
(starpoint) value. Alternatively
measure the value with an
ohmmeter, this also takes the
resistance of the cable into account.
Divide the measured value by 2 and
enter the result.

Function:
[ 0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]

42

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the
motor.

2.

Enter the X1 value manually.

Use the X1 default setting. The

frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.

See Illustration 3.6.

NOTICE
The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.

NOTICE

1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)

Function:
[ 0.0100 100.0000
Ohm]

1.

3.

The parameter value is updated

after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.

Size
related*

Set the stator leakage reactance of the

motor using one of these methods:

Obtain the value from the

motor supplier.

NOTICE

Range:

Use the Rr default setting. The

frequency converter establishes
the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.

Illustration 3.6 Motor Equivalent Diagram for an

Range:

Enter the Rr value manually.

Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.

This parameter is only relevant for

ASM.

Set the rotor resistance value Rr to

improve shaft performance.
1.

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

Range:
Size
related*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[ 0.0400 400.0000
Ohm]

Set the rotor leakage reactance of the

motor using one of these methods:

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

Range:

Range:

Function:
1.

2.

unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the
motor.

1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Enter the X2 value manually.

Range:

Obtain the value from the

motor supplier.
3.

Function:
Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.

Size
related*

Use the X2 default setting. The

[0.0 1000.0
mH]

frequency converter establishes

the setting based on the motor
nameplate data.
See Illustration 3.6.

NOTICE
The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction has the

value [1] PM, non-salient SPM (Permanent
Magnet Motor).
For a selection with one decimal, use this
parameter. For a selection with three
decimals, use parameter 30-80 d-axis

This parameter is only relevant for

ASM.

Inductance (Ld).
FC 302 only.

NOTICE

1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)

Size
related*

The parameter value is updated

after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.

Function:
[ 1.0000 10000.0000
Ohm]

Set the main reactance of the motor

using one of these methods:
1.

Run an AMA on a cold motor.

The frequency converter
measures the value from the
motor.

2.

Enter the Xh value manually.

NOTICE
This parameter is only relevant for
ASM.

Obtain the value from the

motor supplier.
3.

Use the Xh default setting.

The frequency converter
establishes the setting based
on the motor nameplate data.

1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq)

Range:
Size related*

1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

Range:
Size
related*

Enter line to common direct axis

inductance of the PM motor. Obtain the
value from the permanent magnet motor
data sheet.
If only line-line data are available, divide
the line-line value by 2 to achieve the
line-common (starpoint) value. Alternatively measure the value with an
inductancemeter, this also takes the
inductance of the cable into account.
Divide the measured value by 2 and enter
the result.
This parameter is only active when

NOTICE

Range:

3 3

Function:

Function:
[0.000 - 1000
mH]

Set the value of the q-axis

inductance. See the motor data
sheet.

Function:
[0 10000.000
Ohm]

Enter the equivalent iron loss

resistance (RFe) value to compensate
for iron loss in the motor.
The RFe value cannot be found by

1-39 Motor Poles

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[2 - 128 ]

Enter the number of motor poles.

performing an AMA.
The RFe value is especially important in
torque control applications. If RFe is

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

43

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Poles

~nn@ 50 Hz

~nn@ 60 Hz

1-41 Motor Angle Offset

2700-2880

3250-3460

1350-1450

1625-1730

Range:

700-960

840-1153

This parameter is only active when

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,
non-salient SPM (Permanent Magnet Motor).

Table 3.6 Number of Poles for Normal Speed Ranges

1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)

Table 3.6 shows the number of poles for normal speed

ranges of various motor types. Define motors designed for
other frequencies separately. The motor pole value is
always an even number, because it refers to the total
number of poles, not pairs of poles. The frequency
converter creates the initial setting of parameter 1-39 Motor
Poles based on parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed.
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
Range:
Size
related*

Range:
Size
related*

Set the nominal back EMF for the motor

when running at 1000 RPM.
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM
motor when no frequency converter is
connected and the shaft is turned
externally. Back EMF is normally specified
for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM
measured between 2 lines. If the value is
not available for a motor speed of 1000
RPM, calculate the correct value as follows.
If back EMF is eg. 320 V at 1800 RPM, it can
be calculated at 1000 RPM as follows:

This parameter is only active when

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to

parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). If

the motor supplier provides an induction
curve, enter the induction value at 200%
of the nominal value here.

Range:
Size
related*

[0 This parameter corresponds to the

1000 mH] inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally; this
parameter has the same value as
parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq). If
the motor supplier provides an induction
curve, enter the induction value at 200%
of the nominal value here.

1-46 Position Detection Gain

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[20 - 200
%]

Adjusts the amplitude of the test pulse

during position detection at start. Adjust
this parameter to improve the position
measurement.

1-47 Torque Calibration

Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full
speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power,
Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the

NOTICE

power loss in both the motor, the cable and the frequency

correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the

1-41 Motor Angle Offset

Function:

[-32768 - Enter the correct offset angle between the PM

32767 ]
motor and the index position (single-turn) of the
attached encoder or resolver. The value range of
0 - 32768 corresponds to 0 - 2 * pi (radians). To
obtain the offset angle value: After frequency
converter start-up apply DC-hold and enter the
value of parameter 16-20 Motor Angle into this
parameter.

44

Function:

[1] PM motor (Permanent Magnet Motor).

FC 302 only.

When using PM motors, it is

recommended to use brake resistors.

Range:

[0 This parameter corresponds to the

1000 mH] inductance saturation of Ld. Ideally; this
parameter has the same value as

Example
Back EMF 320 V at 1800 RPM. Back EMF=
(Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 =
178.

0*

Function:

1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)

Function:
[0 9000 V]

Function:

converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust

parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter
to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this
function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it
starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal
performance.

Function:

Option:
[0]

Off

[1]

1st start after Calibrates at the first start-up after

pwr-up
power up and keeps this value until
reset by a power cycle.

[2]

Every start

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Calibrates at every start-up, compensating for a possible change in motor

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

1-47 Torque Calibration

1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full

speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power,

Range:

Function:
Magn. current

Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the

100%
Par.1-50

correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the

power loss in both the motor, the cable and the frequency
converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust

Par.1-51
Par.1-52

parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter

to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this
function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it
starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal
performance.

Function:

Option:

temperature since last start-up. The

value is reset after a power cycle.
[3]

1st start with The frequency converter calibrates the

store
torque at the first start-up after powerup. This option is used to update
motor parameters
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs),

NOTICE
Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed has no
effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient
SPM.
1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[10 300
RPM]

Set the required speed for normal

magnetising current. If the speed is set
lower than the motor slip speed,
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed

Leakage Reactance (X2) and

Normal Magnetising [RPM] are of no significance.

parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld).

Every start
with store

The frequency converter calibrates the

torque at every start-up, compensating
for a possible change in motor
temperature since last start-up. This
option is used to update motor
parameters parameter 1-30 Stator
Resistance (Rs), parameter 1-33 Stator
Leakage Reactance (X1),
parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance
(X2) and parameter 1-37 d-axis

NOTICE
Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] has
no effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non
salient SPM.

Size
related*

Function:
[1 - 500 %]

parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero

Speed. See Table 3.6.

Range:

1-48 Inductance Sat. Point

Range:

Use this parameter along with

1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]

Inductance (Ld).

35 %*

Function:
[0 250.0 Hz]

Inductance Saturation Point.

parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at

Zero Speed is inactive.
Use this parameter along with
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
Zero Speed. See Illustration 3.7.

1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

Range:
[0 300
%]

Set the required frequency for normal

magnetising current. If the frequency is
set lower than the motor slip frequency,

3.3.6 1-5* Load Indep. Setting

100
%*

3 3

Hz
RPM

Illustration 3.7 Motor Magnetisation

parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage

Reactance (X1), parameter 1-34 Rotor

[4]

130BA045.11

Parameter Descriptions

Function:
Use this parameter along with parameter 1-51 Min

1-53 Model Shift Frequency

Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] to obtain a

different thermal load on the motor when running
at low speed.
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated
magnetising current. If the setting is too low, the
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[4 18.0
Hz]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Flux Model shift

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

45

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-53 Model Shift Frequency

1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening

Range:

Range:

Function:
Enter the frequency value for shift between 2
models for determining motor speed. Select

0 V*

Function:

[0 - 100
V]

the value based on settings in

3 3

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and

parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle. There
are 2 options: shift between Flux model 1 and
Flux model 2; or shift between Variable
Current mode and Flux model 2. FC 302 only.
Flux Model 1 Flux model 2
This model is used when

The value of this parameter reduces the

maximal voltage available for the flux of the
motor in fieldweakning, giving more voltage
available for torque. Be aware that too high
value may give stall problems at high speed.

1-55 U/f Characteristic - U

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 1000 V]

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to

Enter the voltage at each frequency point

to manually form a U/f characteristic
matching the motor.

Speed closed loop [1] or Torque [2] and

The frequency points are defined in

parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to

parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.

This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]

Flux w/motor feedback [3]. With this parameter

it is possible to make an adjustment of the
shifting point where FC 302 changes between
Flux model 1 and Flux model 2, which is
useful in some sensitive speed and torque
control applications.

Flux model 1

130BA146.11

fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125

Flux model 2

and is only accessible when

parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set
to [0] U/f.

1-56 U/f Characteristic - F

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 1000.0
Hz]

The voltage at each point is defined in

fout

P 1-53

Enter the frequency points to manually

form a U/f-characteristic matching the
motor.
parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U.

Illustration 3.8 Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode = [1] Speed closed loop or [2]
Torque and parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle = [3] Flux w/motor feedback

This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]

and is only accessible when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is
set to [0] U/f.

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to

[0] Speed open loop and parameter 1-01 Motor
Control Principle is set to [2] Flux sensorless.
In speed open loop in flux mode, the speed is
determined from the current measurement.
Below fnorm x 0.1, the frequency converter
runs on a Variable Current model. Above fnorm

fN,M x 0.1

fN,M x 0.125

Variable
current
model

Flux model 2

P 1-53

130BA147.10

x 0.125 the frequency converter runs on a

Flux model.

Motor Voltage
Par 1-55 [x]

130BA166.10

Variable Current - Flux model - Sensorless

This model is used when

1-55[5]
1-55[4]
1-55[3]

1-55[2]
1-55[1]
1-55[0]
1-56
[0]

1-56
[1]

1-56
[2]

1-56
[3]

1-56
[4]

1-56
[5]

Output Frequency
Par 1-56 [x]

Illustration 3.10 U/f Characteristic

fout

Illustration 3.9 Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode = [0] Speed open loop,
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle =
[2] Flux sensorless

1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 200 %]

Sets the current level for the flystart test

pulses that are used to detect the motor
direction. 100% means Im,n. Adjust the
value to be big enough to avoid noise

46

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current

Range:

Um

Function:

100%

influence but low enough to avoid

affecting the accuracy (current must be
able to drop to zero before the next pulse).
Reduce the value to reduce the generated
torque.
Default is 30% for asynchronous motors,
but may vary for PM motors. For PM
motors adjusting, the value tunes for back
EMF and d-axis inductance of the motor.

Par.1-60

Par.1-61

130BA046.11

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3 3

60%

This parameter is only available in VVCplus.

0%

Range:

Illustration 3.11 Changeover

Function:

Size
related*

[0 500 %]

Sets the frequency of the flystart test pulses

that are used to detect the motor direction.
100% means means 2 x fslip. Increase this
value to reduce the generated torque. For
PM motors this value is the percentage
nm,n of the free running PM motor. Above
this value flystart is always performed.
Below this value, the start mode is selected

1-61 High Speed Load Compensation

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[0 - 300
%]

in parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode

This parameter is only available in VVCplus.

3.3.7 1-6* Load Depend. Setting

1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation
Range:
100 %*

fout

Changeover

1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency

Enter the % value to compensate voltage in

relation to load when the motor is running
at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.

Motor size

Changeover

0.25 kW - 7.5 kW

> 10 Hz

Table 3.7 Changeover Frequency

Function:
[0 - 300
%]

Enter the % value to compensate voltage in

relation to load when the motor is running
at low speed and obtain the optimum U/f
characteristic. The motor size determines the
frequency range within which this parameter
is active.

Motor size

Changeover

0.25 kW-7.5 kW

<10 Hz

1-62 Slip Compensation

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[-500
- 500
%]

Enter the % value for slip compensation, to

compensate for tolerances in the value of
nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automatically, i.e. on the basis of the rated motor
speed nM,N.
This function is not active when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
[1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque Torque
control with speed feedback or when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to
[0] U/f special motor mode.

1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant

Range:
Size
related*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0.05 - 5
s]

Enter the slip compensation reaction

speed. A high value results in slow
reaction, and a low value results in
quick reaction. If low-frequency
resonance problems arise, use a longer
time setting.

47

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

NOTICE

1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed

Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant has no

effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient
SPM.

This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.

Range:

Function:
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
composed of the torque generating
current and the magnetising current.

1-64 Resonance Dampening

Range:
100
%*

Example: Set parameter 4-16 Torque Limit

Function:

[0 500 %]

Motor Mode to 100% and set

Enter the resonance dampening value. Set

parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator

Mode to 60%. parameter 1-66 Min. Current

parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and

parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
resonance problems. To reduce resonance

at Low Speed automatically adjusts to

about 127%, depending on the motor size.
FC 302 only.

oscillation, increase the value of

parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening.

1-67 Load Type

NOTICE

This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.

Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening has no effect when

1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.

Option:

Function:

[0] * Passive load For conveyers, fan and pump applications.

[1]

Active load

For hoisting applications, used in slip

1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant

compensation at low speed. When [1] Active

Range:

Load is selected, set parameter 1-66 Min.

5 ms*

Function:

[5 - 50
ms]

Current at Low Speed to a level which

corresponds to maximum torque.

Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and

parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
resonance problems. Enter the time constant
that provides the best dampening.

1-68 Minimum Inertia

Range:
Size
related*

NOTICE
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant has
no effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non
salient SPM.

Function:

NOTICE

[ 0.0001 par. 1-69

This parameter cannot be adjusted
kgm]

while motor is running.

Needed for average inertia calculation.

Enter the minimum moment of inertia of

1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed

the mechanical system.

This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.

Parameter 1-68 Minimum Inertia and

Range:
Size
related*

parameter 1-69 Maximum Inertia are used

for pre-adjustment of the Proportional

Function:
[1 200 %]

Enter the minimum motor current at low

Gain in the speed control, see

speed, see parameter 1-53 Model Shift

parameter 30-83 Speed PID Proportional

Gain.
FC 302 only.

Frequency. Increasing this current improves

motor torque at low speed.
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
enabled when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Speed open loop only. The
frequency converter runs with constant
current through motor for speeds below
10 Hz.

1-69 Maximum Inertia

Range:
Size
related*

For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor flux

model in the frequency converter controls
the motor. parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode and/or parameter 4-17 Torque
Limit Generator Mode automatically adjust
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
The parameter with the highest value
adjusts parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed. The current setting in

48

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:

NOTICE

[ par. 1-68 0.4800

This parameter cannot be
kgm]

adjusted while motor is running.

Active in Flux Open Loop only. Used

to compute the acceleration torque at
low speed. Used in the torque limit
controller.
FC 302 only.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.3.8 1-7* Start Adjustments

1-72 Start Function

Option:

1-70 PM Start Mode

applications without counterweight and

especially in applications with a Cone-motor,
where the start is clockwise, followed by
rotation in the reference direction.

Select the PM motor start-up mode. This is done to initialise the

VVCplus control core for previously free running PM motor. Both
selections estimate the speed and angle. Active for PM motors in
VVCplus only.

[4]

Option:
[0] *

Function:
Rotor Detection

[1]

Parking

Horizontal
operation

0 s*

(0), parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] is ignored

and the output speed equals zero (0). The
output current corresponds to the setting of
the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
Current.
[5]

VVC+/Flux
clockwise

Function:

[0 - 25.5 s] This parameter refers to the start function

For the function described in

parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] only. The
start current is calculated automatically. This
function uses the start speed in the start delay
time only. Regardless of the value set by the
reference signal, the output speed equals the
setting of the start speed in

selected in parameter 1-72 Start Function.

Enter the time delay required before
commencing acceleration.

parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. [3] Start

speed/current clockwise and [5] VVCplus/Flux
clockwise are typically used in hoisting
applications. [4] Start speed/current in reference

1-72 Start Function

Option:

For obtaining the function described in

parameter 1-76 Start Current during the start
delay time. The motor rotates in the reference
direction. If the reference signal equals zero

1-71 Start Delay

Range:

Only possible with VVCplus.

parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and

Estimates the electrical angle of

the rotor and uses this as a
starting point. Standard
selection for AutomationDrive
applications.
The Parking function applies
DC current across the stator
winding and rotates the rotor
to electrical zero position
(typically selected for HVAC
applications).

Function:

direction is particularly used in applications

with counterweight and horizontal movement.

Function:
Select the start function during start delay.
This parameter is linked to

[6]

parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

[0]

[1]

[2]
*

[3]

DC Hold/
delay time
DC Brake/
delay time

Hoist Mech.
Brake Rel

For utilising mechanical brake control

functions, parameter 2-24 Stop Delay to

Energises motor with a DC holding current

parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor. This

(parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current) during the

start delay time.

parameter is only active when

Energises motor with a DC braking current

[3] Flux w/ motor feedback (FC 302 only).

(parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current) during the

start delay time.

Coast/delay
time

Motor coasted during the start delay time

(inverter off).

Start speed
cw

Only possible with VVCplus.

parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to

[7]

VVC+/Flux
counter-cw

1-73 Flying Start

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

Connect the function described in

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and

parameter 1-76 Start Current in the start delay
time.
Regardless of the value applied by the
reference signal, the output speed applies the

This function makes it possible to catch a

motor which is spinning freely due to a mains
drop-out.

setting of the start speed in

parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] or
parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] and the output
current corresponds to the setting of the start

[0] Disabled

No function

[1] Enabled

Enables the frequency converter to catch

and control a spinning motor.

current in parameter 1-76 Start Current. This

function is typically used in hoisting

When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,

parameter 1-71 Start Delay and

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

49

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-76 Start Current

1-73 Flying Start

Option:

Range:

Function:
parameter 1-72 Start Function have no
function.

[2] Enabled
Always

Function:
This parameter can be used for hoist applications
(cone rotor).

3.3.9 1-8* Stop Adjustments

[3] Enabled Ref.

Dir.

1-80 Function at Stop

[4] Enab. Always

Ref. Dir.

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

Select the frequency converter function

after a stop command or after the speed is

This function is not recommended for hoisting

applications.
For power levels above 55 kW, flux mode must be used
to achieve the best performance.

parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at

Stop [RPM].
[0]

Coast

Leaves motor in free mode. The motor is

disconnected from the frequency converter.

DC hold

Energises motor with a DC holding current

NOTICE

[1]

To obtain the best flying start performance the advanced

motor data, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh), must be correct.
1-74 Start Speed [RPM]
Range:
Size
related*

ramped down to the settings in

(see parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current).

[2]

Motor check

Checks if a motor has been connected.

[3]

Premagnetizing

Builds up a magnetic field while the motor

is stopped. This allows the motor to
produce torque quickly at subsequent start
commands (asynchronous motors only). This
pre-magnetising function does not help the
very first start command. 2 different
solutions are available to pre-magnetise the
machine for the first start command:

Function:
[0 600
RPM]

Set a motor start speed. After the start

signal, the output speed leaps to set value.
Set the start function in
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start
speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or [5] VVC
+/Flux

clockwise, and set a start delay time

in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

1-75 Start Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 500.0
Hz]

This parameter can be used for hoist

applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start
speed. After the start signal, the output
speed leaps to set value. Set the start
function in parameter 1-72 Start Function to
[3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or
[5] VVC+/Flux clockwise, and set a start delay

[0 par.
1-24 A]

Function:
Some motors, e.g. cone rotor motors, need extra
current/starting speed to disengage the rotor. To
obtain this boost, set the required current in
parameter 1-76 Start Current. Set
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. Set
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw
or [4] Horizontal operation, and set a start delay
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

50

2b. Set parameter 1-72 Start

Function to either [0] DC-hold or [1]
DC-Brake.

(parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current or

1-76 Start Current

0
A*

2a. Set parameter 1-71 Start Delay

to the desired pre-mag time (2 to
4 rotor time constants - see
below).

Set the DC-hold or DC-brake

current magnitude

time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay.

Range:

1. Start the frequency converter

with a 0 RPM reference and wait 2
to 4 rotor time constants (see
below) before increasing the speed
reference.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current)

to be equal to I_pre-mag = Unom/
(1.73 x Xh)
Sample rotor time constants =
(Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr)
1 kW = 0.2 s
10 kW = 0.5 s
100 kW = 1.7 s
1000 kW = 2.5 s

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-80 Function at Stop

1-83 Precise Stop Function

Option:

Option:

[4]

[5]

[6]

Function:

DC Voltage
U0

When the motor is stopped, the

Coast at low
reference

When the reference is below 1-81 Min Speed

[3]

parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U [0]

parameter defines the voltage at 0 Hz.

Function:

Speed
comp
stop

the maximum speed (set in parameter 4-19 Max

Output Frequency).
The delay is calculated on the basis of the
reference speed of the frequency converter and
not on the basis of the actual speed. Make sure
that the frequency converter has ramped up
before activating the speed compensated stop.

for Function at Stop [RPM], the motor is

disconnected from the frequency converter.

Motor check,
alarm

1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]

Range:
Size related*

Function:

[4]

Com cnt
stop
w/rst

Same as [3] but after each precise stop the

number of pulses counted during ramp down to
0 RPM is reset.

[5]

Comp
cnt stop
w/o r

Same as [3] but the number of pulses counted

during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the

[0 - 600 RPM] Set the speed at which to activate

1-80 Function at Stop.

1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz]

Range:
Size related*

Function:

1-83 Precise Stop Function

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
FC 302 only.
[0]
*

Precise
ramp
stop

Only optimal when the operational speed - of e.g.

the conveyor belt - is constant. This is an open
loop control. Achieves high repetitive precision at
the stopping point.

[1]

Cnt stop
with
reset

Counts the number of pulses, typically from an

encoder and generates a stop signal after a preprogrammed number of pulses parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value - has
been received at T29 or T33 [30].
This is a direct feedback with one-way closed loop
control.
The counter function is activated (starts timing) at
the edge of the start signal (when it changes
from stop to start). After each precise stop the
number of pulses counted during ramp down to
0 RPM is reset.

[2]

Cnt stop
w/o
reset

Same as [1] but the number of pulses counted

during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the
counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise

counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise

Stop Counter Value.
This reset function can for example be used to
compensate for the extra distance done during
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of
gradual wear of mechanical parts.

[ 0 - 20.0 Hz] Set the output frequency at which

to activate 1-80 Function at Stop.

Option:

Stops at precisely the same point, regardless of

the present speed, the stop signal is delayed
internally when the present speed is lower than

The Precise Stop Functions are advantageous in

applications where high precision is required.
If using a standard stop command, the accuracy is
determined by the internal task time. That is not the case
when using the precise stop function; it eliminates the task
time dependence and increases the accuracy substantially.
The frequency converter tolerance is normally given by its
task time. However, by using its special precise stop
function the tolerance is independent of the task time
because the stop signal immediately interrupts the
execution of the frequency converter program. The precise
stop function gives a highly reproducible delay from the
stop signal is given until the ramping down starts. A test
must be done to find this delay as it is a sum of sensor,
PLC, frequency converter and mechanical parts.
To ensure optimum accuracy there should be at least 10
cycles during ramping down, see parameter 3-42 Ramp 1
Ramp Down Time, parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time and
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
The Precise Stop Function is set up here and enabled from
DI T29 or T33.
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value
Range:
100000*

Stop Counter Value.

This reset function can for example be used to
compensate for the extra distance done during
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of
gradual wear of mechanical parts.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0 999999999 ]

Enter the counter value to be used in

the integrated precise stop function,
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
The maximum permissible frequency at
terminal 29 or 33 is 110 kHz.

51

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

Range:

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
Not used for selections [0] Precise
ramp stop and [3] Speed comp stop
in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
Function

3 3

1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay

Range:

For the North American market: The ETR

functions provide class 20 motor overload
protection in accordance with NEC.
[0]

No
protection

Continuously overloaded motor, when no

warning or trip of the frequency converter is
required.

[1]

Thermistor
warning

Activates a warning when the connected

thermistor or KTY-sensor in the motor reacts
in the event of motor over-temperature.

[2]

Thermistor
trip

Stops (trips) the frequency converter when

connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
motor reacts in the event of motor overtemperature.

Function:

10 ms*

[0 100 ms]

Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, etc. for

use in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. In
speed compensated stop mode, the delay time
at different frequencies has a major influence
on the stop function.

The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3 k.

NOTICE
Not used for selections [0] Precise ramp
stop, [1] Cnt stop with reset and [2] Cnt
stop w/o reset in parameter 1-83 Precise
Stop Function

Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the

motor for winding protection.
[3]

ETR
warning 1

Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active

and activates a warning on the display when
the motor is overloaded. Programme a
warning signal via one of the digital outputs.

[4]

ETR trip 1

Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active

and stops (trips) frequency converter when the
motor is overloaded. Programme a warning
signal via one of the digital outputs. The
signal appears in the event of a warning and
if the frequency converter trips (thermal
warning).

Via a PTC sensor in the motor

windings connected to one of the
analog or digital inputs

[5]

ETR
warning 2

[6]

ETR trip 2

(parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source).

[7]

Connection.

ETR
warning 3

[8]

ETR trip 3

Via a KTY sensor in the motor

winding connected to an analog

[9]

ETR
warning 4

input (parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor

[10] ETR trip 4

Resource). See chapter 3.3.11.2 KTY

[20] ATEX ETR

3.3.10 1-9* Motor Temperature

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
Option:

Function:
Thermal motor protection can be
implemented using a range of techniques:

See chapter 3.3.11.1 PTC Thermistor

Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables

Via calculation (ETR = Electronic

Thermal Relay) of the thermal load,
based on the actual load and time.
The calculated thermal load is
compared with the rated motor
current IM,N and the rated motor

parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed

reduction, parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.

frequency fM,N. See

Via a mechanical thermal switch

(Klixon type). See
chapter 3.3.11.5 Klixon.

points freq. and parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR

interpol points current.
[21] Advanced
ETR

NOTICE

chapter 3.3.11.4 ATEX ETR.

52

Activates the thermal monitoring function for

Sensor Connection.

chapter 3.3.11.3 ETR and

Function:

If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, follow the instructions in the

dedicated chapter of the VLT AutomationDrive Design
Guide and the instructions given by the motor
manufacturer.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, parameter 4-18 Current Limit

must be set to 150%.

39 42 50 53 54 55

130BA153.11

+10V

NOTICE

OFF

175HA183.10

3.3.11.1 PTC Thermistor Connection

R
()

4000
3000
1330

550

3 3

ON
<3.0 k

PTC / Thermistor

>3.0 k

Illustration 3.14 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input

Input
digital/analog

Supply voltage

Threshold
cut-out values

Digital

10 V

< 800 - > 2.7 k

Analog

10 V

< 3.0 k - > 3.0 k

NOTICE
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
specification of the used thermistor element.

250

[C]
-20C

nominel -5C
nominel

nominel +5C

(FC 302 only)

KTY sensors are used especially in permanent magnet
servo motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
parameters as stator resistance (parameter 1-30 Stator
Resistance (Rs)) for PM motors and also rotor resistance
(parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous
motors, depending on winding temperature. The
calculation is:

Illustration 3.12 PTC Profile

Rs = Rs20 C x 1 + cu x T

130BA152.10

+10V

Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input

39 42 50 53 54 55

3.3.11.2 KTY Sensor Connection

where

cu = 0.00393

KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting

(parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold level).
FC 302 can handle 3 types of KTY sensors, defined in
parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor Type. The actual sensor
temperature can be read out from parameter 16-19 KTY
sensor temperature.

OFF
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

ON
PTC / Thermistor

<800

>2.7 k

Illustration 3.13 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input

Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 54

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

53

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

130BB917.10

4500

4000

3500

3 3

Resistance [Ohm]

3000

3.3.11.4 ATEX ETR

The B option MCB 112 PTC Thermistor option offers ATEX
approved monitoring of motor temperature. Alternatively,
an external ATEX approved PTC protection device can be
used.

NOTICE

2500

Only ATEX Ex-e approved motors may be used for this

function. See motor nameplate, approval certificate, data
sheet or contact motor supplier.

2000

1500

1000

When controlling an Ex-e motor with Increased Safety, it

is important to ensure certain limitations. The parameters
that must be programmed are presented in the following
application example.

500

0
-25

25

50

75

100

125

150

Temperature [C]
KTY type 1

KTY type 2

KTY type 3

Illustration 3.15 KTY Type Selection

KTY Sensor 1: 1 k at 100 C (e.g. Philips KTY 84-1)

KTY Sensor 2: 1 k at 25 C (e.g. Philips KTY 83-1)
KTY Sensor 3: 2 k at 25 C (e.g. Infineon KTY-10

3.3.11.3 ETR

175ZA052.12

The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at

lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated
in the motor.

100
60
50
40
30
20
10

[20] ATEX ETR

parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR

cur.lim. speed reduction

20%

parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR

interpol points current

If the temperature of the motor is utilised through a

thermistor or KTY sensor, the PELV is not complied with
in case of short circuits between motor windings and
sensor. To comply with PELV the sensor must be extra
isolated.

2000
1000
600
500
400
300
200

Setting

parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

Protection

parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR

interpol. points freq.

NOTICE

t [s]

Function

Motor name plate

Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency Enter the same value as for

parameter 4-19 Max Output
Frequency
parameter 4-19 Max Output
Frequency

Motor name plate, possibly

reduced for long motor
cables, sinus filter or reduced
supply voltage

parameter 4-18 Current Limit

Forced to 150% by 1-90 [20]

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input

[80] PTC Card 1

parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe [4] PTC 1 Alarm

Stop
parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency

Check that the default value

fulfils the requirement from
Motor name plate. If not, use
sine wave filter.

parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at

Inverter Fault

Table 3.8 Parameters

fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)

fOUT = 2 x f M,N
fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N

1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0

Illustration 3.16 ETR Profile

IM
IMN(par. 1-24)

CAUTION
Compare the minimum switching frequency requirement
stated by the motor manufacturer to the minimum
switching frequency of the frequency converter, the
default value in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency. If
the frequency converter does not meet this requirement,
use a sine wave filter.
More information about ATEX ETR Thermal Monitoring can
be found in the Application Note MN33G.

54

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.3.11.5 Klixon

1-93 Thermistor Source

Option:

The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON

metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused
by the current through the disc causes a trip.

[2] Analog Input

54
[3] Digital input 18

OFF

3 3

[4] Digital input 19

[5] Digital input 32
[6] Digital input 33

NOTICE
Digital input should be set to [0] PNP - Active at 24 V in
5-00 Digital I/O Mode.
130BA151.11

GND

A
B

+24V

Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high
Parameter set-up:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

Function:

1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction

FC 302 only.
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
[20].

Range:

ON

PTC / Thermistor

<6.6 k >10.8 k

Illustration 3.17 Thermistor Connection

1-91 Motor External Fan

Option: Function:
[0] No

No external fan is required, i.e. the motor is derated at

low speed.

[1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so

no derating of the motor is required at low speed. The
upper curve in graph above (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
followed if the motor current is lower than nominal
motor current (see 1-24 Motor Current). If the motor
current exceeds nominal current, the operation time
still decreases as if no fan were installed.

0 %*

The reaction for operating in Ex-e current limit must be

configured.
0%: The frequency converter does not change anything
besides issuing warning 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning.
>0%: The frequency converter issuing warning 163 and
reduces motor speed following ramp 2 (parameter group
3-5* Ramp 2).
Example:
Actual reference = 50 RPM
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction = 20%
Resulting reference = 40 RPM
1-95 KTY Sensor Type
Option:

Function:
Select the used type of KTY sensor. FC 302
only.

1-93 Thermistor Source

Option:

Function:
[0 - 100 %]

Function:

[0] * KTY Sensor 1 1 k at 100 C

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Select the input to which the thermistor
(PTC sensor) should be connected. An

[1]

KTY Sensor 2 1 k at 25 C

[2]

KTY Sensor 3 2 k at 25 C

1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource

Option:

analog input option [1] Analog Input 53 or

Function:

[2] Analog Input 54 cannot be selected if the

analog input is already in use as a reference

Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used

as KTY sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be
selected as KTY source if otherwise used as

source (selected in 3-15 Reference 1 Source,

reference (see parameter 3-15 Reference Resource

3-16 Reference 2 Source or 3-17 Reference 3

1 to parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3).

Source).
When using MCB 112, [0] None must always
be selected.

FC 302 only.

NOTICE
Connection of KTY-sensor between term.
54 and 55 (GND). See Illustration 3.15.

[0] None
[1] Analog Input
53

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

55

of a machine current greater than 1.5 times the rated

current, shut down is immediate.

1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource

Option:

Function:

[0] * None

1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current

[2]

FC 302 only.

Analog
Input 54

Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to

[20] or [21].

1-97 KTY Threshold level

Range:
80 C*

Range:

Function:
[-40 - 140 C] Select the KTY sensor threshold level for
motor thermal protection.
FC 302 only.

FC 302 only.
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
[20].

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ 0 - 1000.0 Hz]

Size related*

[0 - 100 %] Definition of thermal limitation curve.

For example, see parameter 1-98 ATEX
ETR interpol. points freq.

Together with parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.,

these make up a table (f [Hz],I [%]).

NOTICE

Enter the 4 frequency points [Hz] from the motor name

plate into this array. Together with parameter 1-99 ATEX
ETR interpol points current, these can be presented in
Table 3.9.

All frequency/current limit points from the motor name

plate or motor data sheet must be programmed.

3.3.12 PM Settings

NOTICE
All frequency/current limit points from the motor name
plate or motor data sheet must be programmed.

100%
80 %

40 %

5 Hz

Function:

Use the 4 current points [A] from the motor name plate.
Calculate the values as percentage of nominal motor
current, Im/Im,n x 100 [%], and enter into this array.

1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.

130BB909.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

15 Hz

25 Hz

If [2] Std. PM, non salient is selected in

parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor
parameters manually, in the following order:
1.

parameter 1-24 Motor Current

2.

parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

3.

parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed

4.

parameter 1-39 Motor Poles

5.

parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)

6.

parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

7.

parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

The following parameters have been added for PM motors.

50 Hz

Illustration 3.18 Example of ATEX ETR thermal limitation curve.

x-axis: fm [Hz]

parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset

y-axis: Im/Im,n x 100 [%]

parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust

parameter 1-14 Damping Gain
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration

Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR

interpol. points freq.

Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR

interpol points current

parameter 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current

parameter 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency

[0] = 5 Hz

[0] = 40%

[1] = 15 Hz

[1] = 80%

[2] = 25 Hz

[2] = 100%

[3] = 50 Hz

[3] = 100%

parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode

parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]

All operating points underneath the curve are allowed

continuously. Above the line, however, only for a limited
time calculated as a function of the overload. In the event

56

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes

Standard parameters still need configuration (e.g.

parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency etc.).

3.4.1 2-0* DC-Brakes

Application

Settings

Low inertia applications

ILoad/IMotor <5

1-17 Voltage filter time const. to be

increased by factor 5 to 10

Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC

hold functions.

1-14 Damping Gain should be

reduced
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
should be reduced (<100%)

3 3

2-00 DC Hold Current

Range:
50
%*

Function:

[0 Enter a value for holding current as a percentage

160 %] of the rated motor current IM,N set in

Low inertia applications

50>ILoad/IMotor >5

Keep calculated values

parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding

current corresponds to IM,N.

High inertia applications

ILoad/IMotor > 50

1-14 Damping Gain,

This parameter holds the motor function (holding

torque) or pre-heats the motor.

High load at low speed

<30% (rated speed)

parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time

Const. and parameter 1-16 High

This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in

Speed Filter Time Const. should be

increased

parameter 1-80 Function at Stop [1].

1-17 Voltage filter time const. should

be increased
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
should be increased (>100% for
longer time can overheat the motor)

Table 3.9 Recommendations for VVCplus Applications

If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase

1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter
can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.
Adjust starting torque in 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.

parameter 1-72 Start Function [0] or

NOTICE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor
current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
Low values of DC hold produces larger than expected
currents with larger motor power sizes. This error
increases as the motor power increases.
2-01 DC Brake Current
Range:
50
%*

[0 1000
%]

Function:
Enter a value for current as a percentage of the
rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor
Current. 100% DC braking current corresponds to
IM,N.

Application

Settings

DC brake current is applied on a stop command,

Low inertia applications

Keep calculated values

when the speed is lower than the limit set in

High inertia applications

parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low

Speed
Increase speed to a value between
default and maximum depending on
application.
Set ramp times matching the
application. Too fast ramp up causes
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast
ramp down causes an overvoltage
trip.

parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]; when

the DC Brake Inverse function is active; or via the
serial communication port. The braking current is

High load at low speed

parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low

Speed
Increase speed to a value between
default and maximum depending on
application.

active during the time period set in

parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.

NOTICE
The maximum value depends on the rated motor
current.
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
motor.
2-02 DC Braking Time
Range:
10 s*

Function:

[0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set

Table 3.10 Recommendations for FLUX Applications

in 2-01 DC Brake Current, once activated.

Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting
torque.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

57

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

2-10 Brake Function

Range:

Option:

Function:

Size related*

[ 0 - 60000
RPM]

Set the DC brake cut-in speed for

activation of the DC braking current

[1] Resistor
brake

set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake

3 3

Current, upon a stop command.

2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ 0 - 1000.0
Hz]

Set the DC brake cut-in speed for

activation of the DC braking current
set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake
Current, upon a stop command.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] has no effect
when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.

Range:

NOTICE
The AC brake is not as efficient as dynamic
braking with resistor.
AC brake is for VVCplus mode in both open
and closed loop.

Function:
[ par. 3-02 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

This is an access parameter to

parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
for legacy products. The maximum
reference is the highest value
obtainable by summing all
references. The maximum reference
unit matches the choice of configuration in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
and the unit in
parameter 3-01 Reference/Feedback
Unit.

A brake resistor is incorporated in the system, for

dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.
Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DClink voltage during braking (generating operation).
The resistor brake function is only active in
frequency converters with an integral dynamic
brake.

[2] AC brake Is selected to improve braking without using a

brake resistor. This parameter controls an
overmagnetisation of the motor when running
with a generatoric load. This function can improve
the OVC-function. Increasing the electrical losses
in the motor allows the OVC function to increase
the braking torque without exceeding the over
voltage limit.

2-05 Maximum Reference

Size
related*

Function:

AC brake is for VVCplus and flux mode in both

open and closed loop.

2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 5.00 65535.00
Ohm]

Set current as percentage of rated motor

dynamic brake.
Use this parameter for values without
decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals,

current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Is

use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm).

Range:

Function:

[ 0 - 1000
%]

to the brake resistor in 2-13 Brake Power

Monitoring. This parameter is only active
in frequency converters with an integral

2-06 Parking Current

50 %*

Set the brake resistor value in . This

value is used for monitoring the power

used when enabled in parameter 1-70 PM

Start Mode.

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Range:

2-07 Parking Time

Range:
3 s*

Size
related*

Function:

[0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the Parking Current set in

parameter 2-06 Parking Current, once activated.

Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters.

Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper.
2-10 Brake Function
Option:

58

[ 0.001 2000.000
kW]

Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is

the expected average power dissipated in
the brake resistor over a period of 120 s.
It is used as the monitoring limit for
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min and thereby
specifies when a warning/alarm is to be
given.

3.4.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

[0] Off

Function:

To calculate parameter 2-12 Brake Power

Limit (kW), the following formula can be
used.
Pbr,avg W =

Function:

U2
br V t br s
R br T br s

Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in

No brake resistor is installed.

the brake resistor, Rbr is the resistance of

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

2-15 Brake Check

Range:

Option:

Function:
the brake resistor. tbr is the active

parameter 2-15 Brake Check is only active in

frequency converters with an integral dynamic
brake.

breaking time within the 120 s period, Tbr.

Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake
resistor is active. This depends on the unit
as follows:
T2
T4
T5
T6
T7

units:
units:
units:
units:
units:

Select type of test and monitoring function to

check the connection to the brake resistor, or
whether a brake resistor is present, and then
display a warning or an alarm in the event of a
fault.

390 V
778 V
810 V
943 V/1099 V for D F frames
1099 V

NOTICE

NOTICE

The brake resistor disconnection function

is tested during power-up. However, the
brake IGBT test is performed when there is
no braking. A warning or trip disconnects
the brake function.

If Rbr is not known, or if Tbr is

different from 120 s, the practical
approach is to run the brake
application, readout 16-33 Brake
Energy /2 min and then enter this +
20% in 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW).

The testing sequence is as follows:

1.

2-13 Brake Power Monitoring

Option:

Function:

2.

Function:
3.

This parameter enables monitoring of the power

to the brake resistor. The power is calculated on

check has failed by returning a warning

or alarm.

Resistor (ohm)), the DC link voltage, and the

resistor duty time.

4.

Off

No brake power monitoring required.

Warning

Activates a warning on the display when the

power transmitted over 120 s exceeds 100% of

[0]

the monitoring limit (parameter 2-12 Brake Power

Limit (kW)
The warning disappears when the transmitted
power falls below 80% of the monitoring limit.

[3]

If the DC-link ripple amplitude while

braking is higher than the DC-link ripple
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake

[2]

If the DC-link ripple amplitude while

braking is lower than the DC link ripple
amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake

the basis of the resistance (parameter 2-11 Brake

[1]

The DC-link ripple amplitude is

measured for 300 ms with the brake
turned on.

This parameter is only active in frequency

converters with an integral dynamic brake.

[0]

The DC-link ripple amplitude is

measured for 300 ms without braking.

Trip

Warning
and trip

Trips frequency converter and displays an alarm

when the calculated power exceeds 100% of the
monitoring limit.

check is OK.
Off

Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a

short-circuit during operation. If a short-circuit
occurs, warning 25 appears.

[1]

Warning

Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a

short-circuit, and runs a test for brake resistor
disconnection during power-up.

[2]

Trip

Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of

the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).

[3]

Stop and
trip

Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of

the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
alarm is displayed (e.g. warning 25, 27 or 28).

[4]

AC brake

Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of

the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
performs a controlled ramp-down. This option is
available for FC 302 only.

Activates both of the above, including warning,

trip and alarm.

If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the

brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a
relay/digital outputs. The measuring accuracy of the power
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of
the resistor (better than 20%).

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

59

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

2-15 Brake Check

2-19 Over-voltage Gain

Option:

Range:

[5]

Function:

100 %*

Trip Lock

NOTICE
Remove a warning arising in connection with [0] Off or
[1] Warning by cycling the mains supply. The fault must
be corrected first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the
frequency converter keeps running even if a fault is
located.
2-16 AC brake Max. Current
Range:
100 %*

Function:
[ 0 - 1000.0 %] Enter the maximum permissible current
when using AC brake to avoid
overheating of motor windings.

NOTICE
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current has no effect when
1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
2-17 Over-voltage Control
Option:

Function:
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk
of the frequency converter tripping due to
an overvoltage on the DC link caused by
generative power from the load.
No OVC required.

[1]

Enabled (not
at stop)

Activates OVC except when using a stop

signal to stop the frequency converter.

[2]

Enabled

Activates OVC.

NOTICE
Do not enable OVC in hoisting applications.

[1]

60

Select overvoltage gain.

3.4.3 2-2* Mechanical Brake

Parameters for controlling operation of an electromagnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting
applications.
To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (relay 01 or
relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or
29) is required. Normally, this output must be closed
during periods when the frequency converter is unable to
hold the motor, e.g. due to an excessive load. Select [32]
Mechanical Brake Control for applications with an electromagnetic brake in parameter 5-40 Function Relay,
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital
Output. When selecting [32] Mechanical brake control, the
mechanical brake is closed from start up until the output
current is above the level selected in
parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current. During stop, the
mechanical brake activates when the speed falls below the
level specified in parameter 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM].
If the frequency converter enters an alarm condition or an
overcurrent or overvoltage situation, the mechanical brake
immediately cuts in. This is also the case during Safe
Torque Off.

Protection mode and trip delay features

(parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault) may delay
the activation of the mechanical brake in an alarm
condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting
applications.

2-18 Brake Check Condition

[0] * At Power Up

[0 - 200 %]

NOTICE

[0] * Disabled

Range:

Function:

Function:
Brake check is performed at power
up.

After Coast Situations Brake check is performed after coast

situations.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Start
term.18

130BA074.12

Parameter Descriptions

1=on
0=off

Par 1-71
Start delay time

3 3

Par 2-21
Activate brake
speed

Shaft speed
Par 1-74
Start speed

Output current
Pre-magnetizing
current or
DC hold current

Par 1-76 Start current/

Par 2-00 DC hold current

Par 2-23
Brake delay time

Par 2-20
Release brake current

Reaction time EMK brake

on

Relay 01

off

Mechanical brake
locked
Mechanical brake
free
Time

Illustration 3.19 Mechanical Brake

2-20 Release Brake Current

2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]

Range:

Range:

Size
related*

Function:
[0 par.
16-37 A]

Set the motor current for release of the

mechanical brake, when a start condition is
present. The default value is the maximum
current the inverter can provide for the
particular power size. The upper limit is
specified in parameter 16-37 Inv. Max.
Current.

Function:
brake, when a stop condition is
present.

2-23 Activate Brake Delay

Range:
0 s*

NOTICE

[0 5 s]

When Mechanical brake control

output is selected but no mechanical
brake is connected, the function does
not work by default setting due to
too low motor current.

Function:
Enter the brake delay time of the coast after rampdown time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full
holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake
has locked the load before the motor enters coast
mode. See Mechanical Brake Control section in the
Design Guide.
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical
brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
Setting of brake delay parameters does not impact
the torque. The frequency converter does not
register that mechanical brake is holding the load.

2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 30000
RPM]

Set the motor speed for activation of

the mechanical brake, when a stop
condition is present. The upper speed

After setting parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay the

torque drops to zero in few minutes. The sudden
torque change leads to movement and noise.

limit is specified in
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

Range:

2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size related*

0 s*

Function:
[ 0 - 5000.0
Hz]

2-24 Stop Delay

Set the motor frequency for

activation of the mechanical

[0 - 5
s]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Set the time interval from the moment when the
motor is stopped until the brake closes.

61

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

frequency converters are connected to the same

shaft.

2-24 Stop Delay

Range:

Function:
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical

No ramp up until feedback confirms mechanical

brake is open.

Improved load control at stop. If

parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delayis set too
short, W22 is activated and the torque is not
allowed to ramp down.

The transition when motor takes over the load

from the brake can be configured. 2-28 Gain
Boost Factor can be increased to minimise the
movement. For very smooth transition change
the setting from the speed control to the position
control during the change-over.

brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and

parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.

3 3

This parameter is a part of the stopping function.

2-25 Brake Release Time

Range:
0.20 s*

Function:
[0 - 5 s] This value defines the time it takes for the
mechanical brake to open. This parameter
must act as a time-out when brake feedback is
activated.

3.4.4 Hoist Mechanical Brake

The hoist mechanical break control supports the following
functions:
2 channels for mechanical brake feedback to offer
further protection against unintended behaviour
resulting from broken cable.

Monitoring of mechanical brake feedback

throughout the complete cycle. This helps protect
the mechanical brake - especially if more
130BA642.12

Set 2-28 Gain Boost Factor to 0 to enable

Position Control during 2-02 DC Braking
Time. This enables parameters 2-30 to
2-33 which are PID parameters for the
Position Control.

Motor
Speed

Torque Ramp Brake Release

Up Time
Time
p. 2-27
p. 2-25

Ramp 1 Up
P. 3-41

Ramp 1 Down
P. 3-42

Stop Delay Activate Brake Torque Ramp

P. 2-24
Delay
Down Time
P. 2-23
p. 2-29

Torque Ref. p. 2-26

W22
Active

Torque
Ref.

A22
Active

A22
Active

W22
Active

Brake
Relay
Mech Brake
Feedback

High Contact no.1

E.g. DI32 [70] Mech. Brake Feedback
Low
High

Contact no.2
Low OPTIONAL
E.g. DI33 [71] Mech. Brake Feedback

Mech Brake
Position

Open
Closed
Gain Boost. p. 2-28

Gain Boost or
Postion Control

Illustration 3.20 Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake control. This brake control is available in FLUX with motor
feedback only, available for asynchronous and non-salient PM motors.

62

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Parameters 2-26 to 2-33 are only available for the hoist

mechanical brake control (FLUX with motor feedback).

0
%*

Range:
200.0 ms*

2-26 Torque Ref

Range:

2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time

Function:
[1.0 - 20000.0 ms]

2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time

Function:

[ -300 - The value defines the torque applied against the

300 %] closed mechanical brake, before release.
The torque/load on a crane is positive and
between 10% and 160%. To obtain the best

Range:
10.0 ms*

3 3

Function:
[0.1 - 100.0 ms]

starting point, set parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to

approximately 70%.
The torque/load on a lift can be both positive
and negative and between -160% and 160% To
obtain the best starting point, set
parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to 0%.
The higher the torque error
(parameter 2-26 Torque Ref vs. actual torque) is,
the more movement during load take over.

2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time

Range:
0.2 s*

Function:
[0 - 5 s] The value defines the duration of the torque
ramp in clockwise direction.

2-28 Gain Boost Factor

Range:
1*

[0 4]

Function:
Only active in flux closed loop. The function ensures
a smooth transition from torque control mode to
speed control mode when the motor takes over the
load from the brake.
Increase to minimise the movement. Activate the
Advanced Mechanical Brake (parameter group 2-3*
Adv. Mech Brake) by setting parameter 2-28 Gain
Boost Factor to 0.

2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time

Range:
0 s*

Function:
[0 - 5 s]

Torque Ramp Down Time.

Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 can be set up for very smooth

transition change from speed control to position control
during 2-25 Brake Release Time - the time when the load is
transferred from the mechanical brake to the frequency
converter. Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 are activated when 2-28
Gain Boost Factor is set to 0. See Illustration 3.20 for more
information.
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain
Range:
0.0000*

Function:
[0.0000 - 1.0000 ]

2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

Range:
0.0150*

Function:
[0.0000 - 1.0000 ]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

63

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps

3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit

Parameters for reference handling, definition of limitations,

and configuration of the reaction of the frequency
converter to changes.

3.5.1 3-0* Reference Limits

3-00 Reference Range
Option:

Function:

have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop

control or [3] Process is selected in

mbar

[71]

bar

[72]

Pa

[73]

kPa

[74]

m WG

[80]

kW

[121] gal/s
[122] gal/min
[123] gal/h
[124] CFM
[126] ft/min

Select the range of the reference signal and the

feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only,
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
control or [3] Process is selected in

[127] ft/h
[130] lb/s
[131] lb/min
[132] lb/h
[140] ft/s

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

[141] ft/min

For both positive and negative values (both

[145] ft

directions, relative to parameter 4-10 Motor Speed

[150] lb ft

Direction).

[160] F
[170] psi

3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option:

[171] lb/in

Function:

[172] in WG

Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control

[173] ft WG

references and feedbacks. Parameter 1-00 Configu-

[180] HP

ration Mode must be either [3] Process or [8]

Extended PID Control.
[0]

None

[1]

[2]

RPM

[3]

Hz

[4]

Nm

[5]

PPM

[10]

1/min

[12]

Pulse/s

[20]

l/s

[21]

l/min

[22]

l/h

[23]

m/s

[24]

m/min

[25]

m/h

[30]

kg/s

[31]

kg/min

[32]

kg/h

[33]

t/min

[34]

t/h

[40]

m/s

[41]

m/min

[45]

64

[70]

[125] ft/s

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

[1] -Max +Max

[60]

Function:

[120] GPM

Select the range of the reference signal and the

feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only,
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may

[0] Min Max

Option:

3-02 Minimum Reference

Range:
Size
[ -999999.999 related* par. 3-03
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Function:
Enter the minimum reference. The
minimum reference is the lowest
value obtainable by summing all
references.
Minimum reference is active only
when parameter 3-00 Reference Range
is set to [0] Min.- Max.
The minimum reference unit matches:

The configuration of
parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode: for [1] Speed closed
loop, RPM; for [2] Torque,
Nm.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

The unit selected in

parameter 3-01 Reference/
Feedback Unit.

3-03 Maximum Reference

Range:

12 (+24V)

Function:

Size
[ par. 3-02 related* 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

130BA149.10

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Enter the Maximum Reference. The

Maximum Reference is the highest
value obtainable by summing all
references.

Preset

The Maximum Reference unit

76543210
10101010

29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]

11001100

32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]

11110000

33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]

3 3

matches:
The choice of configuration
in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode: for [1] Speed

Illustration 3.21 Preset Reference

closed loop, RPM; for [2]

Torque, Nm.

The unit selected in

parameter 3-00 Reference
Range.

3-04 Reference Function

Option:
[0] Sum
[1] External/
Preset

Function:
Sums both external and preset reference
sources.
Use either the preset or the external reference
source.
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input.

Preset ref. bit

Preset ref. 0

Preset ref. 1

Preset ref. 2

Preset ref. 3

Preset ref. 4

Preset ref. 5

Preset ref. 6

Preset ref. 7

Table 3.11 Preset Ref. Bit

3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]

Range:
Size
related*

3.5.2 3-1* References

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2

[16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
3-10 Preset Reference

0 %*

[-100 100 %]

See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value

Range:

Array [8]
Range: 0-7

Range:

The jog speed is a fixed output speed

at which the frequency converter is
running, when the jog function is
activated.

0 %*

Function:

[0 100 %]

Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in

this parameter, using array programming. The
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference)
If a RefMIN different from 0
(parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference) is
programmed, the preset reference is calculated
as a percentage of the full reference range, i.e.
on the basis of the difference between RefMAX
and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to
RefMIN. When using preset references, select

Function:
Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
added to or deducted from the actual reference
for Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch
up is selected via one of the digital inputs
(5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
added to the total reference. If Slow down is
selected via one of the digital inputs
(5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
deducted from the total reference. Obtain
extended functionality with the DigiPot function.
See parameter group 3-9* Digital Potentiometer.

Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the

corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

65

3-13 Reference Site

3-15 Reference Resource 1

Option:

Option:

Function:

[0] Linked to
Hand / Auto

Use local reference when in Hand mode; or

remote reference when in Auto mode.

[1] Remote

Use remote reference in both Hand mode and

Auto mode.

[2] Local

Use local reference in both Hand mode and

Auto mode.

NOTICE
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
converter starts with this setting again
following a 'power down'.

3-14 Preset Relative Reference

Range:
0 %*

[-100 100 %]

Function:

[0]

No function

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Frequency input
29

[8]

Frequency input
33

[11] Local bus

reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30-11

(General Purpose I/O Option Module)

[22] Analog input

X30-12

(General Purpose I/O Option Module)

[29] Analog Input

X48/2

The actual reference, X, is increased or

decreased with the percentage Y, set in
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference. This
results in the actual reference Z. Actual
reference (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in

3-16 Reference Resource 2

Option:

Resulting
actual
reference

Z
Relative
Z=X+X*Y/100

for the second reference signal.

parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2
and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource
3 define up to 3 different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.

130BA278.10

Illustration 3.22 Preset Relative Reference

10
*Y/

X+X

No function
Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Frequency input 29

[8]

Frequency input 33

[20] Digital pot.meter

Y
0

[0]
[1]

[11] Local bus reference

-100

Function:
Select the reference input to be used

3-15 Reference 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source,

3-17 Reference 3 Source and 8-02 Control Source.
Y

Function:
signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.

Select which reference site to activate.

130BA059.12

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

100

P 3-14

[21] Analog input

X30-11
[22] Analog input
X30-12
[29] Analog Input X48/2

Illustration 3.23 Actual Reference

3-17 Reference Resource 3

Option:

Function:

3-15 Reference Resource 1

Select the reference input to be used

Option:

for the third reference signal.

Function:

parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,

Select the reference input to be used

parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2

and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource

for the first reference signal.

parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,

3 define up to 3 different reference

signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.

parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2 and

parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3
define up to 3 different reference
[0]

66

No function

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3-17 Reference Resource 3

3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]

Option:

Range:

Function:

Function:

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Frequency input 29

[8]

Frequency input 33

is a fixed output speed. The frequency

converter runs at this speed when the jog
function is activated. The maximum limit is

[11] Local bus reference

defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High

Size
related*

[0 par. 4-13
RPM]

Limit [RPM].

[20] Digital pot.meter

See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.

[21] Analog input

X30-11

3.5.3 Ramps
3-4* Ramp 1

[22] Analog input

X30-12
[29] Analog Input X48/2

For each of 4 ramps (parameter groups 3-4* Ramp 1, 3-5*

Ramp 2, 3-6* Ramp 3 and 3-7* Ramp 4) configure the ramp
parameters: ramp type, ramping times (duration of
acceleration and deceleration) and level of jerk compensation for S ramps.

3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource

Option:

Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.

Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to

Illustration 3.25 and Illustration 3.26.

the fixed value (defined in

RPM

parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference).

The sum of the fixed and variable

P 4-13
High-limit
Reference
ns

values (labelled Y in Illustration 3.24) is

multiplied with the actual reference

P 4-11
Low limit

Z
Relative
Z=X+X*Y/100

Resulting
actual
reference

130BA059.12

(labelled X in Illustration 3.24). This

product is then added to the actual
reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the
resultant actual reference.
Y

Illustration 3.24 Resultant Actual

Reference

[0] * No function
[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Frequency input
29

[8]

Frequency input
33

130BA872.10

Select a variable value to be added to

P 3-*1
Ramp (X)Up
Time (Acc)
tacc

P 3-*2
Ramp (X) Down
Time (Dec)

Time

tdec

Illustration 3.25 Linear Ramping Times

If S-ramps are selected then set the level of non-linear jerk

compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining
the proportion of ramp-up and ramp-down times where
acceleration and deceleration are variable (i.e. increasing or
decreasing). The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration
settings are defined as a percentage of the actual ramp
time.

[11] Local bus

reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30-11
[22] Analog input
X30-12
[29] Analog Input
X48/2

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

67

3 3

3 3

Speed

Ramp (X) S-Ramp

Ratio at Dec.End

Ramp (X) S-Ramp

Ratio at Accel.End
Ramp (X)
S-Ramp
Ratio at
Accel.End

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range:

Jerk compensated

Function:
motor speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a rampdown time such that no overvoltage arises
in the inverter due to regenerative operation
of the motor, and such that the generated
current does not exceed the current limit set

Ramp (X)
S-Ramp
Ratio at
Dec.End

Linear

Ramp (X)
Up Time

130BA168.10

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The value

0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode.

Ramp (X)
Down Time

See ramp-up time in parameter 3-41 Ramp 1

Ramp Up Time.

Illustration 3.26 Linear Ramping Times

Par . 3 42 =

3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

3-40 Ramp 1 Type

Option:

Range:

Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration/deceleration.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
application.

50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

[0] * Linear
[1]

S-ramp
Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
Const Jerk

[2]

S-ramp
Const
Time

S-ramp based on the values set in

parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and

Range:
50 %*

parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time.

If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference

during ramping is changed the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.

[ 1 - 99
%]

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:
[ 0.01
- 3600
s]

Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration

time from 0 RPM to the synchronous motor
speed nS. Select a ramp-up time such that
the output current does not exceed the
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit
during ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Time.
tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

Range:
Size
related*

68

Function:
[ 0.01
- 3600
s]

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

time in parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down

Par . 3 41 =

(parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in

which the acceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks occurring in the
application.

3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

Range:

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time

3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

NOTICE

Size
related*

tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM

Enter the ramp-down time, that is, the

deceleration time from the synchronous

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.5.4 3-5* Ramp 2

3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*

Ramp 1.

Range:
50 %*

Function:

[ 1 - 99
%]

3-50 Ramp 2 Type

Option:

Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
application.

3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

Range:
50 %*

Function:
[ 1 - 99

%]

[0] * Linear
[1]

S-ramp
Acceleration with lowest possible jerk
Const Jerk

[2]

S-ramp
Const
Time

S-ramp based on the values set in

parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference

during ramping is changed the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.

Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time

(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

Range:

NOTICE

Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time

(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
Range:
Size
related*

Range:

Function:
[ 0.01
- 3600
s]

50 %*

Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration

time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed
ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the

[ 1 - 99
%]

output current does not exceed the current

limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01
s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time.
Par . 3 51 =

tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3.5.5 3-6* Ramp 3

Configure ramp parameters, see 3-4* Ramp 1.

3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

3-60 Ramp 3 Type

Range:

Option:

Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.01
- 3600
s]

Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
application.

Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the

deceleration time from the rated motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down time
such that no overvoltage arises in the
frequency converter due to regenerative
operation of the motor, and such that the
generated current does not exceed the

[0] * Linear

current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current

[1]

S-ramp
Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
Const Jerk

[2]

S-ramp
Const
Time

Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s

in speed mode. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time.
Par . 3 52 =

tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

S-ramp based on the values set in

parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time and
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time

69

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference

during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
Range:
Size
related*

Range:
50 %*

Function:

[ 1 - 99
%]

3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Function:
[ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
3600 s] time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed
ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the

Range:
50 %*

Function:
[ 1 - 99

down Time) where the deceleration torque

decreases. The larger the percentage value, the
greater the jerk compensation achieved, and
thus the lower the torque jerks in the
application.

limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during

ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to
0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down time
in parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time.

3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time

Size
related*

3.5.6 3-7* Ramp 4

Function:
[ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the
3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
time such that no overvoltage arises in the
inverter due to regenerative operation of
the motor, and such that the generated
current does not exceed the current limit

Configure ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*

Ramp 1.
3-70 Ramp 4 Type
Option:

Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
application

set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The

value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed
mode. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time.
Par . 3 62 =

tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM

[0] * Linear
[1]

S-ramp
Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
Const Jerk

[2]

S-ramp
Const
Time

3-65 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Enter the proportion of the total rampdowndecel time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp

%]

output current does not exceed the current

Range:

Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down

time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

S-ramp based on the values set in

parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time and
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.

NOTICE
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement which may
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
initiators may be necessary.
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time
Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.01
- 3600
s]

Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration

time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed
ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the
output current does not exceed the current
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during

70

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time

3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Range:

Range:

Function:

Function:
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01

s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
Par . 3 71 =

tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM

3.5.7 3-8* Other Ramps

3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time

Range:
Size
related*

Function:

3-80 Jog Ramp Time

[ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the

3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
time such that no overvoltage arises in the
inverter due to regenerative operation of
the motor, and such that the generated
current does not exceed the current limit

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.01
- 3600
s]

Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/

deceleration time between 0 RPM and the
rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that the
resultant output current required for the
given jog ramp time does not exceed the
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
The jog ramp time starts upon activation of a
jog signal via the LCP, a selected digital input,
or the serial communication port. When jog
state is disabled then the normal ramping
times are valid.

set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The

value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed
mode. See ramp-up time in
parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
ref RPM

RPM

3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

P 4-13 RPM
high limit
P 1-25
Motor speed
P 3-19
Jog speed
P 4-11 RPM
low limit

t jog
P 3-80
Ramp up
(acc)

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
(parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

t jog

Time

P 3-80
Ramp down
(dec)

Illustration 3.27 Jog Ramp Time

Par . 3 80 =

t jog s x ns RPM

jog speed par . 3 19 RPM

3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time

3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

Range:

130BA070.10

Par . 3 72 =

3 3

Range:

Function:

3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Enter the quickstop ramp-down time, i.e.

the deceleration time from the
synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure
that no resultant over-voltage arises in the
inverter due to regenerative operation of
the motor required to achieve the given
ramp-down time. Ensure also that the
generated current required to achieve the
given ramp-down time does not exceed

Range:

the current limit (set in

50 %*

50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

[ 1 - 99
%]

Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down

Size
related*

Function:

time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time)

where the deceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque decreases. The

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

[0.01 3600 s]

parameter 4-18 Current Limit). Quick-stop is

activated by means of a signal on a

71

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.5.8 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time

Range:

Function:

3 3

130BA069.10

selected digital input, or via the serial

communication port.
RPM

P 4-13 RPM
high limit

The digital potentiometer enables increase or decrease of

the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of the digital
inputs using the functions Increase, Decrease or Clear. To
activate the function, at least one digital input must be set
up to Increase or Decrease.
Speed

130BA158.11

Parameter Descriptions

Reference
P 1-25
Motor speed

P 3-95

P 4-11 RPM
low limit

Time (s)
Inc
Time

Illustration 3.29 Increase Actual Reference

Speed

Qstop

130BA159.11

P 3-81
Qramp

Illustration 3.28 Quick Stop Ramp Time

P 3-95

3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type

Option:

Time (s)
Dec

Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration and
deceleration. A linear ramp gives constant
acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp
gives non-linear acceleration, compensating for jerk in the application.

[0] * Linear
[1]

S-ramp Const
Jerk

[2]

S-ramp Const
Time

Inc

Illustration 3.30 Increase/Decrease Actual Reference

3-90 Step Size

Range:
0.10
%*

Function:
[0.01 200 %]

DECREASE is activated, the resulting

reference is increased/decreased by the
amount set in this parameter.

3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

Range:
50 %*

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
lower the torque jerks in the application.

3-91 Ramp Time

Range:
1
s*

50 %*

72

[ 1 - 99
%]

Function:

[0 Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment of

3600 s] the reference from 0% to 100% of the specified
digital potentiometer function (Increase, Decrease
or Clear).
If Increase/ Decrease is activated for longer than
the ramp delay period specified in

3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End

Range:

Enter the increment size required for

INCREASE/DECREASE, as a percentage of the
synchronous motor speed, ns. If INCREASE/

Function:
Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
time (3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) where
the deceleration torque decreases. The larger
the percentage value, the greater the jerk
compensation achieved, and thus the lower
the torque jerks in the application.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

parameter 3-95 Ramp Delay the actual reference

isramped up/down according to this ramp time.
The ramp time is defined as the time used to
adjust the reference by the step size specified in
parameter 3-90 Step Size.

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3-92 Power Restore

Option: Function:
[0]

Off

Resets the Digital Potentiometer reference to 0% after

power up.

[1]

On

Restores the most recent Digital Potentiometer

reference at power up.

3 3

3-93 Maximum Limit

Range:
100 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200
%]

Set the maximum permissible value for

the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.

3-94 Minimum Limit

Range:
-100 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200 Set the minimum permissible value for
%]
the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.

3-95 Ramp Delay

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

Enter the delay required from activation of

the digital potentiometer function until the
frequency converter starts to ramp the
reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
starts to ramp as soon as INCREASE/DECREASE
is activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp
Time.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

73

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

Range:

3.6.1 4-1* Motor Limits

Function:
setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High

Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
exceeded.
A limit may generate a message on the display. A warning
always generates a message in the display or on the
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a
trip, upon which the frequency converter stops and
generates an alarm message.

Limit [Hz].

4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[ par.
4-11 60000
RPM]

Enter the maximum limit for motor

speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
be set to correspond to the
manufacturers maximum rated motor
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit must

4-10 Motor Speed Direction

Option:

exceed the setting in

Function:

parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit

[RPM].

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
Select the motor speed direction(s) required. Use
this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

Direction is set to [0] Clockwise as default. The

Range:

does not limit options for setting

parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM].
[0] Clockwise

The reference is set to CW rotation. Reversing

input (default term 19) must be open.

[1] Counter
clockwise

The reference is set to CCW rotation. Reversing

input (default term 19) must be closed. If
reversing is required with Reverse input open
the motor direction can be changed by
parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction
Allows the motor to rotate in both directions.

4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

Range:
Size
related*

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

74

[ par.
4-12 par. 4-19
Hz]

Enter the max limit for motor speed.

parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
can match the manufacturer's
recommended maximum motor speed.
The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed
the value in 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[Hz]. The output frequency must not
exceed 10% of the switching frequency.

NOTICE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (14-01 Switching Frequency).

Range:

[ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed.

4-13
The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
RPM]
correspond to the manufacturers
recommended minimum motor speed.
The Motor Speed Low Limit must not
exceed the setting in

Size
related*

Size
related*

Function:

4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

Function:

parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit

[RPM].

Range:

Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the

inverter switching frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Frequency).

to [3] Process, parameter 4-10 Motor Speed

setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction

[2] Both
directions

NOTICE

Function:

Size related*
Application
dependent*

Function:
[ 0 - 1000.0 %]
[Application
dependant]

This function limits the

torque on the shaft to
protect the mechanical
installation.

NOTICE
Changing parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Speed
open loop, parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
automatically readjusted.

[0 Enter the minimum limit for motor speed.

par. 4-14 The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
Hz]
correspond to the minimum output
frequency of the motor shaft. The Motor
Speed Low Limit must not exceed the

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source

The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated

torque, including torque spikes. This is not the torque
that is seen from the LCP or the Fieldbus as that is
filtered.

Option:

Function:
corresponding to 0% and 100% are
defined in the analog input scaling, e.g.
parameter group 6-1* Analog Input 1.
This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in

4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode

Range:
100 %*

Speed Open Loop or Speed Closed Loop.

Function:
[ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the torque on the
shaft to protect the mechanical installation.

NOTICE
The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated
torque, including torque spikes. This is not the torque
that is seen from the LCP or the Fieldbus as that is
filtered.
4-18 Current Limit
Range:
Size
related*

[2]

Analog in 53

[4]

Analog in 53 inv

[6]

Analog in 54

[8]

Analog in 54 inv

[10] Analog in
X30-11
[12] Analog in
X30-11 inv
[14] Analog in
X30-12
[16] Analog in
X30-12 inv

Function:
[ 1.0 1000.0 %]

[0] * No function

This is a true current limit function that

continues in the oversynchronous range,
however due to field weakening the
motor torque at current limit will drop
accordingly when the voltage increase
stops above the synchronised speed of
the motor.

4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption

Option:

Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the
settings in parameter 4-19 Max Output

4-19 Max Output Frequency

Frequency from 0% to 100% (or vice

versa). The signal levels corresponding
to 0% and 100% are defined in the
analog input scaling, e.g. parameter

Range:

Function:

group 6-1* Analog Input 1. This

NOTICE

parameter is only active when

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

Torque Mode.

Size
related*

[1 590
Hz]

[0] * No function

NOTICE

[2]

Analog input 53

[4]

Max. output frequency cannot exceed

10% of the inverter switching frequency
(parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency).

Analog input 53
inv

[6]

Analog input 54

[8]

Analog input 54
inv

Provides a final limit on the output frequency

for improved safety in applications where you
want to avoid accidental over-speeding. This
limit is final in all configurations (independent

[10] Analog input

X30-11

of the setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration

[14] Analog input

X30-12

Mode).

[12] Analog input

X30-11 inv

[16] Analog input

X30-12 inv

4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source

Option:

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in

Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the
settings in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode and parameter 4-17 Torque
Limit Generator Mode from 0% to 100%
(or inverse). The signal levels

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

75

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.6.2 4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring

Speed
[rpm]

130BA221.10

Parameter Descriptions

The parameter group includes monitoring and handling of

motor feedback devices as encoders, resolvers etc.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function
Option:

Function:

ncalc

This function is used to monitor for

consistency in feedback signal, i.e. if the
feedback signal is available.
Select which reaction the frequency
converter should take if a feedback fault
is detected. The selected action is to take
place when the feedback signal differs
from the output speed by the value set in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
for longer than the value set
inparameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss

nactual

P 4-31

P 4-32

Time
[sec]

Illustration 3.31 Motor Feedback Speed Error

Timeout.
[0]

Disabled

[1]

Warning

4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout

Range:

[2] * Trip

0.05 s*

[3]

Jog

[4]

Freeze Output

[5]

Max Speed

[6]

Switch to Open
Loop

[7]

Select Setup 1

[8]

Select Setup 2

[9]

Select Setup 3

[0 - 60
s]

the function selected in parameter 4-30 Motor

Feedback Loss Function.

4-34 Tracking Error Function

Option:

Function:
This function is used to monitor that the
application follows the expected speed profile.
In Closed loop the speed reference to the PID is
compared to the encoder feedback (filtered) In
open loop the speed reference to the PID is
compensated for slip and compared to the
frequency that is sent to the motor

[11] stop & trip

Warning 90 is active as soon as the value in

parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error is exceeded,
regardless of the setting of parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback
Loss Timeout. Warning/Alarm 61 Feedback Error is related
to the Motor Feedback Loss Function.

(16-13 Frequency).
The reaction is activated, if the measured

4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error

300 RPM*

error set in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback

Speed Error to be exceeded before enabling

[10] Select Setup 4

Range:

Function:
Set the timeout value allowing the speed

difference is more than specified in

Function:

parameter 4-35 Tracking Error for the time

[1 - 600 RPM] Select the max allowed error in speed

(output speed vs. feedback).

specified in parameter 4-36 Tracking Error

Timeout.
A tracking error in closed loop does not imply
that there is a problem with the feedback
signal! A tracking error can be the result of
torque limit at too big loads.
[0] Disable
[1] Warning
[2] Trip
[3] Trip after
stop

Warning/Alarm 78 Tracking Error is related to the Tracking

Error Function.

76

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.6.3 4-5* Adjustable Warnings

Range:
10
RPM*

Function:
[1 - 600
RPM]

Enter the maximum permissible speed error

between the motor speed and the output
of the ramp when not ramping. In open
loop the motor speed is estimated and in
closed loop it is the feedback from
encoder/resolver.

1 s*

Warnings are shown on the LCP, and can be programmed

to be outputs or to be read out via serial bus in the
Extended Status Word.
Imotor

4-36 Tracking Error Timeout

Range:

Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current,

speed, reference and feedback.

Function:

[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error

greater than the value set in
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is permissible.

ILIM
(P 4-18)

ON REF

IHIGH
(P 4-51)

4-37 Tracking Error Ramping

Range:
100
RPM*

130BA064.10

4-35 Tracking Error

IN RANGE

Function:
[1 - 600
RPM]

Enter the maximum permissible speed

error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when ramping. In
open loop the motor speed is estimated
and in closed loop it is the feedback from
encoder/resolver.

ILOW
(P 4-50)
nmotor [RPM]
nMIN nLOW
(P 4-11) (P 4-52)

REF nHIGH nMAX

(P 4-53) (P 4-13)

Illustration 3.32 Adjustable Warnings

4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout

Range:
1 s*

Function:

4-50 Warning Current Low

[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error

greater than the value set in
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping while
Ramping is permissible.

Range:
0 A*

Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to

produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC
302 only) and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302

4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout

Range:
5 s*

Function:

[ 0 - par. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current

4-51 A]
falls below this limit, the display reads Current

Function:

only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.

[0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period after ramping where

parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping and
parameter 4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout
are still active.

4-51 Warning Current High

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ par.
Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
4-50 - par. current exceeds this limit, the display
16-37 A]
reads Current High. The signal outputs
can be programmed to produce a status
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.

4-52 Warning Speed Low

Range:
0 RPM*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-53 RPM]

Enter the nLOW value. When the motor

speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
Speed Low. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only) and on relay
output 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

77

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

4-53 Warning Speed High

4-57 Warning Feedback High

Range:

Range:

Size
related*

3 3

Function:
[ par. 4-52 Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor
- 60000
speed exceeds this value, the display
RPM]
reads SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs
can be programmed to produce a
status signal on terminals 27 or 29 and
on relay outputs 01 or 02.

Function:
only) and on relay output
01 or 02 (FC 302 only).

4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.

4-54 Warning Reference Low

Range:
-999999.999*

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 4-55 ]

Enter the lower reference limit.

When the actual reference falls
below this limit, the display

Displays alarm 30, 31 or 32 in the event of a

missing motor phase. It is strongly
recommended to enable to avoid motor
damage.

indicates RefLOW. The signal

outputs can be programmed to
produce a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC
302 only).

4-55 Warning Reference High

Range:
999999.999*

Function:
[ par. 4-54 999999.999 ]

Enter the upper reference limit.

When the actual reference exceeds
this limit, the display reads Ref
High. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302
only) and on relay output 01 or 02
(FC 302 only).

[0]

Disabled

The frequency converter does not issue a

missing motor phase alarm. Not recommended
due to risk of motor damage.

[1]

Trip 100
ms

For a quick detection time and alarm in the

event of a missing motor phase.

[2]

Trip 1000
ms

For a slow detection time and alarm in the

event of a missing motor phase.

[3]

Trip 100ms Special option relevant for crane applications

3ph detec. when lowering a small load that lets the
frequency converter avoid false detections of
missing motor phase.
This option is a reduced version of option [1]
Trip 100 ms.
1 phase missing is handled as in option [1] Trip
100 ms. 3-phase detection is reduced compared
to option [1] Trip 100 ms.
The 3-phase detection is only working at startup and in the low speed range where a
significant current is running, avoiding false
trips during small motor current.
Only available for FC 302 FLUX closed loop.

4-56 Warning Feedback Low

Range:
-999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

Function:
[ -999999.999 par. 4-57
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the lower feedback

limit. When the feedback
falls below this limit, the
display reads Feedb Low.
The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce
a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302
only) and on relay output
01 or 02 (FC 302 only).

4-57 Warning Feedback High

Range:
999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

78

Function:
[ par. 4-56 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the upper feedback

limit. When the feedback
exceeds this limit, the
display reads Feedb High.
The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce
a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302

[5]

Motor
Check

The frequency converter detects automatically

when the motor is disconnected and resumes
operation once the motor is connected again.
Valid for FC 302 only.

3.6.4 4-6* Speed Bypass

Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies
or speeds, due to resonance problems in the system. A
maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can be avoided.
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-13 RPM]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]

Array [4]

Range:

Function:
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

3 3

4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-13 RPM]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the
speeds to be avoided.

4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
4-14 Hz]

Some systems call for avoiding

certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the upper limits of the speeds
to be avoided.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

79

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out

Digital input function

Select

Terminal

No operation

[0]

All *term 32, 33

Reset

[1]

All

Coast inverse

[2]

All *term 27

Coast and reset inverse

[3]

All

Quick stop inverse

[4]

All

DC-brake inverse

[5]

All

Stop inverse

[6]

All

Start

[8]

All *term 18

Latched start

[9]

All

Reversing

[10]

All *term 19

Start reversing

[11]

All

Enable start forward

[12]

All

Enable start reverse

[13]

All

Jog

[14]

All *term 29

Preset reference on

[15]

All

Preset ref bit 0

[16]

All

Preset ref bit 1

[17]

All

Preset ref bit 2

[18]

All

Freeze reference

[19]

All

Freeze output

[20]

All

Speed up

[21]

All

5-01 Terminal 27 Mode

Speed down

[22]

All

Option:

Set-up select bit 0

[23]

All

NOTICE

Set-up select bit 1

[24]

All

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.

Precise stop inverse

[26]

18, 19

Precises start, stop

[27]

18, 19

Catch up

[28]

All

Slow down

[29]

All

Counter input

[30]

29, 33

Pulse input Edge Trigged

[31]

29, 33

Pulse input Time Based

[32]

29, 33

5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Ramp bit 0

[34]

All

Option:

Ramp bit 1

[35]

All

Latched precise start

[40]

18, 19

Latched precise stop

inverse

[41]

18, 19

External interlock

[51]

DigiPot Increase

[55]

All

DigiPot Decrease

[56]

All

DigiPot Clear

[57]

All

Digipot Hoist

[58]

All

Counter A (up)

[60]

29, 33

Counter A (down)

[61]

29, 33

Reset Counter A

[62]

All

Counter B (up)

[63]

29, 33

Counter B (down)

[64]

29, 33

Reset Counter B

[65]

All

Mech. Brake Feedb.

[70]

All

Mech. Brake Feedb. Inv.

[71]

All

PID Error Inv.

[72]

All

PID Reset I-part

[73]

All

PID enable

[74]

All

MCO Specific

[75]

3.7.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode

Parameters for configuring the input and output using
NPN and PNP.
5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Option:

Function:
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN
systems.

[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (). PNP systems

are pulled down to GND.
[1]

NPN Action on negative directional pulses (). NPN

systems are pulled up to +24 V, internally in the
frequency converter.

NOTICE
Once this parameter has been changed, it must be
activated by performing a power cycle.

[0] Input

Function:

Defines terminal 27 as a digital input.

[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output.

Function:

[0] *

Input

Defines terminal 29 as a digital input.

[1]

Output

Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.

This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

3.7.2 5-1* Digital Inputs

The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
the following functions:
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
group 2.
Group 1
Group 2

Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,

Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [Off] key.
Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog
and Freeze output

Table 3.12 Function Groups

80

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Digital input function

Select

PTC Card 1

[80]

Profidrive OFF2

[91]

Profidrive OFF3

[92]

Start edge triggered

[98]

Safe Option Reset

[100]

NOTICE

Terminal
All

When the frequency converter is at the

torque limit and has received a stop
command, it may not stop by itself. To
ensure that the frequency converter
stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Torque limit & stop and connect this
digital output to a digital input that is
configured as coast.

Table 3.13 Digital Input Function

FC 300 standard terminals are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33.
MCB 101 terminals are X30/2, X30/3 and X30/4.
Terminal 29 functions as an output only in FC 302.

[8]

Start

Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in

the associated parameter.

(Default Digital input 18): Select start for a

start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0
= stop.

[9]

Latched
start

All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions:

The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min.

2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is
activated or a reset command (via DI) is given.

[10] Reversing

[0]

No
operation

No reaction to signals transmitted to the

terminal.

[1]

Reset

Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ALARM.

Not all alarms can be reset.

[2]

Coast
inverse

(Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop,

inverted input (NC). The frequency converter

[4]

[5]

parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The

function is not active in process closed loop.
Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
the same time.

[12] Enable
start
forward

Disengages the counterclockwise movement

and allows for the clockwise direction.

[13] Enable
start
reverse

Disengages the clockwise movement and

allows for the counterclockwise direction.

parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When

motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0

[14] Jog

(Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog

Quick-stop.

[15] Preset
reference
on

Coast and
reset
inverse

Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC).

Leaves motor in free mode and resets

Quick stop
inverse

Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in

DC-brake
inverse

start function. Select both directions in

[11] Start
reversing

leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0

coasting stop.
[3]

frequency converter. Logic 0 coasting stop

and reset.
accordance with quick-stop ramp time set in

Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops

motor by energising it with a DC current for a

speed. See parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].

Brake Current to parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In

Speed [RPM]. The function is only active when
the value in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is
different from 0. Logic 0 DC braking.
Stop
inverse

Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop

function when the selected terminal goes from
logical level 1 to 0. The stop is performed
according to the selected ramp time
(parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time,

Shifts between external reference and preset

reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset
has been selected in parameter 3-04 Reference
Function. Logic '0' = external reference active;
logic '1' = one of the 8 preset references is
active.

certain time period. See parameter 2-01 DC

[6]

(Default Digital input 19). Change the direction

of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to
reverse. The reversing signal only changes the
direction of rotation. It does not activate the

[16] Preset ref

bit 0

Preset ref. bit 0,1, and 2 enables a choice

between one of the 8 preset references
according to Table 3.14.

[17] Preset ref

bit 1

Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].

[18] Preset ref

bit 2

Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].

parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,

parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time,
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time).

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

81

3 3

Preset ref. bit

Preset ref. 0

Preset ref. 1

Preset ref. 2

Preset ref. 3

Preset ref. 4

Preset ref. 5

Preset ref. 6

Preset ref. 7

Table 3.14 Preset Ref. Bit

[19] Freeze
ref

Freezes the actual reference, which is now the

point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the
speed change always follows ramp 2
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the
range 0 - parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.

[20] Freeze
output

[24] Set-up
select bit
1
[26] Precise
stop inv.

Sends an inverted stop signal when the precise

stop function is activated in

[27] Precise
Use when [0] Precise ramp stop is selected in
start, stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
Precise start, stop is available for terminals 18
and 19.
Precise start makes sure that the angle that the
rotor turns from standing still to reference is the
same for each start (for same ramp time, same
set-point). This is the equivalent to the precise
stop where the angle that the rotor turns from
reference to standing still is the same for each
stop.
When using parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function
option [1] or [2]:
The frequency converter needs a Precise Stop

Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is

now the point of enable/condition for Speed up
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2

signal before the value of parameter 1-84 Precise

parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the

Stop Counter Value is reached. If this is not

supplied, the frequency converter does not stop

range 0 - parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency.

when the value in parameter 1-84 Precise Stop

NOTICE

When Freeze output is active, the frequency

converter cannot be stopped via a low [8]
Start signal. Stop the frequency converter
via a terminal programmed for [2] Coasting
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inverse.
Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control
of the up/down speed is desired (motor potentiometer). Activate this function by selecting either
[19] Freeze ref or [20] Freeze output. When Speed
up/down is activated for less than 400 ms the
resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1 %.
If Speed up/down is activated for more than 400
ms the resulting reference follows the setting in
ramping up/down parameter 3-x1/3-x2.
Shut down

Catch up

Unchanged speed

Reduced by %-value

Increased by %-value

Reduced by %-value

Counter Value is reached.

Precise start, stop must be triggered by a Digital
Input and is available for terminals 18 and 19.
[28] Catch up

Increases reference value by percentage

(relative) set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow
Down Value.

[29] Slow
down

Reduces reference value by percentage (relative)

[30] Counter
input

Precise stop function in parameter 1-83 Precise

set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.

Stop Function acts as Counter stop or speed
compensated counter stop with or without
reset. The counter value must be set in
parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.

[31] Pulse
edge
triggered

Counts the number of pulse flanks per sample

time. This gives a higher resolution at high
frequencies, but is not as precise at lower
frequencies. Use this pulse principle for
encoders with very low resolution (e.g. 30 ppr).
Pulse
Sample time

Illustration 3.33 Pulse Flanks per Sample

Time

Table 3.15 Shut Down/Catch Up

[22] Speed
down

Same as [21] Speed up.

[23] Set-up
select bit
0

Select Set-up select bit 0 or Select Set-up select

82

select bit 0.

parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.

Precise stop inverse function is available for
terminals 18 or 19.

(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and

[21] Speed
up

(Default Digital input 32): Same as [23] Set-up

130BB463.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

bit 1 to select one of the 4 set-ups. Set

parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up.

[32] Pulse
time
based

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Measures the duration between pulse flanks.

This gives a higher resolution at lower
frequencies, but is not as precise at higher
frequencies. This principle has a cut-off
frequency which makes it unsuited for encoders

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

with very low resolutions (e.g. 30 ppr) at low

speeds.
Speed [rpm]

a Time[sec]

b Time[sec]

a: very low encoder

resolution

b: standard encoder
resolution

Read Timer:
20 timer tides

Read Timer:
20 timer tides

130BB464.10

Table 3.16
Pulse
Timer
Sample time
Time counter
Time Start

DigiPot
Clear

Clears the Digital Potentiometer reference

described in parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.
Meter

130BB462.10

Speed [rpm]

[57]

Illustration 3.34 Duration Between Pulse

Flanks

[60]

Counter A

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment

counting in the SLC counter.

[61]

Counter A

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement

counting in the SLC counter.

[62]

Reset
Counter A

Input for reset of counter A.

[63]

Counter B

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment

counting in the SLC counter.

[64]

Counter B

(Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement

counting in the SLC counter.

[65]

Reset
Counter B

Input for reset of counter B.

[70]

Mech. Brake Brake feedback for hoisting applications: Set

Feedback
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle to [3]
flux w/ motor feedback; set

[34] Ramp bit

0

Enables a choice between one of the 4 ramps

[35] Ramp bit

1

Same as Ramp bit 0.

available, according to Table 3.17.

Preset ramp bit

Ramp 1

Ramp 2

Ramp 3

Ramp 4

parameter 1-72 Start Function to [6] Hoist

mech brake Ref.
[71]

Mech. Brake Inverted brake feedback for hoisting

Feedback
applications
inv.

[72]

PID error
inverse

[73]

PID reset Ipart

Table 3.17 Preset Ramp Bit

[40]

Latched
Precise
Start

OL" or "Extended PID Speed CL".

When using for 1-83 Precise Stop Function [1]

[74]

PID enable

[41]

Latched
Precise
Stop
inverse

parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.

Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
"Extended PID Speed OL" or "Extended PID
Speed CL".
[80]

PTC Card 1

All Digital Inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card

1. However, only one Digital Input must be
set to this choice.

Sends a latched stop signal when the precise

stop function is activated in
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. The
Latched Precise stop inverse function is
available for terminals 18 or 19.

[91]

Profidrive
OFF2

The functionality is the same as the

according control word bit of the Profibus/
Profinet option.

[92]

Profidrive
OFF3

The functionality is the same as the

according control word bit of the Profibus/
Profinet option.

[98]

Start edge
triggered

Edge triggered start command. Keeps the

start command alive. It can be used for a
start push-button.

[51]

External
interlock

This function makes it possible to give an

external fault to the frequency converter. This
fault is treated in the same way as an
internally generated alarm.

[55]

DigiPot
Increase

INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer

DigiPot
Decrease

DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer

function described in parameter group 3-9*

Digital Pot. Meter

[56]

When enabled, enables the extended process

PID controller. Equivalent to

counter value of parameter 1-84 Precise Stop

Counter Value is reached.

When enabled, resets the I-part of the

Process PID controller. Equivalent to
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset.
Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
to "Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed

A latched Precise Start only requires a pulse

of 3 ms on T18 or T19.
Cnt stop with reset or [2] Cnt stop w/o reset:
When the reference is reached, the frequency
converter internally enables the Precise Stop
signal. This means that the frequency
converter does the Precise Stop when the

When enabled, it inverts the resulting error

from the process PID controller. Available
only if "Configuration Mode" is set to
"Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed OL"
or "Extended PID Speed CL".

[100] Safe Option

Reset

function described in parameter group 3-9*

Digital Pot. Meter

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

83

3 3

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input

5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:
converter. Functions are described under

[8] * Start Functions are described under parameter group 5-1*

5-1* Digital Inputs

Digital Inputs

5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input

5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop

Option:

Option:

Function:

[10] * Reversing Functions are described under parameter group

5-1* Digital Inputs

5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described under parameter

[1] Safe Stop

Alarm

Coasts frequency converter when safe stop is

activated. Manual reset from LCP, digital input
or fieldbus.

[3] Safe Stop

Warning

Coasts frequency converter when safe stop is

activated (T-37 off). When safe stop circuit is
reestablished, the frequency converter will
continue without manual reset.

[4] PTC 1 Alarm

Coasts frequency converter when Safe Torque

Off is activated. Manual reset from LCP, digital
input or fieldbus.

[5] PTC 1
Warning

Coasts frequency converter when Safe Torque

Off is activated (T-37 off). When Safe Torque
Off circuit is reestablished, the frequency
converter continues without manual reset,

group 5-1* Digital Inputs

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input

Option:

Function:
Select the function from the available digital input
range and the additional options [60], [61], [63] and
[64]. Counters are used in Smart Logic Control
functions.This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

[14] * Jog Functions are described under parameter group 5-1*

Digital Inputs

unless a Digital Input set to[80] PTC Card 1 is

still enabled.

5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input

Option:

Function:
Select the function from the available digital
input range.

[6] PTC 1 &

Relay A

This choice is used when the PTC option is

gated together with a Stop button through a
Safety relay to T-37. Coasts frequency
converter when safe stop is activated. Manual
reset from LCP, digital input or fieldbus.

[7] PTC 1 &

Relay W

This option is used when the PTC option is

gated together with a Stop button through a
Safety relay to T-37. Coasts frequency
converter when Safe Torque Off is activated
(T-37 off). When safe stop circuit is reestablished, the frequency converter continuea
without manual reset, unless a Digital Input

No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital Inputs

5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input

Option:

Function:
Select the function from the available digital
input range and the additional options [60],
[61], [63] and [64]. Counters are used in
Smart Logic Control functions.

[0] * No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital

set to [80] PTC Card 1 is (still) enabled.

Inputs

5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under

[8] PTC 1 &

Relay A/W

This option makes it possible to use a

combination of Alarm and Warning.

[9] PTC 1 &

Relay W/A

This option makes it possible to use a

combination of Alarm and Warning.

5-1* Digital Inputs

5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
5-1* Digital Inputs

5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency

84

Function:

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input

Options [4]-[9] are only available when the MCB 112 PTC
Thermistor Card is connected.

Option:

NOTICE
When Auto Reset/Warning is selected the frequency
converter opens up for automatic restart.

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input

Option:

Function

No.

PTC

Relay

No Function

[0]

Safe Stop Alarm

[1]*

Safe Stop [A68]

Safe Stop Warning

[3]

Safe Stop [W68]

PTC 1 Alarm

[4]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[A71]

PTC 1 Warning

[5]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[W71]

PTC 1 & Relay A

[6]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[A71]

Safe Stop [A68]

PTC 1 & Relay W

[7]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[W71]

Safe Stop [W68]

PTC 1 & Relay A/W

[8]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[A71]

Safe Stop [W68]

PTC 1 & Relay W/A

[9]

PTC 1 Safe Stop

[W71]

Safe Stop [A68]

Function:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

5-25 Terminal X46/11 Digital Input

Option:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input

Option:

W means warning and A means alarm. For further information, see

Alarms and Warnings in section Troubleshooting in the Design Guide
or the Operating Instructions

A dangerous failure related to Safe Torque Off issues

Alarm: Dangerous Failure [A72].
Refer to Table 5.1.

3.7.3 5-3* Digital Outputs

The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals
27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function
for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.

NOTICE

5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input

These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is

running.

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

[0]

No operation

Default for all digital outputs and relay

outputs

[1]

Control ready

The control card is ready. E.g.: Feedback

from a frequency converter where the
control is supplied by an external 24 V
(MCB 107) and the main power to the unit
is not detected.

[2]

Drive ready

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and applies a supply signal on
the control board.

[3]

Drive ready /
remote
control

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and is in [Auto On] mode.

[4]

Enable / no
warning

Ready for operation. No start or stop

command is been given (start/disable). No
warnings are active.

5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

Table 3.18 Overview of Functions, Alarms and Warnings

Option:

Function:

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

85

3 3

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

[5]

VLT running

Motor is running and shaft torque present.

[6]

Running / no
warning

Output speed is higher than the speed set

specified voltage range (see General

Specifications section in the Design Guide).
[25]

Reverse

The motor runs (or is ready to run)

clockwise when logic=0 and counter
clockwise when logic=1. The output
changes as soon as the reversing signal is
applied.

parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to

[26]

Bus OK

parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. There

are no warnings.

Active communication (no time-out) via

the serial communication port.

[27]

Torque limit
and stop

Use in performing a coasting stop and in

torque limit condition. If the frequency
converter has received a stop signal and is
at the torque limit, the signal is Logic 0.

in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at

Stop [RPM]. The motor is running and
there are no warnings.

[7]

Run in range / Motor is running within the programmed

no warning
current and speed ranges set in

[8]

Run on
Motor runs at reference speed. No
reference / no warnings.
warning

[9]

Alarm

An alarm activates the output. There are

no warnings.

[28]

Brake, no
Brake is active and there are no warnings.
brake warning

[10]

Alarm or
warning

An alarm or a warning activates the

output.

[29]

Brake ready,
no fault

Brake is ready for operation and there are

no faults.

[11]

At torque
limit

The torque limit set in

[30]

Brake fault
(IGBT)

Output is Logic 1 when the brake IGBT is

short-circuited. Use this function to protect
the frequency converter if there is a fault
on the brake modules. Use the output/
relay to cut out the main voltage from the
frequency converter.

[31]

Relay 123

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or

parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode has been exceeded.

[12]

Out of current The motor current is outside the range set

range
in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.

[13]

Below current, Motor current is lower than set in

low
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.

[14]

Above
current, high

parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.

[15]

Out of range

Output frequency is outside the frequency

Communications and Options.

Motor current is higher than set in

[32]

Mechanical
brake control

group 2-2* Mechanical Brake

Low and parameter 4-53 Warning Speed

[16]
[17]
[18]

[19]
[20]
[21]

[22]

[23]

[24]

86

Below speed,
low

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low.

Above speed,
high

parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[33]

Safe stop
activated (FC
302 only)

Indicates that the Safe Torque Off on

terminal 37 has been activated.

[40]

Out of ref

Active when the actual speed is outside

Output speed is lower than the setting in

Output speed is higher than the setting in

Out of
feedback
range

Feedback is outside the range set in

Below
feedback low

Feedback is below the limit set in

Enables control of an external mechanical

brake, see description in the section
Control of Mechanical Brake, and parameter

range set in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed

High.

Relay is activated when Control Word [0] is

selected in parameter group 8-**

range

settings in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed

Low to parameter 4-55 Warning Reference
High.

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and

[41]

Below
reference low

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.

[42]

Above
Feedback is above the limit set in
feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.

Above
Active when actual speed is above speed
reference high reference setting

[43]

Thermal
warning

Extended PID
Limit

[45]

Bus Ctrl

parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.

The thermal warning turns on when the

temperature exceeds the limit in the
motor, the frequency converter, the brake
resistor, or the thermistor.

Ready, no
thermal
warning

Frequency converter is ready for operation

and there is no over-temperature warning.

Remote,
ready, no
thermal
warning

Frequency converter is ready for operation

and is in [Auto On] mode. There is no
over-temperature warning.

Ready, no
over-/ under
voltage

Frequency converter is ready for operation

and the mains voltage is within the

Active when actual speed is below speed

reference setting.

Controls output via bus. The state of the

output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
Relay Bus Control. The output state is
retained in the event of bus time-out.

[46]

Bus Ctrl On at
timeout

Controls output via bus. The state of the

output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus timeout the output state is set high (On).

[47]

Bus Ctrl Off at Controls output via bus. The state of the
timeout
output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus timeout the output state is set low (Off).

Parameter Descriptions

[51]

MCO
controlled

[55]

Pulse output

[60]

Comparator 0

[61]

[62]

[63]

Comparator 1

Comparator 2

Comparator 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305 is

connected. The output is controlled from
option.

the Smart Logic Action [34] Set dig. out. C

low is executed.
[83]

SL Digital
Output D

Logic Action [41] Set dig. out. D high is

executed. The input goes low whenever

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If
Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

the Smart Logic Action [35] Set dig. out. D

low is executed.
[84]

SL Digital
Output E

Logic Action [42] Set dig. out. E high is

executed. The input goes low whenever

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

low is executed.

the Smart Logic Action [36] Set dig. out. E

[85]

SL Digital
Output F

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[65]

Comparator 5

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[90]

[70]

Logic Rule 0

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[120] Local reference active

[71]

Logic Rule 1

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[72]

Logic Rule 2

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[73]

Logic Rule 3

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[74]

Logic Rule 4

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[80]

SL Digital
Output A

the Smart Logic Action [37] Set dig. out. F

low is executed.
kWh counter
pulse

Reference site
set in
parameter 3-13
Reference Site
Reference site:

Hand

Hand off

Auto off

Auto

Remote
parameter 3-13 Ref
erence Site [1]
Reference site:
Linked to Hand/
Auto

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

Logic Action [40] Set dig. out. C high is

executed. The input goes low whenever

Reference site:

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The output goes high whenever the Smart

low is executed.

parameter 3-13 Ref

erence Site [2]

See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If

Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

Local
Remote
referen reference
ce
active
active
[121]
[120]

Local

Table 3.19 Local Reference Active

the Smart Logic Action [33] Set dig. out. B

SL Digital
Output C

parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local or

Linked to hand auto at the same time as
the LCP is in Hand On mode.

Logic Action [39] Set dig. out. B high is

executed. The input goes low whenever

[82]

Output is high when

when parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [0]

the Smart Logic Action[32] Set dig. out. A

low is executed.
SL Digital
Output B

Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse width) to

output terminal whenever kWh counter
changes (15-02 kWh Counter).

Logic Action [38] Set dig. out. A high is

executed. The output goes low whenever

[81]

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart
Logic Action [43] Set dig. out. F high is
executed. The input goes low whenever

Comparator 4

Logic Rule 5

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If

Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.

[64]

[75]

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.

The input goes high whenever the Smart

[121] Remote
reference
active

Output is high when

[122] No alarm

Output is high when no alarm is present.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [1] Remote

or [0] Linked to hand/auto while the LCP is
in Auto on mode. See above.

87

3 3

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

[123] Start
command
active

Output is high when there is an active

Start command (i.e. via digital input bus
connection or Hand on or Auto on), and
no Stop or Start command is active.

[124] Running
reverse

Output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise (the
logical product of the status bits running
AND reverse).

[125] Drive in hand

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in Hand On mode (as
indicated by the LED light above [Hand
on]).

[126] Drive in auto

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in Hand On mode (as
indicated by the LED light above Auto On).

[151] ATEX ETR cur.

alarm

5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter

group 5-3* Digital Outputs

5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output

Option:

Function:

[0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter

group 5-3* Digital Outputs
This parameter is applicable for FC 302 only

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option:
[0]

No operation

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
Advanced ETR. If the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1.

[152] ATEX ETR

freq. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

under parameter group 5-3*

Digital Outputs
[1]

Control Ready

Advanced ETR. If the alarm 166 ATEX ETR

freq.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1.

[2]

Drive ready

[3]

Drive rdy/rem ctrl

Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]

Selectable, ifparameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

[4]

Enable / no warning

Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]

[5]

Running

Advanced ETR. If the alarm 163 ATEX ETR

cur.lim.warning is active, the output is 1.

[6]

Running / no warning

[7]

Run in range/no warn

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

[8]

Run on ref/no warn

Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]

[9]

Alarm

Advanced ETR. If the warning 165 ATEX ETR

freq.lim.warning is active, the output is 1.

[10]

Alarm or warning

[11]

At torque limit

[188] AHF Capacitor The capacitors are turned on at 20%

Connect
(hysteresis of 50% gives an interval of 10%
- 30%). The capacitors are disconnected

[12]

Out of current range

[13]

Below current, low

[14]

Above current, high

[15]

Out of speed range

[16]

Below speed, low

[17]

Above speed, high

[18]

Out of feedb. range

[19]

Below feedback, low

[20]

Above feedback, high

[21]

Thermal warning

[22]

Ready,no thermal W

[23]

Remote,ready,no TW

[153] ATEX ETR cur.

warning

[154] ATEX ETR

freq. warning

below 10%. The off delay is 10 s and

restarts if the nominal power goes above
10% during the delay. Parameter 5-80 AHF
Cap Reconnect Delay is used to guarantee a
minimum off-time for the capacitors.
[189] External fan
control

The internal logics for the internal fan

control is transferred to this output to
make it possible to control an external fan
(relevant for HP duct cooling).

[190] Safe Function

active
[191] Safe Opt.
Reset req.

[24]

Ready, Voltage OK

[25]

Reverse

[26]

Bus OK

[192] RS Flipflop 0

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[27]

Torque limit & stop

[193] RS Flipflop 1

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[28]

Brake, no brake war

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[29]

Brake ready, no fault

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

[196] RS Flipflop 4

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[31]

Relay 123

[197] RS Flipflop 5

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[32]

Mech brake ctrl

[198] RS Flipflop 6

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[33]

Safe stop active

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[38]

Motor feedback error

[39]

Tracking error

[40]

Out of ref range

[194] RS Flipflop 2
[195] RS Flipflop 3

[199] RS Flipflop 7

88

Function:
This parameter is active when
option module MCB 101 is
mounted in the frequency
converter. Functions are described

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option:

Option:

[41]

Below reference, low

[42]

Above ref, high

[43]

Extended PID Limit

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[46]

Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout

[47]

Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

Function:

[199] RS Flipflop 7

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option:
[0]

No operation

[55]

Pulse output

[60]

Comparator 0

[61]

Comparator 1

[62]

Comparator 2

[1]

Control Ready

Comparator 3

[2]

Drive ready

[64]

Comparator 4

[3]

Drive rdy/rem ctrl

[65]

Comparator 5

[4]

Enable / no warning

[70]

Logic rule 0

[5]

Running

[71]

Logic rule 1

[6]

Running / no warning

[72]

Logic rule 2

[7]

Run in range/no warn

[73]

Logic rule 3

[8]

Run on ref/no warn

[74]

Logic rule 4

[9]

Alarm

[75]

Logic rule 5

[10]

Alarm or warning

[80]

SL digital output A

[11]

At torque limit

[81]

SL digital output B

[12]

Out of current range

SL digital output C

[13]

Below current, low

SL digital output D

[14]

Above current, high

Out of speed range

[63]

[82]
[83]
[84]

SL digital output E

[15]

SL digital output F

[16]

Below speed, low

[90]

kWh counter pulse

[17]

Above speed, high

[121] Remote ref active

[122] No alarm
[123] Start command activ
[124] Running reverse
[125] Drive in hand mode
[126] Drive in auto mode
[151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[188] AHF Capacitor Connect
[189] External Fan Control
[190] Safe Function active
[191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[192] RS Flipflop 0
[193] RS Flipflop 1
[194] RS Flipflop 2
[195] RS Flipflop 3
[196] RS Flipflop 4
[197] RS Flipflop 5
[198] RS Flipflop 6

Function:
This parameter is active when
option module option module
MCB 101 is mounted in the
frequency converter. Functions are
described under parameter group
5-3* Digital Outputs

[85]

[120] Local ref active

Function:

Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse

width) to output terminal
whenever kWh counter changes

[18]

Out of feedb. range

[19]

Below feedback, low

(15-02 kWh Counter).

[20]

Above feedback, high

[21]

Thermal warning

[22]

Ready,no thermal W

[23]

Remote,ready,no TW

[24]

Ready, Voltage OK

[25]

Reverse

[26]

Bus OK

[27]

Torque limit & stop

[28]

Brake, no brake war

[29]

Brake ready, no fault

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

[31]

Relay 123

[32]

Mech brake ctrl

[33]

Safe stop active

[39]

Tracking error

[40]

Out of ref range

[41]

Below reference, low

[42]

Above ref, high

[43]

Extended PID Limit

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[46]

Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout

[47]

Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

89

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

Option:

Function:

3.7.4 5-4* Relays

Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
functions for the relays.

[60]

Comparator 0

[61]

Comparator 1

[62]

Comparator 2

5-40 Function Relay

[63]

Comparator 3

[64]

Comparator 4

[65]

Comparator 5

[70]

Logic rule 0

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

[71]

Logic rule 1

[72]

Logic rule 2

[73]

Logic rule 3

[74]

Logic rule 4

[75]

Logic rule 5

[80]

SL digital output A

[81]

SL digital output B

[82]

SL digital output C

[83]

SL digital output D

[84]

SL digital output E

[85]

SL digital output F

Option:
No operation

All digital and relay outputs are

default set to No Operation.

[1]

Control Ready

The control card is ready. E.g.:

Feedback from a frequency converter
where the control is supplied by an
external 24 V (MCB 107) and the main
power to frequency converter is not
detected.

[2]

Drive ready

Frequency converter is ready to

operate. Mains and control supplies
are OK.

[3]

Drive rdy/rem ctrl

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and is in Auto On mode

[4]

Enable / no
warning

Ready for operation. No start or stop

commands have been applied (start/
disable). No warnings are active.

[5]

Running

Motor is running, and shaft torque

present.

[6]

Running / no
warning

Output speed is higher than the

[120] Local ref active

[121] Remote ref active
[122] No alarm
[123] Start command activ
[124] Running reverse
[125] Drive in hand mode
[126] Drive in auto mode
[151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm
[152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm
[153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[189] External Fan Control
[191] Safe Opt. Reset req.
[193] RS Flipflop 1

[7]

[194] RS Flipflop 2

Run in range/no
warn

Current Low and

[196] RS Flipflop 4

parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

No warnings.

[197] RS Flipflop 5
[199] RS Flipflop 7

Motor is running within the

programmed current and speed
ranges set in parameter 4-50 Warning

[195] RS Flipflop 3

[198] RS Flipflop 6

speed set in 1-81 Min Speed for

Function at Stop [RPM] Min Speed for
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is
running and no warnings.

[190] Safe Function active

[192] RS Flipflop 0

Function:

[0]

[8]

Run on ref/no
warn

Motor runs at reference speed. No

warnings.

[9]

Alarm

An alarm activates the output. No

warnings

[10]

Alarm or warning

An alarm or a warning activates the

output.

[11]

At torque limit

The torque limit set in

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor
Mode or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit
Generator Mode has been exceeded.

90

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-40 Function Relay

5-40 Function Relay

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Option:

Option:

[12]

Out of current
range

Function:
range set in parameter 4-18 Current
Limit.

[13]

Below current, low

[14]
[15]

Above current,
high
Out of speed
range

Torque limit &

stop

Use in performing a coasted stop and

frequency converter in torque limit
condition. If the frequency converter
has received a stop signal and is in
torque limit, the signal is Logic 0.

[28]

Brake, no brake
war

Brake is active and there are no

warnings.

[29]

Brake ready, no
fault

Brake is ready for operation and there

are no faults.

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

Output is Logic 1 when the brake

IGBT is short-circuited. Use this
function to protect the frequency
converter, if there is a fault on the
brake module. Use the digital output/
relay to cut out the main voltage from
the frequency converter.

[31]

Relay 123

Digital output/relay is activated when

Output speed/frequency is outside the

Output speed is lower than the

Speed Low

Above speed, high

[27]

frequency range set in

setting in parameter 4-52 Warning

[17]

Active communication (no time-out)

via the serial communication port.

parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.

High.
Below speed, low

Bus OK

Motor current is higher than set in

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low

and parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
[16]

[26]

Motor current is lower than set in

parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.

Output speed is higher than the

setting in parameter 4-53 Warning
Speed High.

[18]

Out of feedb.
range

Feedback is outside the range set in

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback

[0] Control Word is selected in

High.
[19]
[20]

Function:
changes as soon as the reversing
signal is applied.

The motor current is outside the

Below feedback,
low

Feedback is below the limit set in

Above feedback,
high

Feedback is above the limit set in

parameter group 8-** Comm. and

Options.

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.

[32]

Mech brake ctrl

parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.

Selection of mechanical brake control.

When selected parameters in
parameter group 2-2* Mechanical

[21]

Thermal warning

Thermal warning turns on when the

temperature exceeds the limit either
in motor, frequency converter, brake
resistor, or connected thermistor.

[22]

Ready,no thermal
W

Frequency converter is ready for

operation and there is no overtemperature warning.

[33]

Safe stop active

Remote,ready,no
TW

Frequency converter is ready for

operation and is in Auto On mode.
There is no over-temperature warning.

(FC 302 only) Indicates that the Safe

Torque Off on terminal 37 has been
activated.

[36]

Control word bit

11

Ready, Voltage OK

Frequency converter is ready for

operation and the mains voltage is
within the specified voltage range

Activate relay 1 by control word from

fieldbus. No other functional impact in
the frequency converter. Typical
application: controlling auxiliary
device from fieldbus. The function is

[23]

[24]

Brake are active. The output must be

reinforced to carry the current for the
coil in the brake. Usually, solved by
connecting an external relay to the
selected digital output.

valid when [0] FC profile in

(see General Specifications section in

parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is

selected.

Design Guide).
[25]

Reverse

The motor runs (or is ready to run)

clockwise when logic=0 and counter
clockwise when logic=1. The output

[37]

Control word bit

12

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Activate relay 2 (FC 302 only) by

control word from fieldbus. No other
functional impact in the frequency
converter. Typical application:

91

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-40 Function Relay

5-40 Function Relay

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Option:

Function:

Option:

controlling auxiliary device from

[61]

Comparator 1

fieldbus. The function is valid when [0]

Comparators. If Comparator 1 in SLC is

TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

FC profile in parameter 8-10 Control

Word Profile is selected.
[38]

[39]

Motor feedback
error

Tracking error

Failure in the speed feedback loop

from motor running in closed loop.
The output can eventually be used to
prepare switching the frequency
converter in open loop in emergency
case.

[62]

Comparator 2

[63]

Comparator 3

Out of ref range

[64]

Comparator 4

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low to

[65]

Comparator 5

Below reference,
low

Active when actual speed is below

speed reference setting.

[42]

Above ref, high

Active when actual speed is above

speed reference setting.

[43]

Extended PID Limit

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[70]

Logic rule 0

[71]

Logic rule 1

Bus ctrl, 1 if
timeout

[47]

Bus ctrl, 0 if
timeout

[60]

MCO controlled

Comparator 0

Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305

is connected. The output is controlled
from option.

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 2 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

[73]

Logic rule 3

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 3 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

Controls output via bus. The state of

the output is set in

[74]

Logic rule 4

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 4 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

[75]

Logic rule 5

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 5 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators. If Comparator 0 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

92

Logic rule 2

the output is set in

parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus

Control. In the event of bus time-out,
the output state is set low (Off).
[51]

[72]

Controls output via bus. The state of

parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. In the event of bus time-out,
the output state is set high (On).

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 1 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

The state of the output is set in

[46]

See parameter group 13-4* Smart

Logic Control. If Logic Rule 0 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

Controls digital output/relay via bus.

parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. The output state is retained in
the event of bus time-out.

See parameter group 13-1* Smart

Logic Control. If Comparator 5 in SLC
is TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

parameter 4-55 Warning Reference

High.
[41]

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators. If Comparator 4 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

Active when the actual speed is

outside settings in

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators. If Comparator 3 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

calculated speed and actual speed in

[40]

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators. If Comparator 2 in SLC is
TRUE, the output goes high.
Otherwise, it is low.

When the difference between

parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is larger
than selected the digital output/relay
is active.

Function:
See parameter group 13-1*

[80]

SL digital output A See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Action. Output A is low on Smart

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-40 Function Relay

5-40 Function Relay

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Option:

Option:

Function:
Logic Action [32]. Output A is high on
Smart Logic Action [38].

[81]

SL digital output B See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

Action. Output B is low on Smart
Logic Action [33]. Output B is high on

Reference site:
Remote
3-13 Reference
Site [1]

Hand

Action [36]. Output E is high on Smart

Hand off

Logic Action [42].

Auto off

Auto

SL digital output C See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

Action. Output C is low on Smart
Logic Action [34]. Output C is high on
Smart Logic Action [40].

[83]

SL digital output D See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

Action. Output D is low on Smart
Logic Action [35]. Output D is high on

Reference site:
Linked to Hand/
Auto

Smart Logic Action [41].

[84]

SL digital output E

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

Action. Output E is low on Smart Logic

[85]

SL digital output F

See parameter 13-52 SL Controller

Action. Output F is low on Smart Logic

Table 3.20 Local Reference Active

Action [37]. Output F is high on Smart

Logic Action [43].
[120] Local ref active

Local
Remote
referen reference
ce
active
active
[121]
[120]

Reference site:
Local
3-13 Reference
Site [2]

Smart Logic Action [39].

[82]

Function:
Reference site
set in
3-13 Reference
Site

[121] Remote ref active

Output is high when 3-13 Reference

Output is high when 3-13 Reference

Site = [1] Remote or [0] Linked to hand/

Site = [2] Local or when 3-13 Reference

auto while the LCP is in Auto On

mode. See above.

Site = [0] Linked to hand auto at the

same time as the LCP is in Hand On
mode.

[122] No alarm

Output is high when no alarm is

present.

[123] Start command

activ

Output is high when the Start

command high (i.e. via digital input,
bus connection or [Hand On] or [Auto
On] ), and a Stop has been last
command.

[124] Running reverse

Output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
running AND reverse).

[125] Drive in hand

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in [Hand on] mode (as
indicated by the LED light above
[Hand on]).

[126] Drive in auto

mode

Output is high when the frequency

converter is in Auto mode (as
indicated by LED on above [Auto
on] ).

[151] ATEX ETR cur.

alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

93

3 3

5-40 Function Relay

5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))

Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
[4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])

Option:

Range:

Function:
during the specified time. Select one of
available mechanical relays and Relay
Option MCB 105 in an array function. See

Function:
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active,
the output is 1.

5-40 Function Relay. Relay 3-6 are

included in Extended Relay Card MCB
113.

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[152] ATEX ETR freq.

alarm

ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm

166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active,
the output is 1.
Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[153] ATEX ETR cur.

warning

130BA171.10

Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

Selected
Event
Relay
output

Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is
active, the output is 1.
Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[154] ATEX ETR freq.

warning

Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX

ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the
warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the output
is 1.

[188] AHF Capacitor

Connect
[189] External Fan
Control

The internal logics for the internal fan

control is transferred to this output to
make it possible to control an external
fan (relevant for HP duct cooling).

On Delay
P 5-41
Selected
Event
Relay
output
On Delay
P 5-41

Illustration 3.35 On Delay, Relay

5-42 Off Delay, Relay

Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]

Range:
0.01 s*

[190] Safe Function

active

Off Delay
P 5-42

Function:
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time.
Select one of available mechanical relays
and MCB 105 in an array function. See

[191] Safe Opt. Reset

req.

5-40 Function Relay.

[192] RS Flipflop 0

See 13-1* Comparators.

[193] RS Flipflop 1

See 13-1* Comparators

[194] RS Flipflop 2

See 13-1* Comparators

[195] RS Flipflop 3

See 13-1* Comparators

[196] RS Flipflop 4

See 13-1* Comparators

[197] RS Flipflop 5

See 13-1* Comparators

[198] RS Flipflop 6

See 13-1* Comparators

[199] RS Flipflop 7

See 13-1* Comparators.

130BA172.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Selected
Event

Relay
output
On Delay
P 5-41

Off Delay
P 5-42

Illustration 3.36 Off Delay, Relay

5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
[4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])

Range:
0.01 s*

If the selected Event condition changes before the on- or

off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.

Function:
[0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
The relay only cuts in if the condition in
5-40 Function Relay is uninterrupted

94

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.7.5 5-5* Pulse Input

5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

130BA076.10

The pulse input parameters are used to define an

appropriate window for the impulse reference area by
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
inputs. Set terminal 29 (5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input) or
terminal 33 (5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) to [32] Pulse
input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, set
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode to [0] Input.
Ref.
(RPM)
High
ref.
value
P 5-53/
p 5-58

Range:

Function:
(parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
Mode = [0] input (default)
and 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
Input = applicable value).
This parameter is available
for FC 302 only.

5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the high reference value

[RPM] for the motor shaft speed
and the high feedback value, see
also parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High
Ref./Feedb. Value. Select terminal
29 as a digital input
(parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode

Low
ref.
value
P 5-52/
p 5-57

= [0] input (default) and

Low freq.
P 5-50/
P 5-55

High freq.
P 5-51/
P 5-56

5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input =

applicable value).
This parameter is available for FC
302 only.

Input
(Hz)

Illustration 3.37 Pulse Input

5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range:

5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency

Range:
100
Hz*

Function:
[0 110000 Hz]

Enter the low frequency limit

corresponding to the low motor shaft

100
ms*

Function:
[1 - 1000
ms]

speed (i.e. low reference value) in

parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. Refer to Illustration 3.37.
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency

5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency

Range:
100
Hz*

Range:

Function:
[0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit
Hz]
corresponding to the high motor shaft

100 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]

parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.

Value.
This parameter is available for FC 302
only.

33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency

Range:
100 Hz*

5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

Function:
[0 - 110000
Hz]

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the low reference

value limit for the motor
shaft speed [RPM]. This is
also the lowest feedback
value, see also
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low
Ref./Feedb. Value. Set
terminal 29 to digital input

Enter the low frequency corresponding

to the low motor shaft speed (i.e. low
reference value) in parameter 5-57 Term.

speed (i.e. high reference value) in

Range:

Enter the pulse filter time constant. The

pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
feedback signal, which is an advantage, if
there is a lot of noise in the system. A high
time constant value results in better
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

Enter the high frequency

corresponding to the high motor shaft
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Enter the low reference value [RPM]
for the motor shaft speed. This is also
the low feedback value, see also
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

95

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.7.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
Size
related*

3 3

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the high reference value

[RPM] for the motor shaft
speed. See also
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High
Ref./Feedb. Value.

5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33

Range:
100 ms*

Function:
[1 - 1000
ms]

Enter the pulse filter time constant. The

low-pass filter reduces the influence on
and dampens oscillations on the feedback
signal from the control.
This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a
great amount on noise in the system.

NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.
These parameters are to configure pulse outputs with their
functions and scaling. Terminal 27 and 29 are allocated to
pulse output via parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode, respectively.
Output value

130BA089.11

Parameter Descriptions

High output
value
P 5-60(term27)
P 5-63(term29)

High freq.
P 5-62(term27)
P 5-65(term29)

Output
(Hz)

Illustration 3.38 Configuration of Pulse Outputs

Options for readout output variables:

Parameters for configuring the scaling
and output functions of pulse
outputs. The pulse outputs are
designated to terminals 27 or 29.
Select terminal 27 output in
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
terminal 29 output in
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
[0]

No operation

[45]

Bus control

[48]

Bus control timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

[100] Output frequency

[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor current
[104] Torque relative to
limit
[105] Torque relative to
rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq

96

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable

5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable

Option:

Select the variable for read-out on terminal X30/6.

This parameter is active when option module MCB 101 is
installed in the frequency converter.

Function:

[0]

No operation

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

Select the desired display output for

terminal 27.

Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse

Option:

Function:

[0]

No operation

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

[100]

Output frequency

[101]

Reference

[102]

Feedback

[103]

Motor Current

[104]

Torque rel to limit

[105]

Torq relate to rated

[106]

Power

[107]

Speed

5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27

[108]

Torque

Range:

[109]

Max Out Freq

[119]

Torque % lim

[100] Output frequency

[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq
[119] Torque % lim

Function:

Size
related*

[0 - 32000
Hz]

3 3

Outputs.

Set the maximum frequency for

terminal 27, corresponding to the
output variable selected in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse
Output Variable.

5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 - 32000
Hz]

Select the maximum frequency on

terminal X30/6 referring to the output

5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable

variable in 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse

Option:

Output Variable.
This parameter is active when option

Function:

[0]

No operation

[45]

Bus ctrl.

[48]

Bus ctrl., timeout

[51]

MCO controlled

Select the desired display output for

terminal 29. This parameter is
available for FC 302 only.

module MCB 101 is mounted in the

frequency converter.

3.7.7 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input

Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC supply),
terminal 32 (Channel A), terminal 33 (Channel B), and
terminal 20 (GND). The digital inputs 32/33 are active for
encoder inputs when [1] 24 V encoder is selected in
parameter 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source and
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. The encoder
used is a dual channel (A and B) 24 V type. Max input
frequency: 110 kHz.

[100] Output frequency

[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor Current
[104] Torque rel to limit
[105] Torq relate to rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque

Encoder Connection to the frequency converter

24 V incremental encoder. Max. cable length 5 m.

[109] Max Out Freq

[119] Torque % lim

5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29

Range:
5000 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 32000 Hz] Set the maximum frequency for
terminal 29 corresponding to the
output variable set in 5-63 Terminal 29
Pulse Output Variable.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

97

18

19

27

29

32

33

20

37

130BA090.11

13

+24V DC
12

GND

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction

Option:

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

3 3

Change the detected encoder rotation

direction without changing the wiring to the
encoder.
[0] * Clockwise

Sets channel A 90 (electrical degrees)

behind channel B upon clockwise rotation of
the encoder shaft.

[1]

Sets channel A 90 (electrical degrees) ahead

of channel B upon clockwise rotation of the
encoder shaft.

Counter
clockwise

3.7.8 5-8* I/O Options

5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay
Range:
25 s*

[1 - 120
s]

24V or 10-30V encoder

CW
A

130BA646.10

Illustration 3.39 Encoder Connection

Function:
Guarantees a minimum off-time for the
capacitors. The timer starts once the AHF
capacitor disconnects and needs to expire
before the output is allowed to be on again. It
will only turn on again if the drive power is
between 20% and 30%.

3.7.9 5-9* Bus Controlled

This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via
a fieldbus setting.
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control
Range:
0*

CCW
A

[0 - 2147483647 ] This parameter holds the state of the

digital outputs and relays that is
controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is
high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is
low or inactive.

Illustration 3.40 Encoder Rotation Direction

5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution

Range:
1024*

98

Function:

Function:
[1 - 4096 ] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the
encoder.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Bit 0

Digital Output Terminal 27

5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

Bit 1

Digital Output Terminal 29

Bit 2

Digital Output Terminal X 30/6

Range:

Bit 3

Digital Output Terminal X 30/7

Bit 4

Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 5

Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 6

Option B Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 7

Option B Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 8

Option B Relay 3 output terminal

5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

Bit 9-15

Reserved for future terminals

Range:

Bit 16

Option C Relay 1 output terminal

Bit 17

Option C Relay 2 output terminal

Bit 18

Option C Relay 3 output terminal

configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in

Bit 19

Option C Relay 4 output terminal

Bit 20

Option C Relay 5 output terminal

parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output

Variable. And a time-out is detected.

Bit 21

Option C Relay 6 output terminal

Bit 22

Option C Relay 7 output terminal

Bit 23

Option C Relay 8 output terminal

Bit 24-31

Reserved for future terminals

0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus ctrl. in

3 3

parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output

Variable.

0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is

Table 3.21 Bus-controlled Digital Outputs and Relays

5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.

5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
and a time-out is detected.

5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Set the output frequency transferred to the
output terminal 29 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output
Variable.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.

5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to the

%]
output terminal 29 when the terminal is
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable.
And a time-out is detected.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

99

3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option:

3.8.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode

Function:

[21] Coast and

trip

The analog inputs can freely be allocated to be either

voltage (FC 301: 0..10 V, FC 302: 0.. 10 V) or current (FC
301/FC 302: 0/4..20 mA) input.

3.8.2 6-1* Analog Input 1

NOTICE

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog input 1 (terminal 53).

Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a

digital input.

Par 6-xx
1500
'High Ref./
Feedb. Value'
1200

6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time

Range:
10 s*

[1 99 s]

Ref./Feedback
[RPM]

130BT103.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

Function:
Enter the Live Zero Time-out time period. Live
Zero Time-out Time is active for analog inputs,
i.e. terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference
or feedback sources. If the reference signal value
associated with the selected current input falls
below 50% of the value set in 6-10 Terminal 53

900
600
300
Par 6-xx
'Low Ref./
150
Feedb. Value'
Ex.

Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,

6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or 6-22 Terminal 54
Low Current for a time period longer than the
time set in parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time,

5V

1V

Par 6-xx
'Low Voltage'or
'Low Current'

Par 6-xx
'High Voltage'or
'High Current'

10 V
Analog input

Illustration 3.41 Analog Input 1

the function selected in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Function is activated.

6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage

Range:

6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function

Option:

0.07 V*

Function:

Function:
[ -10.00 par. 6-11 V]

Select the time-out function. The function set

the minimum reference value, set in

in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is

activated, if the input signal on terminal 53 or

parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value. See also the section Reference

54 is below 50% of the value in

Handling.

parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,

parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a
time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero

6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage

Range:
10 V*

Timeout Time. If several time-outs occur

simultaneously, the frequency converter
prioritises the time-out functions as follows:
1.

Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Function

2.

Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout

Function

[0] * Off

Enter the low voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to

Function:

[ par. 6-10 10 V]

Enter the high voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to
the high reference/feedback value set in
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current

Range:
0.14
mA*

Function:
[0 Enter the low current value. This reference
par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the minimum
mA]
reference value, set in

[1]

Freeze
output

Frozen at the present value

[2]

Stop

Overruled to stop

Live Zero Time-out Function in

[3]

Jogging

Overruled to jog speed

parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

[4]

Max. speed Overruled to max. speed

[5]

Stop and
trip

parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value

must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the

Overruled to stop with subsequent trip

[20] Coast
100

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current

6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

Range:

Range:

20 mA*

Function:
[ par. 6-12 20 mA]

feedback set in 6-15 Terminal 53 High

Enter the high voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to
the high reference/feedback value set in

Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.

Enter the high current value

corresponding to the high reference/

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-20 10 V]

6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current

Range:

Range:

0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the analog input scaling value

that corresponds to the low
voltage/low current set in

0.14
mA*

Function:
[0 Enter the low current value. This reference
par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the minimum
mA]
reference value, set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value
must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the

6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and

6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current.

Live Zero Time-out Function in

6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
Size
related*

parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the analog input scaling

value that corresponds to the
maximum reference feedback

Enter the high current value

corresponding to the high reference/
feedback value set in 6-25 Terminal 54

Voltage and

High Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

Function:
[0.001 10 s]

Function:
[ par. 6-22 20 mA]

parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High

6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Range:
20 mA*

value set in

parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High

Current.

0.001 s*

6-23 Terminal 54 High Current

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
53. A high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

Function:

0 ReferenceFeed[-999999.999 backUnit*
999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the analog input

scaling value that
corresponds to the
minimum reference
feedback value set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference.

6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
Size
related*

3.8.3 6-2* Analog Input 2

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Enter the analog input scaling

value that corresponds to the
maximum reference feedback
value set in
parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference.

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog input 2 (terminal 54).
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage
Range:
0.07 V*

Function:
[ -10.00 par. 6-21 V]

Enter the low voltage value. This analog

input scaling value should correspond to
the minimum reference value, set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. See
also chapter 3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/
Ramps.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

101

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Range:

0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 10 s]

3 3

Function:

NOTICE

A first-order digital low pass filter time

constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/11.

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.
Enter the time constant. This is a firstorder digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
54. A high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time
delay through the filter.

3.8.5 6-4* Analog Input 4 MCB 101

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option module MCB
101.
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
Range:

3.8.4 6-3* Analog Input 3 MCB 101

0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-41 V]

Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for

analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option module MCB
101.

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low reference/feedback
value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
Low Ref./Feedb. Value.

6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage

6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

Range:

Range:

0.07 V*

Function:
[ 0 - par.
6-31 V]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low reference/feedback

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-40 10 V]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high reference/feedback
value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12

value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11

High Ref./Feedb. Value.

Low Ref./Feedb. Value).

6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:

Range:

10 V*

Function:

[ par. 6-30 10 V]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high reference/feedback

0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

in parameter 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low

value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11

Voltage.

High Ref./Feedb. Value).

6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value

6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Range:

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the low voltage value

100 *

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

High Voltage.

Low Voltage).

6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value

100 *

Range:

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high voltage value

0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 10 s]

(set in parameter 6-31 Terminal X30/11

High Voltage).

Range:

Function:
[0.001 - 10 s]

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

102

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
A first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/12.

6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s*

Sets the analog input scaling value to

correspond to the high voltage value
set in parameter 6-41 Terminal X30/12

(set in parameter 6-30 Terminal X30/11

Range:

Sets the analog output scaling value to

correspond to the low voltage value set

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.8.6 6-5* Analog Output 1

6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

analog output 1, i.e. Terminal 42. Analog outputs are
current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Common terminal (terminal
39) is the same terminal and has the same electrical
potential for analog common and digital common
connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input
Option:

Range:
0 %*

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by

bus.

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of Output 42.

In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
function is selected in 6-50 Terminal 42
Output, the output is preset to this level.

6-55 Analog Output Filter

Option:

5-1* Digital Inputs

selection in 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter

Function:

[0 - 200
%]

Function:
The following readout analog parameters from

6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

Range:

3 3

6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset

Function:

[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module

MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under

0 %*

Function:

selected when parameter 6-55 Analog Output Filter is

on:

Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA) of

the analog signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the full

Selection

range of the variable selected in 6-50 Terminal

42 Output.

0-20 mA

4-20 mA

Motor current (0 - Imax)

[103]

[133]
[134]

Torque limit (0 - Tlim)

[104]

Rated torque (0 - Tnom)

[105]

[135]

6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

Power (0 - Pnom)

[106]

[136]

Range:

Speed (0 - Speedmax)

[107]

[137]

100
%*

Function:

[0 Scale the maximum output of the selected

200 %] analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to the
maximum value of the current signal output.
Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below
100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
the desired output current at a value between 0
- 100% of the full-scale output, programme the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20
mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired
at maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows:

20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%

i . e . 10 mA :

Table 3.22 Readout Analog Parameters

[0] * Off

Filter off

[1]

Filter on

On

3.8.7 6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101

Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4 - 20 mA. Common
terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and
electrical potential for analog common connection.
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

20
x 100 = 200%
10

Option:
130BA075.12

Current
(mA)
20

Function:
Select the function of Terminal X30/8 as an
analog current output. Depending on the
selection the output is either a 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA output. The current value can be
read out in LCP in parameter 16-65 Analog

0/4
0% Analogue
output
Min Scale
par. 6-93

Analogue 100% Variable

Output
for
Max Scale
output
par. 6-94
example:
Speed
(RPM)

Illustration 3.42 Output Max Scale

Output 42 [mA].
[0]

No
operation

[52]

MCO
0-20mA

When no signal on the analog output.

[100] Output
frequency

0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.

[101] Reference

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max]

0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

103

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max]

-100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20
mA

In case the norm motor current is equal to

20 mA, the output setting of
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
=
= 175%
IMotor Norm
22

[102] Feedback
[103] Motor
Current

Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.

Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22
A Read-out 11.46 mA.
20 mA x 22 A
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A

In case the norm motor current is equal to

20 mA, the output setting of
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
=
= 175%
IMotor Norm
22

[104] Torque rel

to limit

The torque setting is related to setting in

[105] Torq relate

to rated

The torque is related to the motor torque

setting.

[106] Power

Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.

[kW].
[107] Speed

[134] Torq.% lim

4-20 mA

The torque setting is related to setting in

[135] Torq.% nom

4-20mA

The torque setting is related to the motor

torque setting.

[136] Power
4-20mA

Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]

[137] Speed
4-20mA

Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum

Reference. 20 mA = Value in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.

[138] Torque
4-20mA

Torque reference related to 160% torque.

[139] Bus ctrl.

0-20 mA

An output value set from fieldbus process

data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency
converter.

[140] Bus ctrl.

4-20 mA

An output value set from fieldbus process

data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency
converter.

[141] Bus ctrl

0-20mA t.o.

Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low

defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus time-out.

[142] Bus ctrl

4-20mA t.o.

Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low

defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus time-out.

[149] Torque %
lim 4-20mA

Torque% Lim 4-20 mA: Torque reference.

Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum

Reference. 20 mA = value in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

[108] Torque

Torque reference related to 160% torque.

[109] Max Out

Freq

In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output

Frequency.

[113] PID
Clamped
Output
[119] Torque %
lim
0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA

[131] Reference
4-20mA

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]

0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
mA

[132] Feedback
4-20mA

[150] Max Out Fr

4-20mA

In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output

Frequency.

6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

Range:
0 %*

[0 200 %]

Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.

Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22
A Read-out 11.46 mA.
16 mA x 22 A
= 9.17 mA
38.4 A

104

parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]

0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max]
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
mA

[130] Output freq.

4-20mA

[133] Motor cur.

4-20mA

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Scales the minimum output of the selected
analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the
minimum value as a percentage of the maximum
signal value, i.e. 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25%
of the maximum output value and 25% is
programmed. The value can never be higher than
the corresponding setting in 6-62 Terminal X30/8
Max. Scale if value is below 100%.
This parameter is active when option module
MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency converter.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

Range:

Option:

100
%*

[0 200
%]

Function:
Scales the maximum output of the selected
analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value
to the desired maximum value of the current
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an
output below 100% of the maximum signal value.
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value
between 0 - 100% of the ful-scale output,
program the percentage value in the parameter,
i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20
mA is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows:
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%

i . e . 10 mA :

20 4
x 100 = 160%
10

6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output X30/8 if controlled

by bus.

6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset

Range:
0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

Function:
Holds the preset level of Output X30/8.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
function is selected in parameter 6-60 Terminal
X30/8 Output, the output is preset to this level.

3.8.8 6-7* Analog Output 3 MCB 113

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for
analog output 3, Terminal X45/1 and X45/2. Analog
outputs are current outputs: 0/420 mA. Resolution on
analog output is 11 bit.
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output
Option:

No operation

[52]

MCO 305 0-20

mA

[53]

MCO 305 4-20

mA

Function:

Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%

current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) =
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current
= 22 A Read-out 11.46 mA.
20 mA x 22 A
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A

In case the norm motor current is equal to

20 mA, the output setting of
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
Scale is:
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
=
= 175%
IMotor Norm
22

[104] Torque rel to

lim 0-20 mA

The torque setting is related to setting in

[105] Torque rel to

rated motor
torque 0-20
mA

The torque is related to the motor torque

setting.

[106] Power 0-20

mA

Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power

[107] Speed 0-20

mA

Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

[kW].
Reference. 20 mA = value in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference

[108] Torque ref.

0-20 mA

Torque reference related to 160% torque.

[109] Max Out Freq

0-20 mA

In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output

[130] Output freq.

4-20 mA

0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA

[131] Reference
4-20 mA

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]

0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA

Frequency.

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]

-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
mA

[133] Motor cur.

4-20 mA

When no signal on the analog output.

Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.

Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) =
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current
= 22 A Read-out 11.46 mA.
16 mA x 22 A
= 9.17 mA
38.4 A

[100] Output
frequency
0-20 mA

0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.

[101] Reference
0-20 mA

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max]

0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA

In case the norm motor current is equal to

20 mA, the output setting of

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max Max] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100%
= 20 mA
[102] Feedback

Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.

[132] Feedback 4-20

mA

Select the function of Terminal X45/1 as an

analog current output.
[0]

[103] Motor current

0-20 mA

Function:

parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max

Scale is:
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
=
= 175%
IMotor Norm
22

[134] Torque% lim.

4-20 mA

The torque setting is related to setting in

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.

[135] Torque% nom The torque setting is related to the motor

4-20 mA
torque setting.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

105

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

Option:

Current
[mA]

Function:

[136] Power 4-20

mA

Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power

[137] Speed 4-20

mA

Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum

130BA877.10

Parameter Descriptions

20

[kW]
Reference. 20 mA = Value in
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.

[138] Torque 4-20

mA

Torque reference related to 160% torque.

[139] Bus ctrl. 0-20

mA

An output value set from fieldbus process

data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency
converter.

[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20

mA

An output value set from fieldbus process

data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency
converter.

0/4

[141] Bus ctrl. 0-20

mA, timeout

Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low

defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus time-out.

[142] Bus ctrl. 4-20

mA, timeout

Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low

defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus time-out.
In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output

[150] Max Out Freq

4-20 mA

Frequency.

Analogue
output Min
Scale
par. 6-71

0%

0.00%*

Range:

Function:

0.00%*

[0.00 - 100.00%] Holds the level of Analog Output 3

(terminal X45/1) if controlled by bus.

6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset

Range:
0.00%*

Function:
[0.00 100.00%]

Scale the minimum output of the selected

analog signal at terminal X45/1, as a
percentage of the maximum signal value.
E.g. if 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of
the maximum output value, then
programme 25%. Scaling values up to
100% can never be higher than the
corresponding setting in 6-72 Terminal

X45/1 Output the output is preset to this

level.

[0.00 200.00%]

3.8.9 6-8* Analog Output 4 MCB 113

Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for
analog output 4. Terminal X45/3 and X45/4. Analog
outputs are current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Resolution on
analog output is 11 bit.
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output
Option:

6-72 Terminal X45/1 Output Max Scale

100%*

Scale the maximum output of the selected

analog signal at terminal X45/1. Set the value
to the maximum value of the current signal
output. Scale the output to give a current
lower than 20 mA at full scale; or 20 mA at
an output below 100% of the maximum
signal value. If 20 mA is the desired output
current at a value between 0 - 100% of the
full-scale output, programme the percentage
value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a
current between 4 and 20 mA is desired at
maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows (example where
desired max. output is 10 mA):

[0] * No operation Same selections available as for 6-70 Terminal

IRANGE mA
x 100%
IDESIRED MAX mA

106

Function:
Select the function of Terminal X45/3 as an
analog current output.

Function:

Holds the preset level of Analog Output

3 (terminal X45/1).
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
function is selected in 6-70 Terminal

X45/1 Max. Scale.

Range:

Variable for
output
example:Speed
[RPM]

6-73 Terminal X45/1 Output Bus Control

Function:
[0.00 200.00%]

100%

Illustration 3.43 Output Max Scale

6-71 Terminal X45/1 Output Min Scale

Range:

Analogue
Output Max
Scale
par. 6-72

20 4 mA
x 100% = 160%
10 mA

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

X45/1 Output

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

6-81 Terminal X45/3 Output Min Scale

Option:

Function:

[0.00%] * 0.00 200.00%

Scales the minimum output of the

selected analog signal on terminal X45/3.
Scale the minimum value as a percentage
of the maximum signal value, i.e. 0 mA
(or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of the
maximum output value and 25% is
programmed. The value can never be
higher than the corresponding setting in

3 3

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale if value is

below 100%.
This parameter is active when option
module MCB 113 is mounted in the
frequency converter.

6-82 Terminal X45/3 Output Max Scale

Option:
[0.00%]
*

Function:
0.00 200.00%

Scales the maximum output of the selected

analog signal on terminal X45/3. Scale the
value to the desired maximum value of the
current signal output. Scale the output to
give a lower current than 20 mA at full scale
or 20 mA at an output below 100% of the
maximum signal value. If 20 mA is the
desired output current at a value between 0
- 100% of the ful-scale output, program the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50%
= 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA
is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows
(example where desired max. output is 10
mA):
IRANGE mA
x 100%
IDESIRED MAX mA
=

20 4 mA
x 100% = 160%
10 mA

6-83 Terminal X45/3 Output Bus Control

Option:

Function:

[0.00%] * 0.00 - 100.00% Holds the level of output 4 (X45/3) if

controlled by bus.

6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset

Option:
[0.00%] * 0.00 100.00%

Function:
Holds the present level of output 4
(X45/3). In case of a bus timeout and a
timeout function is selected in
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output the output
is preset to this level.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

107

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers

7-03 Speed PID Integral Time

Range:

3.9.1 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.

Size
related*

7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source

Option:

Function:
[1.0 20000
ms]

Function:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be
adjusted while the motor is
running.
Select the encoder for closed loop
feedback.
The feedback may come from a
different encoder (typically mounted
on the application itself) than the
motor mounted encoder feedback

Enter the speed controller integral time,

which determines the time the internal PID
control takes to correct errors. The greater
the error, the more quickly the gain
increases. The integral time causes a delay
of the signal and therefore a dampening
effect, and can be used to eliminate steady
state speed error. Obtain quick control
through a short integral time, though if the
integral time is too short, the process
becomes unstable. An excessively long
integral time disables the integral action,
leading to major deviations from the
required reference, since the process
regulator takes too long to regulate errors.
This parameter is used with [0] Speed open

selected in parameter 1-02 Flux Motor

loop and [1] Speed closed loop control, set in

Feedback Source.

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

[0]

Motor feedb. P1-02

[1]

24V encoder

7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time

[2]

MCB 102

Range:

[3]

MCB 103

[4]

MCO Encoder 1 X56

[5]

MCO Encoder 2 X55

[6]

Analog Input 53

[7]

Analog Input 54

[8]

Frequency input 29

[9]

Frequency input 33

Function:

Size
related*

[0 200
ms]

[11] MCB 15X

NOTICE

tiator. This parameter is used with

If separate encoders are used (FC 302 only) the ramp

settings parameters in the following parameter groups:
3-4*, 3-5*, 3-6*, 3-7* and 3-8* must be adjusted
according to the gear ratio between the 2 encoders.

Range:

Function:
[0 1]

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed

closed loop control.

7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit

Range:
5*

7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain

Size
related*

Function:

[1 20 ]

Set a limit for the gain provided by the differentiator. Since the differential gain increases at higher
frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful. For
example, set up a pure D-link at low frequencies
and a constant D-link at higher frequencies. This

Enter the speed controller proportional gain.

The proportional gain amplifies the error (i.e.
the deviation between the feedback signal and

parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration

the set-point). This parameter is used with

Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Speed

open loop and [1] Speed closed loop control.
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
However if the amplification is too great, the
process may become unstable.
Use this parameter for values with 3 decimals.
For a selection with 4 decimals, use

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.1
- 100
ms]

parameter 3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at

Decel. Start.

108

Enter the speed controller differentiation

time. The differentiator does not react to
constant error. It provides gain proportional
to the rate of change of the speed
feedback. The quicker the error changes,
the stronger the gain from the differentiator. The gain is proportional with the
speed at which errors change. Setting this
parameter to zero disables the differen-

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Set a time constant for the speed control lowpass filter. The low-pass filter improves steadystate performance and dampens oscillations
on the feedback signal. This is an advantage if
there is a great amount on noise in the
system, see Illustration 3.44. For example, if a
time constant () of 100 ms is programmed,
the cut-off frequency for the low-pass filter is

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time

Range:

Feedback

175ZA293.11

Parameter Descriptions

Function:
1/0.1= 10 RAD/s., corresponding to (10/2 x )
= 1.6 Hz. The PID regulator only regulates a
feedback signal that varies by a frequency of
less than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback signal varies
by a higher frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID
regulator does not react.

Disturbed feedback signal

3 3

Practical settings of parameter 7-06 Speed PID

Lowpass Filter Time taken from the number of
pulses per revolutions from encoder:
Encoder PPR

Parameter 7-06 Speed PID

Lowpass Filter Time

512

10 ms

1024

5 ms

2048

2 ms

4096

1 ms

0.6

t (Sec.)

Lowpass filter

NOTICE
Severe filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode [1] Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
Adjust the filter time in Flux Sensorless to
3-5 ms.

fg = 10 Hz

Feedback

Filtered feedback signal

0.6

t (Sec.)

Illustration 3.44 Feedback Signal

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

109

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.9.2 7-1* Torque PI Control

7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio

Range:
1*

Function:

[ 0.0001 - 32.0000 ] The frequency converter multiplies the

speed feedback by this ratio.
130BA871.10

3 3
n1

Parameters for configuring the torque PI control in torque

open loop (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode).
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain
Range:
100 %*

n2

Motor

Function:
[0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
torque controller. Selection of a high value
makes the controller react faster. Too high
a setting leads to controller instability.

7-13 Torque PI Integration Time

Range:

Par 7-07=1.00

Par 7-07=n1/n2

0.020 s*

Illustration 3.45 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio

0 %*

Range:

Function:

[0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed

controller by the amount specified. This
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop.

Range:

Function:
[10 - 100000 The speed error between ramp and
RPM]
actual speed is held up against the
setting in this parameter. If the speed
error exceeds this parameter entry, the
speed error is corrected via ramping
in a controlled way.

[15 - 100 %] Enter the value for the rise time of

the current controller as a
percentage of the control period.

Select the feedback sources for the Process PID Control,

and how this feedback should be handled.
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
Option:

signal is defined in

7-09

Torque
Limit

parameter 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2

Resource.
[0] * No function

Time

Motor
Speed

7-09
Torque
Limit
Ramp

Time

[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[3]

Frequency input
29

[4]

Frequency input
33

[7]

Analog Input
X30/11

[8]

Analog Input
X30/12

Motor Speed

Illustration 3.46 Speed Error between Ramp and Actual Speed

[15] Analog Input

X48/2

110

Function:
The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to 2 different
input signals.
Select which frequency converter input
should be treated as the source of the
first of these signals. The second input

130BC026.10

Motor
Speed

Size related*

Function:

3.9.3 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb.

7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp

300 RPM*

[0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque

controller. Selection of a low value makes
the controller react faster. Too low a
setting leads to control instability.

7-19 Current Controller Rise Time

7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor

Range:

Function:

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource

7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain

Option:

Range:

Function:
The effective feedback signal is made
up of the sum of up to 2 different
input signals. Select which frequency
converter input should be treated as
the source of the second of these
signals. The first input signal is defined
in parameter 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1
Resource.

0.01*

Function:

[0 - 10 ] Enter the PID proportional gain. The proportional gain multiplies the error between the set
point and the feedback signal.

7-34 Process PID Integral Time

Range:
10000 s*

Function:
[0.01 10000 s]

[0] * No function
[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[3]

Frequency input
29

[4]

Frequency input
33

[7]

Analog Input
X30/11

[8]

Analog Input
X30/12

Enter the PID integral time. The integrator

provides an increasing gain at a constant
error between the set point and the
feedback signal. The integral time is the
time needed by the integrator to reach
the same gain as the proportional gain.

7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time

Range:
0 s*

[15] Analog Input

X48/2

Function:

[0 - 10 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differentiator does not react to a constant error, but
provides a gain only when the error changes.
The shorter the PID differentiation time, the
stronger the gain from the differentiator.

7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit

3.9.4 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.

Range:
5*

7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control

Option:

Function:
Normal and inverse control are implemented by
introducing a difference between the reference
signal and the feedback signal.

[0] * Normal Sets process control to increase the output

frequency.
[1]

7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor

Range:
0 %*

Inverse Sets process control to reduce the output

frequency.

[0 200 %]

7-31 Process PID Anti Windup

Option:
[0]

Off

[1] * On

Function:
Continues regulation of an error even when the
output frequency cannot be increased or decreased.

Range:
0 RPM*

dynamics when changing the set point.

active when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
is set to [3] Process.

7-39 On Reference Bandwidth

Function:
[0 6000
RPM]

Function:
Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF
factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID
control only affects the remaining fraction of the
control signal. Any change to this parameter will
thus affect the motor speed. When the FF factor
is activated it provides less overshoot, and high
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is

Ceases regulation of an error when the output

frequency can no longer be adjusted.

7-32 Process PID Start Speed

Function:

[1 - 50 ] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If

there is no limit, the DG will increase when there
are fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure
differentiator gain at slow changes and a constant
differentiator gain where fast changes occur.

Range:

Enter the motor speed to be attained as a

start signal for commencement of PID
control. When the power is switched on, the
frequency converter commences ramping
and then operates under speed open loop
control. When the Process PID start speed is
reached, the frequency converter changes to
Process PID control.

5 %*

[0 - 200
%]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the
PID Control Error (the difference between the
reference and the feedback) is less than the
set value of this parameter the On Reference
status bit is high, i.e. =1.

111

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.9.5 7-4* Advanced Process PID Ctrl.

7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource

This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
Extended PID Speed OL.
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset
Option:

Function:

[0] * No
[1]

Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID
controller. The selection automatically reverts to [0]
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from
a well-defined point after changing something in the
process, e.g. changing a textile roll.

Function:

-100 %*

[ -100 - par. 7-42 %] Enter a negative limit for the

process PID controller output.

[2]

Analog Input 54

[7]

Frequency input
29

[8]

Frequency input
33

[11] Local bus

reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30-11
[22] Analog input
X30-12

[32] Bus PCD

Change parameter 8-42 PCD Write

Configuration for the bus used to make
the feed-forward available in

Function:

100 %*

[36] MCO

7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.

100 %*

parameter 7-48 PCD Feed Forward. Use

index 1 for feed-forward [748] (and
index 2 for reference [1682]).

[ par. 7-41 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the

process PID controller output.

Range:

7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.

Function:
[0 100 %]

Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the

process PID output when operating at the
minimum reference. The scaling percentage is
adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref.
(parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min.

Option:

Ref.).

[1]

100 %*

[0 100 %]

Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the

process PID output when operating at the
maximum reference. The scaling percentage is
adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref.

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] Read-out parameter where the bus

parameter 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
[32]) can be read.

Function:

7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.

Option:

Function:

Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.

[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
the process PID controller as is.

(parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max.

[1]

Ref.).

7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource

Option:
[0] * No function

112

7-48 PCD Feed Forward

0*

(parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min.

[1]

Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the FF resource as a

negative value.

Range:

7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref.

Function:

[0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed forward factor to
treat the FF resource as a positive value.

Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.

(parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max.

Range:

Selects a bus reference configured by

parameter 8-02 Control Word Source.

7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp

Range:

Function:

[29] Analog Input

X48/2

7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp

Range:

Option:

Function:
Select which frequency converter input
should be used as the feed forward
factor. The FF factor is added directly to
the output of the PID controller. This
increases dynamic performance.

Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output

from the process PID controller. This operation is
performed after the feed forward factor is applied.

3.9.6 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.

This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
Extended PID Speed OL.

Analog Input 53

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

7-50 Process PID Extended PID

Option:
[0]

Function:

Disabled Disables the extended parts of the process PID

controller.

[1] * Enabled

Enables the extended parts of the PID controller.

3 3

7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain

Range:
1*

[0 100 ]

Function:
The feed forward is used to obtain the desired level,
based on a well-known signal available. The PID
controller then only takes care of the smaler part of
the control, necessary because of unknown
characters. The standard feed fwd factor in
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
always related to the reference whereas
parameter 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain has more
choices. In winder applications, the feed fwd factor is
typically the line speed of the system.

7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up

Range:
0.01 s*

Function:
[0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping up.

7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down

Range:
0.01 s*

Function:
[0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping down.

7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time

Range:
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 1
s]

Set a time constant for the reference

first-order low-pass filter. The low-pass
filter improves steady-state performance
and dampens oscillations on the
reference/feedback signals. However,
severe filtering can be detrimental to
dynamic performance.

7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time

Range:
0.001 s*

Function:
[0.001 - 1
s]

Set a time constant for the feedback firstorder low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
improves steady-state performance and
dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However, severe
filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

113

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and

Options

8-03 Control Word Timeout Time

Range:
[1.0
s]

3.10.1 8-0* General Settings

0.1-18000.0 s

8-01 Control Site

Option:

parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout

Function is then carried out. A valid control
word triggers the time-out counter.

settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to

parameter 8-56 Preset Reference Select.
[0] Digital and
ctrl.word

Control by using both digital input and

control word.

[1] Digital only

Control by using digital inputs only.

[2] Controlword
only

Control by using control word only.

20 s*

[ 0.1 18000.0 s]

Function:

stopped. The function selected in

8-04 Control Word Timeout Function

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

Select the time-out function. The time-out function activates

when the control word fails to be updated within the time
period specified in 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.

Option:
Select the source of the control word: one of
2 serial interfaces or 4 installed options.
During initial power-up, the frequency
converter automatically sets this parameter to

Off

[1]

Freeze output Freezes output frequency until communication resumes.

[2]

Stop

Stops with auto restart when communication resumes.

[3]

Jogging

Runs the motor at JOG frequency until

communication resumes.

initial power-up, the setting of

[4]

Max. speed

parameter 8-02 Control Word Source does not

change, but the frequency converter trips and

Runs the motor at maximum frequency until

communication resumes.

[5]

Stop and trip

Stops the motor, then resets the frequency

converter to restart: via the fieldbus, via
[Reset], or via a digital input.

[7]

Select setup 1 Changes the set-up upon reestablishment of

communication following a control word
time-out. If communication resumes after a

removed, the frequency converter detects a

change in the configuration, sets
parameter 8-02 Control Word Source back to
default setting RS-485, and the frequency
converter trips. If an option is installed after

displays: Alarm 67 Option Changed.

When retrofitting a bus option into a
frequency converter that did not have a bus
option installed to begin with, take an ACTIVE
decision to move the control to Bus based.
This is done for safety reasons to avoid an
accidental change.
[1]

FC RS485

[2]

FC USB

[3]

Option A

[4]

Function:

[0]

[3] Option A, if it detects a valid fieldbus

option installed in slot A. If the option is

None

Enter the maximum time expected to pass

between the reception of 2 consecutive
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
indicates that the serial communication has
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
Functionis then carried out. A valid control
word triggers the time-out counter.

8-02 Control Word Source

[0]

Enter the maximum time expected to pass

between the reception of 2 consecutive
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in

Function:
The setting in this parameter overrides the

Option:

Function:

Resumes control via serial bus (fieldbus or

standard) using the most recent control
word.

time-out, parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout

Function defines whether to resume the setup used before the time-out, or to retain the
set-up endorsed by the time-out function.
[8]

Select setup 2 See [7] Select setup 1

Option B

[9]

Select setup 3 See [7] Select setup 1

[5]

Option C0

[10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select setup 1

[6]

Option C1

[30] External Can

114

[26] Trip

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

8-08 Readout Filtering

To change the set-up after a time-out, the following

configuration is required:
Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up and
select the relevant link in parameter 0-12 This Set-up
Linked to.

If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,

this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.

Option:

Function:
16-14 Motor current
Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm]
Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Parameter 16-22 Torque [%]
Parameter 16-25 Torque [Nm] High

8-05 End-of-Timeout Function

Option:

Function:
Select the action after receiving a valid control
word following a time-out. This parameter is
active only when 8-04 Control Timeout Function
is set to [7] Set-up 1, [8] Set-up 2, [9]Set-up 3 or
[10] Set-up 4.

[0] Hold setup

[1] Resume
set-up

3.10.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

8-10 Control Word Profile

Retains the set-up selected in 8-04 Control

Timeout Function and displays a warning, until

Select the interpretation of the control and status words

corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
for the fieldbus installed in slot A are visible in the LCP display.

8-06 Reset Control Timeout toggles. Then the

frequency converter resumes its original set-up.

For guidelines in selection of [0] FC profile and [1] PROFIdrive

Resumes the set-up active before the time-out.

profile, refer to the Serial communication via RS-485 Interface

section in the Design Guide.
For additional guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile,

8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout

refer to the Operating Instructions for the installed fieldbus.

This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been

Option:

selected in parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.

Option:

Function:

[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in

parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function,
following a control word time-out.
[1]

Do reset

Returns the frequency converter to the

original set-up following a control word timeout. The frequency converter performs the
reset and then immediately reverts to the [0]
Do not reset setting

Function:

[0] *

FC profile

[1]

PROFIdrive profile

[5]

ODVA

[7]

CANopen DSP 402

[8]

MCO

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are configurable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the
following options.

Option:
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger
This parameter has no function for DeviceNet.

Option:

The input is always low.

[1]

Profile Default

Depended on the profile

set in 8-10 Control Profile.

[2]

[1]

Trigger on alarms

[2]

Trigger alarm/warn. This parameter has no function for

DeviceNet.

8-08 Readout Filtering

If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.

Option:

[1]

No function

Function:

[0] * Disable

[0]

Function:

[0]

Function:
Motor Data
Std-Filt.

Select [0] for normal bus readouts.

Motor Data
LP-Filter

Select [1] for filtered bus readouts of

the following parameters:

Alarm 68 Only

[3]

Trip excl Alarm 68

[10]

T18 DI status

[11]

T19 DI status

[12]

T27 DI status

[13]

T29 DI status

[14]

T32 DI status

[15]

T33 DI status

[16]

T37 DI status

16-10 Power [kW]

16-11 Power [hp]
16-12 Motor Voltage

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

The input goes high

whenever Alarm 68 is
active and goes low
whenever no alarm 68 is
actived

The input goes high

whenever T37 has 0 V and
goes low whenever T37
has 24 V

115

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW

8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW

The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are configurable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the
following options.

Option:

Option:

Function:
Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration
Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.

Function:

[21]

Thermal warning

[30]

Brake fault (IGBT)

PID controller. Equivalent to

[40]

Out of ref range

parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.

[41]

Load throttle active

Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration

[60]

Comparator 0

Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended

[61]

Comparator 1

PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.

[62]

Comparator 2

[63]

Comparator 3

[64]

Comparator 4

[65]

Comparator 5

[70]

Logic Rule 0

The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).

Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options.

[71]

Logic Rule 1

Option:

[72]

Logic Rule 2

[0] *

[73]

Logic Rule 3

[1]

10 Volts low warning

[74]

Logic Rule 4

[2]

Live zero warning

[75]

Logic Rule 5

[3]

No motor warning

[80]

SL digital out A

[4]

Mains phase loss warning

[81]

SL digital out B

[5]

DC link voltage high warning

[82]

SL digital out C

[6]

DC link voltage low warning

[83]

SL digital out D

[7]

DC overvoltage warning

[84]

SL digital out E

[8]

DC undervoltage warning

[85]

SL digital out F

[9]

Inverter overloaded warning

[86]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

[10]

Motor ETR overtemp warning

[6]

PID enable When enabled, enables the extended process

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword

Function:
Off

[87]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

[11]

Motor thermistor overtemp warning

[88]

ATEX ETR cur. warning

[12]

Torque limit warning

[89]

ATEX ETR freq. warning

[13]

Over current warning

[90]

Safe Function active

[14]

Earth fault warning

[91]

Safe Opt. Reset req.

[17]

Controlword timeout warning

[19]

Discharge temp high warning

8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW

Option:

Function:
Selection of control word bit 10, if it is active
low or active high.

[0]

None

[22]

Hoist mech brake warning

[23]

Internal fans warning

[24]

External fans warning

[25]

Brake resistor short circuit warning

[26]

Brake powerlimit warning

[1] * Profile
default

[27]

Brake chopper short circuit warning

[28]

Brake check warning

[2]

CTW Valid,
active low

[29]

Heatsink temperature warning

[30]

Motor phase U warning

Safe
Option
Reset

[31]

Motor phase V warning

[32]

Motor phase W warning

[3]

[4]

PID error
inverse

[34]

Fieldbus communication warning

When enabled, it inverts the resulting error

from the process PID controller. Available only

[36]

Mains failure warning

if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to

[40]

T27 overload warning

[41]

T29 overload warning

[45]

Earth fault 2 warning

[6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL or

[8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[5]

116

PID reset I
part

[47]

24V supply low warning

When enabled, resets the I-part of the Process

[58]

AMA internal fault warning

PID controller. Equivalent to

[59]

Current limit warning

parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset.

[60]

External interlock warning

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword

The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).

Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options.

The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).

Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options.

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[61]

Feedback error warning

[10068]

Safe stop alarm

[62]

Frequency max warning

[10069]

Powercard temp alarm

[64]

Voltage limit warning

[10073]

Safestop auto restart alarm

[65]

Controlboard overtemp warning

[10074]

PTC thermistor alarm

[66]

Heatsink temp low warning

[10075]

Illegal profile alarm

[68]

Safe stop warning

[10078]

Tracking error alarm

[73]

Safe stop autorestart warning

[10079]

Illegal PS config alarm

[76]

Power unit setup warning

[10081]

CSIV corrupt alarm

[77]

Reduced powermode warning

[10082]

CSIV param error alarm

[78]

Tracking error warning

[10084]

No safety option alarm

[89]

Mech brake sliding warning

[10090]

Feedback monitor alarm

[163]

ATEX ETR cur limit warning

[10091]

AI54 settings alarm

[165]

ATEX ETR freq limit warning

[10164]

ATEX ETR current lim alarm

[10002]

Live zero error alarm

[10166]

ATEX ETR freq limit alarm

[10004]

Mains phase loss alarm

[10007]

DC overvoltage alarm

[10008]

DC undervoltage alarm

[10009]

Inverter overload alarm

[10010]

ETR overtemperature alarm

[10011]

Thermistor overtemp alarm

[10012]

Torque limit alarm

[10013]

Overcurrent alarm

[10014]

Earth fault alarm

[10016]

Short circuit alarm

[10017]

CTW timeout alarm

[10022]

Hoist brake alarm

8-30 Protocol

[10026]

Brake powerlimit alarm

[10027]

Brakechopper shortcircuit alarm

Option:

[10028]

Brake check alarm

[10029]

Heatsink temp alarm

[10030]

Phase U missing alarm

[10031]

Phase V missing alarm

[10032]

Phase W missing alarm

[10033]

Inrush fault alarm

[10034]

Fieldbus com faul alarm

[10036]

Mains failure alarm

[10037]

Phase imbalance alarm

[10038]

Internal fault

[10039]

Heatsink sensor alarm

[10045]

Earth fault 2 alarm

[10046]

Powercard supply alarm

[10047]

24V supply low alarm

[10048]

1.8V supply low alarm

[10049]

Speed limit alarm

[10060]

Ext interlock alarm

[10061]

Feedback error alarm

[10063]

Mech brake low alarm

[10065]

Controlboard overtemp alarm

[10067]

Option config changed alarm

8-19 Product Code

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 2147483647 ]

Select [0] to readout the actual

fieldbus product code according
to the mounted fieldbus option.
Select [1] to readout the actual
Vendor ID.

3.10.3 8-3* FC Port Settings

Function:
Select the protocol to be used. Changing
protocol is not effective until after powering
off the frequency converter.
[0] * FC
[1]

FC MC

[2]

Modbus RTU

8-31 Address
Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the FC (standard)
port.
Valid range: 1-126.

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate

Option:
[0] 2400 Baud

Function:
Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.

[1] 4800 Baud

[2] 9600 Baud
[3] 19200 Baud
[4] 38400 Baud
[5] 57600 Baud

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

117

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate

8-40 Telegram Selection

Option:

Option:

Function:

[6] 76800 Baud

[100] None

[7] 115200 Baud

[101] PPO 1
[102] PPO 2

8-33 Parity / Stop Bits

Option:

Function:

[103] PPO 3
[104] PPO 4

[0] *

Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit

[105] PPO 5

[1]

Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit

[106] PPO 6

[2]

No Parity, 1 Stop Bit

[107] PPO 7

[3]

No Parity, 2 Stop Bits

[108] PPO 8
[200] Custom telegram 1

8-34 Estimated cycle time

Range:
0 ms*

Function:

[0 1000000 ms]

Function:

In noisy environments, the interface may

be blocked due to overload or bad frames.
This parameter specifies the time between
2 consecutive frames on the network. If the
interface does not detect valid frames in
that time, it flushes the receive buffer.

Enables use of freely configurable

telegrams or standard telegrams for
the FC port.

[202] Custom telegram 3

8-41 Parameters for Signals

Option:
[0] *

None

8-35 Minimum Response Delay

Range:
10 ms*

Size
related*

Function:
[ 11 10001 ms]

Specify the maximum permissible

delay time between transmitting a
request and receiving a response. If a
response from the frequency converter
is exceeding the time setting, then it is
discarded.

8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.00 35.00 ms]

Specify the maximum permissible time

interval between receipt of 2 bytes.
This parameter activates time-out if
transmission is interrupted.
This parameter is active only when
8-30 Protocol is set to [1] FC MC
protocol.

3.10.4 8-4* FC MC Protocol Set

8-40 Telegram Selection
Option:
[1] *

118

parameter 8-42 PCD

Specify the minimum delay time

between receiving a request and
transmitting a response. This is used for
overcoming modem turnaround delays.

8-36 Max Response Delay

Range:

This parameter
contains a list of
signals available for
selection in

Function:
[ 1 - 10000
ms]

Function:

Function:

Standard telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable

telegrams or standard telegrams for
the FC port.

Write Configuration
and
parameter 8-43 PCD
Read Configuration.
[15]

Readout: actual setup

[302]

Minimum Reference

[303]

Maximum Reference

[312]

Catch up/slow Down Value

[341]

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

[342]

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

[351]

Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

[352]

Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

[380]

Jog Ramp Time

[381]

Quick Stop Ramp Time

[411]

Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

[412]

Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

[413]

Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

[414]

Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

[416]

Torque Limit Motor Mode

[417]

Torque Limit Generator Mode

[553]

Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[558]

Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[590]

Digital & Relay Bus Control

[593]

Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

[595]

Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

[597]

Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

[615]

Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[625]

Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value

[653]

Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl

[663]

Terminal X30/8 Bus Control

[673]

Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

8-41 Parameters for Signals

Option:

8-41 Parameters for Signals

Function:

Option:

[683]

Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

[1664] Analog Input 54

[748]

PCD Feed Forward

[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]

[890]

Bus Jog 1 Speed

[1666] Digital Output [bin]

[891]

Bus Jog 2 Speed

[1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]

[1472] Legacy Alarm Word

Function:

3 3

[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]

[1473] Legacy Warning Word

[1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word

[1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

[1500] Operating hours

[1671] Relay Output [bin]

[1501] Running Hours

[1672] Counter A

[1502] kWh Counter

[1673] Counter B

[1600] Control Word

[1674] Prec. Stop Counter

[1601] Reference [Unit]

[1675] Analog In X30/11

[1602] Reference %

[1676] Analog In X30/12

[1603] Status Word

[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

[1605] Main Actual Value [%]

[1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

[1609] Custom Readout

[1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

[1610] Power [kW]

[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1

[1611] Power [hp]

[1682] Fieldbus REF 1

[1612] Motor Voltage

[1684] Comm. Option STW

[1613] Frequency

[1685] FC Port CTW 1

[1614] Motor current

[1686] FC Port REF 1

[1615] Frequency [%]

[1687] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning

[1616] Torque [Nm]

[1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

[1617] Speed [RPM]

[1690] Alarm Word

[1618] Motor Thermal

[1691] Alarm Word 2

[1619] KTY sensor temperature

[1692] Warning Word

[1620] Motor Angle

[1693] Warning Word 2

[1621] Torque [%] High Res.

[1694] Ext. Status Word

[1622] Torque [%]

[1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

[1623] Motor Shaft Power [kW]

[1837] Temp. Input X48/4

[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance

[1838] Temp. Input X48/7

[1625] Torque [Nm] High

[1839] Temp. Input X48/10

[1630] DC Link Voltage

[1860] Digital Input 2

[1632] Brake Energy /s

[3310] Sync Factor Master

[1633] Brake Energy /2 min

[3311] Sync Factor Slave

[1634] Heatsink Temp.

[3401] PCD 1 Write to MCO

[1635] Inverter Thermal

[3402] PCD 2 Write to MCO

[1638] SL Controller State

[3403] PCD 3 Write to MCO

[1639] Control Card Temp.

[3404] PCD 4 Write to MCO

[1645] Motor Phase U Current

[3405] PCD 5 Write to MCO

[1646] Motor Phase V Current

[3406] PCD 6 Write to MCO

[1647] Motor Phase W Current

[3407] PCD 7 Write to MCO

[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]

[3408] PCD 8 Write to MCO

[1650] External Reference

[3409] PCD 9 Write to MCO

[1651] Pulse Reference

[3410] PCD 10 Write to MCO

[1652] Feedback[Unit]

[3421] PCD 1 Read from MCO

[1653] Digi Pot Reference

[3422] PCD 2 Read from MCO

[1657] Feedback [RPM]

[3423] PCD 3 Read from MCO

[1660] Digital Input

[3424] PCD 4 Read from MCO

[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting

[3425] PCD 5 Read from MCO

[1662] Analog Input 53

[3426] PCD 6 Read from MCO

[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting

[3427] PCD 7 Read from MCO

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

119

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

8-45 BTM Transaction Command

8-41 Parameters for Signals

Option:

Option:

Function:

[3]

[3428] PCD 8 Read from MCO

[3429] PCD 9 Read from MCO

Function:

Clear error

8-46 BTM Transaction Status

[3430] PCD 10 Read from MCO

Option:

[3440] Digital Inputs

Function:

[3441] Digital Outputs

[0] *

Off

[3450] Actual Position

[1]

Transaction Started

[3451] Commanded Position

[2]

Transaction Comitting

[3452] Actual Master Position

[3]

Transaction Timeout

[3453] Slave Index Position

[4]

Err. Non-existing Par.

[3454] Master Index Position

[5]

Err. Par. Out of Range

[3455] Curve Position

[6]

Transaction Failed

[3456] Track Error

8-47 BTM Timeout

[3457] Synchronizing Error

Range:

[3458] Actual Velocity

60 s*

[3459] Actual Master Velocity

[3460] Synchronizing Status
[3461] Axis Status

8-48 BTM Maximum Errors

[3462] Program Status

Range:

[3464] MCO 302 Status

21*

[3465] MCO 302 Control

[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2
[4280] Safe Option Status

Range:

8-42 PCD Write Configuration

Range:

0.255*

Function:
[0 9999 ]

Select the parameters to be assigned to

PCD's telegrams. The number of
available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. The values in PCD's is
then written to the selected parameters
as data values.

8-43 PCD Read Configuration

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0 9999 ]

Select the parameters to be assigned to

PCD's of the telegrams. The number of
available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual
data values of the selected parameters.

Parameters for configuring the control word Digital/Bus

merging.

NOTICE
These parameters are active only when
parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
word.

Option:

Function:

Start Transaction

[2]

Commit transaction

120

Function:
Select control of the coasting function via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.

This parameter cannot be

adjusted while the motor is
running.

[1]

List of parameters that failed during

Bulk Transfer Mode. The value after the
decimal break is the error code (255
means no error).

3.10.5 8-5* Digital/Bus

NOTICE

[0] * Off

Function:

[0.000 9999.255 ]

8-50 Coasting Select

8-45 BTM Transaction Command

Option:

Function:

[0 - 21 ] Selects the maximum allowed number of Bulk

Transfer Mode errors before aborting. If it is set
to maximum, there is no abort.

8-49 BTM Error Log

[4285] Active Safe Func.

Size
related*

Function:

[1 - 360 s] Select the BTM Timeout after a BTM

transaction has been started.

[0] Digital
input

Activates Start command via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates Start command via the serial communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

8-50 Coasting Select

8-54 Reversing Select

Option:

Option:

[3] Logic OR

Function:
Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

8-51 Quick Stop Select

Select control of the Quick Stop function via the terminals
(digital input) and/or via the bus.

Option:

Function:

[0]

Digital input

[1]

Bus

[2]

Logic AND

[3] *

Logic OR

Function:

[0]

Digital
input

Select control of the frequency converter

reverse function via the terminals (digital input)
and/or via the fieldbus.

[1]

Bus

Activates the Reverse command via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2]

Logic
AND

Activates the Reverse command via the

fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.

[3] * Logic OR

Activates the Reverse command via the

fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
of the digital inputs.

8-52 DC Brake Select

8-55 Set-up Select

Option:

Option:

Function:
Select control of the DC brake via the terminals
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus.

NOTICE
Only selection [0] Digital input is available
when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1]
PM non-salient SPM.
[0] Digital
input

Activates Start command via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates Start command via the serial communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

[0] Digital
input

Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates the set-up selection via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates the set-up selection via the fieldbus/

serial communication port, AND additionally via
one of the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR

Activate the set-up selection via the fieldbus/

serial communication port OR via one of the
digital inputs.

8-56 Preset Reference Select

Option:

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter start
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.

[0] Digital
input

Activates Start command via a digital input.

[1] Bus

Activates Start command via the serial communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR

Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter Preset
Reference selection via the terminals (digital
input) and/or via the fieldbus.

8-53 Start Select

Option:

Function:
Select control of the frequency converter set-up
selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.

[0] Digital
input

Activates Preset Reference selection via a digital

input.

[1] Bus

Activates Preset Reference selection via the serial

communication port or fieldbus option.

[2] Logic
AND

Activates Preset Reference selection via the

fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
additionally via one of the digital inputs.

[3] Logic OR

Activates the Preset Reference selection via the

fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one of
the digital inputs.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

121

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.10.7 8-9* Bus Jog

8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select

Select control of the frequency converter OFF2 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
Profidrive profile.

Option:

8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed

Range:
100 RPM*

Function:
[ 0 - par. 4-13
RPM]

Function:

[0]

Digital input

[1]

Bus

[2]

Logic AND

[3] *

Logic OR

8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed

Range:
200 RPM*

8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select

Function:
[ 0 - par. 4-13
RPM]

Select control of the frequency converter OFF3 selection via the

terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
Profidrive profile.

Option:

Function:

[0]

Digital input

[1]

Bus

[2]

Logic AND

[3] *

Logic OR

3.10.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

These parameters are used for monitoring the Bus
communication via the FC Port.
8-80 Bus Message Count
Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid

telegrams detected on the bus.

8-81 Bus Error Count

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams

with faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the bus.

8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid

telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the
frequency converter.

8-83 Slave Error Count

Range:
0*

122

Enter the jog speed. Activate this

fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.

Function:

[0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error

telegrams, which could not be executed by the
frequency converter.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Enter the jog speed. Activate this

fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus

For Profibus parameter descriptions, see the Profibus
Operating Instructions.

3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN

Fieldbus

3 3

For Devicenet parameter descriptions, see the Devicenet

Operating Instructions.

3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet

For Ethernet parameter descriptions, see the Ethernet
Operating Instructions.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

123

3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control

3.14.1 Prog. Features

State 1
13-51.0
13-52.0

Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of userdefined actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined
event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is
evaluated as TRUE by the SLC.
The condition for an event can be a particular status or
that the output from a Logic Rule or a Comparator
Operand becomes TRUE. That leads to an associated action
as illustrated:
Par. 13-51
SL Controller Event

Par. 13-52
SL Controller Action

Running
Warning
Torque limit
Digital input X 30/2
...

Coast
Start timer
Set Do X low
Select set-up 2
...

Par. 13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2

...
...

130BA062.14

Start
event P13-01

130BB671.13

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

State 2
13-51.1
13-52.1

Stop
event P13-02

Stop
event P13-02

State 4
13-51.3
13-52.3

State 3
13-51.2
13-52.2
Stop
event P13-02

Illustration 3.48 Events and Actions

Starting and stopping the SLC:

Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by selecting [1]
On or [0] Off in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The
SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]).
The SLC starts when the Start Event (defined in
parameter 13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided
that [1] On is selected in parameter 13-00 SL Controller
Mode). The SLC stops when the Stop Event
(parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is TRUE. parameter 13-03 Reset
SLC resets all SLC parameters and start programming from
scratch.

NOTICE

Par. 13-11
Comparator Operator

SLC is only active in AUTO mode, not Hand On mode

3.14.2 13-0* SLC Settings

=
TRUE longer than..
...
...

Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the

Smart Logic Control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.

Illustration 3.47 Smart Logic Control (SLC)

13-00 SL Controller Mode

Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs
(states). This means that when event [0] is fulfilled (attains
the value TRUE), action [0] is executed. After this, the
conditions of event [1] are evaluated and if evaluated
TRUE, action [1] is executed and so on. Only one event is
evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as FALSE,
nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means that
when the SLC starts, it evaluates event [0] (and only event
[0]) each scan interval. Only when event [0] is evaluated
TRUE, the SLC executes action [0] and starts evaluating
event [1]. It is possible to programme from 1 to 20 events
and actions.
When the last event/action has been executed, the
sequence starts over again from event [0]/action [0].
Illustration 3.48 shows an example with 3 event/actions:

124

Option:

Function:

[0]

Off

Disables the Smart Logic Controller.

[1]

On

Enables the Smart Logic Controller.

13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
Control.

Option:

Function:

[0]

False

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input

to activate Smart Logic Control.
Enters the fixed value - FALSE

[1]

True

Enters the fixed value - TRUE.

[2]

Running

The motor is running.

[3]

In range

The motor is running within the

programmed current and speed ranges

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-01 Start Event

13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic

Control.

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic

Control.

Option:

Option:

Function:
set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current

Alarm (trip lock) A (Trip lock) alarm is active.

[22]

Comparator 0

Use the result of comparator 0.

[23]

Comparator 1

Use the result of comparator 1.

[24]

Comparator 2

Use the result of comparator 2.

[25]

Comparator 3

Use the result of comparator 3.

[26]

Logic rule 0

Use the result of logic rule 0.

[27]

Logic rule 1

Use the result of logic rule 1.

[28]

Logic rule 2

Use the result of logic rule 2.

[29]

Logic rule 3

Use the result of logic rule 3.

[33]

Digital input
DI18

Use the result of digital input 18.

[34]

Digital input
DI19

Use the result of digital input 19.

[35]

Digital input
DI27

Use the result of digital input 27.

[36]

Digital input
DI29

Use the result of digital input 29.

[37]

Digital input
DI32

Use the result of digital input 32.

[38]

Digital input
DI33

Use the result of digital input 33.

Low.

[39]

Start command

A start command is issued.

The output speed is higher than the

[40]

Drive stopped

A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,

Coast) is issued and not from the SLC
itself.

The feedback is outside the range set in

[41]

Reset Trip

A reset is issued

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low

and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

An Auto reset is performed.

[43]

Ok key

[OK] is pressed. Only available on the

graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available on the

graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on the

graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on the

graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on the

Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed

High.
[4]

On reference

The motor is running on reference.

[5]

Torque limit

The torque limit, set in

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode, has been exceeded.

[6]

Current Limit

The motor current limit, set in

parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been
exceeded.

[7]
[8]

Out of current
range

The motor current is outside the range

Below I low

The motor current is lower than set in

set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.

parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.

[9]

Above I high

The motor current is higher than set in

parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.

[10]

Out of speed
range

The speed is outside the range set in

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[11]

[12]

Below speed
low
Above speed
high

The output speed is lower than the

setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed

setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed

High.

[13]

Out of feedb.
range

High.
[14]
[15]
[16]

[17]
[18]

Function:

[21]

Below feedb.
low

The feedback is below the limit set in

Above feedb.
high

The feedback is above the limit set in

Thermal
warning

The thermal warning turns on when the

temperature exceeds the limit in the
motor, the frequency converter, the
brake resistor or the thermistor.

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.

parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.

3 3

graphical LCP.

Mains out of
range

The mains voltage is outside the

specified voltage range.

Reversing

The output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
running AND reverse).

[50]

Comparator 4

Use the result of comparator 4.

[51]

Comparator 5

Use the result of comparator 5.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on the

graphical LCP.

[19]

Warning

A warning is active.

[60]

Logic rule 4

Use the result of logic rule 4.

[20]

Alarm (trip)

A (trip) alarm is active.

[61]

Logic rule 5

Use the result of logic rule 5.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

125

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-01 Start Event

13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic

Control.

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart

Logic Control.

Option:

Function:

Option:

[76]

Digital input
x30/2

Use the value of x30/2 (MCB 101 GPIO)

[77]

Digital input
x30/3

Use the value of x30/3 (MCB 101 GPIO)

Digital input
x30/4

Use the value of x30/4 (MCB 101 GPIO)

[79]

Digital input
x46/1

Use the value of x46/1 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)

[80]

Digital input
x46/3

Use the value of x46/3 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)

[78]

[81]

Digital input
x46/5

Use the value of x46/5 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)

[82]

Digital input
x46/7

Use the value of x46/7 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)

[83]

Digital input
x46/9

Use the value of x46/9 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)
Use the value of x46/11 (MCB 113 Ext.
Relay Card)

[84]
[85]

Digital input
x46/11

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

[16]

Thermal warning

[17]

Mains out of range

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

Digital input
x46/13

Use the value of x46/13 (MCB 113 Ext.

Relay Card)

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[95]

RS Flipflop 1

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[96]

RS Flipflop 2

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[97]

RS Flipflop 3

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[98]

RS Flipflop 4

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[38]

Digital input DI33

RS Flipflop 5

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[39]

Start command

[100] RS Flipflop 6

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[101] RS Flipflop 7

See parameter group 13-1* Comparators

[99]

13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Logic Control.

Option:
[0]

False

Function:
For descriptions [0]-[61], see

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

parameter 13-01 Start Event Start

Event
[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

126

Function:

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-02 Stop Event

13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart

Logic Control.

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart

Logic Control.

Option:
[70]
[71]
[72]
[73]

SL Time-out 3
SL Time-out 4
SL Time-out 5
SL Time-out 6

Function:

Option:

Smart Logic Controller timer 3 is

timed out.

[95]

Smart Logic Controller timer 4 is

timed out.

[96]

Smart Logic Controller timer 5 is

timed out.

[97]

Smart Logic Controller timer 6 is

[98]

RS Flipflop 1

SL Time-out 7

[75]

Start command given

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[83]

RS Flipflop 2

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

RS Flipflop 3

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

RS Flipflop 4

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

Smart Logic Controller timer 7 is

timed out.

[99]

RS Flipflop 5

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[100] RS Flipflop 6

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[101] RS Flipflop 7

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

Digital input x46/9

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[92]

ATEX ETR freq.

warning

3 3

Comparators

timed out.
[74]

Function:
See parameter group 13-1*

13-03 Reset SLC

Option:

Function:

[0] Do not reset

SLC

Retains programmed settings in all parameter

[1] Reset SLC

Resets all parameters in parameter group 13-

group 13-** Smart Logic Control.

** Smart Logic Control to default settings.

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[93]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

127

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.14.3 13-1* Comparators

13-10 Comparator Operand

Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables

(i.e. output frequency, output current, analog input etc.) to
fixed preset values.

3 3

130BB672.10

Par. 13-11
Comparator Operator
Par. 13-10
Comparator Operand
=

Array [6]

Option:

Heat sink temp. Expressed as a percentage.

[12]

Analog input
AI53

Expressed as a percentage.

[13]

Analog input
AI54

Expressed as a percentage.

[14]

Analog input
AIFB10

[V]. AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply.

[15]

Analog input
AIS24V

[V] Analog input AICCT [17] []. AIS24V is

switch mode power supply: SMPS 24V.

[17]

Analog input
AICCT

[]. AICCT is control card temperature.

[18]

Pulse input
FI29

Expressed as a percentage.

[19]

Pulse input
FI33

Expressed as a percentage.

[20]

Alarm number

The error number.

[21]

Warning
number

[22]

Analog input
x30 11

[23]

Analog input
x30 12

[30]

Counter A

Number of counts.

[31]

Counter B

Number of counts.

[32]

Process PID
Error

Value of the PID Error

Process PID
Output

Value of the PID Output

[50]

FALSE

Enters the fixed value of false in the

comparator.

[51]

TRUE

Enters the fixed value of true in the

comparator.

[52]

Control ready

The control board receives supply

voltage.

[53]

Drive ready

The frequency converter is ready for

operation and applies a supply signal on
the control board.

[54]

Running

The motor is running.

[55]

Reversing

The output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
running AND reverse).

[56]

In range

The motor is running within the

programmed current and speed ranges

TRUE longer than.

Par. 13-12
Comparator Value

...
...

Illustration 3.49 Comparators

In addition, there are digital values that are compared to

fixed time values. See explanation in
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand. Comparators are
evaluated once in each scan interval. Use the result (TRUE
or FALSE) directly. All parameters in this parameter group
are array parameters with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to
programme Comparator 0, select index 1 to programme
Comparator 1, and so on.
13-10 Comparator Operand
Array [6]

Option:

Function:
Options [1] to [31] are variables which
are compared based on their values.
Options [50] to [186] are digital values
(TRUE/FALSE) where the comparison is
based on the amount of time during
which they are set to TRUE or FALSE,
respectively. See
parameter 13-11 Comparator Operator.
Select the variable to be monitored by
the comparator.

[0]

DISABLED

The comparator is disabled.

[1]

Reference %

The resulting remote reference (not local)

as a percentage.

[2]

Feedback %

[RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter

[33]

0-02 Motor Speed Unit.

[3]

Motor speed

[RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter

0-02 Motor Speed Unit.

[4]

Motor Current

[A]

[5]

Motor torque

[Nm]

[6]

Motor power

[kW] or [hp]

[7]

Motor voltage

[V]

[8]

DC-link voltage

[V]

[9]

Motor Thermal

Expressed as a percentage.

[10]

Drive thermal

Expressed as a percentage.

128

Function:

[11]

(parameter 18-90 Process PID Error)

(parameter 18-91 Process PID Output)

set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current

Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
High.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

13-10 Comparator Operand

13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[60]

On reference

The motor is running on reference.

[86]

Alarm (trip)

A (trip) alarm is active.

[61]

Below
reference, low

The motor is running below the value

[87]

Alarm (trip
lock)

A (Trip lock) alarm is active.

[90]

Bus OK

Active communication (no time-out) via

the serial communication port.

[91]

Torque limit &

stop

If the frequency converter has received a

stop signal and is at the torque limit, the
signal is logic 0.

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode

or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator

[92]

Brake fault
(IGBT)

The brake IGBT is short circuited.

Mode, has been exceeded.

[93]

Mech. brake
control

The mechanical brake is active.

parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been

exceeded.

[94]

Safe stop active

[100] Comparator 0

The result of comparator 0.

Out of current
range

The motor current is outside the range

[101] Comparator 1

The result of comparator 1.

set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.

[102] Comparator 2

The result of comparator 2.

Below I low

The motor current is lower than set in

[103] Comparator 3

The result of comparator 3.

[104] Comparator 4

The result of comparator 4.

[105] Comparator 5

The result of comparator 5.

[110] Logic rule 0

The result of Logic rule 0.

[111] Logic rule 1

The result of Logic rule 1.

[112] Logic rule 2

The result of Logic rule 2.

[113] Logic rule 3

The result of Logic rule 3.

Low.

[114] Logic rule 4

The result of Logic rule 4.

The output speed is higher than the

[115] Logic rule 5

The result of Logic rule 5.

setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed

[120] SL Time-out 0

The result of SLC timer 0.

[121] SL Time-out 1

The result of SLC timer 1.

[122] SL Time-out 2

The result of SLC timer 2.

[123] SL Time-out 3

The result of SLC timer 3.

given in parameter 4-54 Warning

Reference Low.

[62]

Above ref, high

The motor is running above the value

given in parameter 4-55 Warning
Reference High

[65]

[66]

[67]
[68]

Torque limit

Current Limit

The torque limit, set in

The motor current limit, set in

parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.

[69]

Above I high

The motor current is higher than set in

parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.

[70]

Out of speed
range

The speed is outside the range set in

parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.

[71]

[72]

Below speed
low
Above speed
high

The output speed is lower than the

setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed

High.
[75]

Out of
feedback range

The feedback is outside the range set in

parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback
High.

[124] SL Time-out 4

The result of SLC timer 4.

[76]

Below feedback The feedback is below the limit set in

low
parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.

[125] SL Time-out 5

The result of SLC timer 5.

[77]

Above
feedback high

[126] SL Time-out 6

The result of SLC timer 6.

parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.

[127] SL Time-out 7

The result of SLC timer 7.

This operand becomes true when the

frequency converter detects any thermal
warning, for instance, when the
temperature exceeds the limit in the
motor, the frequency converter, the brake
resistor or thermistor.

[130] Digital input

DI18

Digital input 18. High = True.

[131] Digital input

DI19

Digital input 19. High = True.

[132] Digital input

DI27

Digital input 27. High = True.

[133] Digital input

DI29

Digital input 29. High = True.

[134] Digital input

DI32

Digital input 32. High = True.

[80]

Thermal
warning

The feedback is above the limit set in

[82]

Mains out of
range

The mains voltage is outside the

specified voltage range.

[85]

Warning

If a warning is triggered, this operand

gets the warning number.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3 3

129

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

13-10 Comparator Operand

13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

[135] Digital input

DI33

Digital input 33. High = True.

[194] Digital input

x46/2

[150] SL digital
output A

Use the result of the SLC output A.

[195] Digital input

x46/3

[151] SL digital
output B

Use the result of the SLC output B.

[196] Digital input

x46/4

[152] SL digital
output C

Use the result of the SLC output C.

[197] Digital input

x46/5

[153] SL digital
output D

Use the result of the SLC output D.

[198] Digital input

x46/6

[154] SL digital
output E

Use the result of the SLC output E.

[199] Digital input

x46/7

[155] SL digital
output F

Use the result of the SLC output F.

[160] Relay 1

Relay 1 is active

[161] Relay 2

Relay 2 is active

13-11 Comparator Operator

Array [6]

Option:

[162] Relay 3
[163] Relay 4
[164] Relay 5

[0] <

[165] Relay 6

Operand is smaller than the fixed value in

[167] Relay 8

13-12 Comparator Value. The result is FALSE, if

[168] Relay 9

to hand Auto, at the same time as the

LCP is in Hand On mode.

High when there is an active start

command, and no stop command.

[183] Drive stopped

A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,

Coast) is issued and not from the SLC
itself.

[185] Drive in hand

mode

High when the frequency converter is in

Hand mode.

[186] Drive in auto

mode

High when the frequency converter is in

Auto mode.

[191] Digital input

x30/3
[192] Digital input
x30/4
[193] Digital input
x46/1

130

parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater

or when 3-13 Reference Site is [0] Linked

[182] Start command

[190] Digital input

x30/2

the variable selected in

High when 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local

[181] Remote
High when 3-13 Reference Site= [1]
reference active Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto, while
the LCP is in Auto On mode.

[187] Start command

given

The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the

variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator

[166] Relay 7

[180] Local
referecnce
active

Function:
Select the operator to be used in the
comparison. This is an array parameter
containing comparator operators 0 to 5.

than the fixed value in 13-12 Comparator Value.

[1] (equal)

The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the

variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
Operand is approximately equal to the fixed
value in 13-12 Comparator Value.

[2] >

Inverse logic of option < [0].

[5] TRUE
longer
than..
[6] FALSE
longer
than..
[7] TRUE
shorter
than..
[8] FALSE
shorter
than..

13-12 Comparator Value

Array [6]

Range:
Size
related*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[-100000 100000 ]

Enter the trigger level for the

variable that is monitored by this
comtor. This is an array parameter
containing comtor values 0 to 5.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.14.4 13-1* RS Flip Flops

Parameter

The Reset/Set Flip Flops hold the signal until set/reset.

Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [94] RS

Event [0]
Flipflop 0

Par. 13-16
RS-FF Operand R

Notes
Output from
evaluating 13-15
and 13-16

Parameter 13-52 SL Controller

[22] Run
Action [0]

130BB959.10

Par. 13-15
RS-FF Operand S

Setting

3 3

Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [27]

Event [1]
Logicrule 1
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
[24] Stop
Action [1]

Illustration 3.50 Reset/Set Flip Flops

Table 3.23 Operators

130BB960.10

2 parameters are used and the output can be used in the

logic rules and as events.

S
R
Flip Flop Output

Illustration 3.51 Flip Flop Outputs

The 2 operators can be selected from a long list. As a

special case, the same digital input can be used as both
Set and Reset, making it possible to use the same digital
input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to
set up the same digital input as start/stop (example given
with DI32 but is not a requirement).

13-15 RS-FF Operand S

Option:
[0]

False

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

Parameter 13-00 SL Controller

On
Mode

[16]

Thermal warning

Parameter 13-01 Start Event

TRUE

[17]

Mains out of range

Parameter 13-02 Stop Event

FALSE

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

Boolean 1 [0]

[37] Digital
Input DI32

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule

Boolean 2 [0]

[2] Running

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0
Logic rule 1

Parameter

Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule

Operator 1 [0]

Setting

Notes

[3] AND
NOT

Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule

Boolean 1 [1]

[37] Digital
Input DI32

[27]

Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule

Boolean 2 [1]

[28]

Logic rule 2

[2] Running

[29]

Logic rule 3

Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule

Operator 1 [1]

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[1] AND

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

Parameter 13-15 RS-FF

Operand S [0]

[26]
Output from 13-41
Logicrule 0 [0]

[33]

Digital input DI18

[34]

Digital input DI19

Parameter 13-16 RS-FF

Operand R [0]

[27]
Output from 13-41
Logicrule 1 [1]

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:

131

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-15 RS-FF Operand S

Option:
[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

13-15 RS-FF Operand S

Function:

Option:

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[0]

False

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

13-16 RS-FF Operand R

Option:

[50]

Comparator 4

[6]

Current Limit

[51]

Comparator 5

[7]

Out of current range

[60]

Logic rule 4

[8]

Below I low

[61]

Logic rule 5

[9]

Above I high

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[10]

Out of speed range

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[11]

Below speed low

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[12]

Above speed high

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[14]

Below feedb. low

[75]

Start command given

[15]

Above feedb. high

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[16]

Thermal warning

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[17]

Mains out of range

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[18]

Reversing

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[19]

Warning

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[22]

Comparator 0

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[23]

Comparator 1

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[24]

Comparator 2

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[25]

Comparator 3

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning

[26]

Logic rule 0

[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

[27]

Logic rule 1

[92]

ATEX ETR freq. warning

[28]

Logic rule 2

[93]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

[29]

Logic rule 3

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[95]

RS Flipflop 1

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[96]

RS Flipflop 2

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[97]

RS Flipflop 3

[33]

Digital input DI18

[98]

RS Flipflop 4

[34]

Digital input DI19

[99]

RS Flipflop 5

[35]

Digital input DI27

[100] RS Flipflop 6

[36]

Digital input DI29

[101] RS Flipflop 7

[37]

Digital input DI32

[102] Relay 1

[38]

Digital input DI33

[103] Relay 2

[39]

Start command

132

Function:

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-16 RS-FF Operand R

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

13-16 RS-FF Operand R

Function:

Option:

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

Function:

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

3.14.5 13-2* Timers

Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to
define an event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
boolean input in a logic rule (see 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean
1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3).
A timer is only FALSE when started by an action (i.e. [29]
Start timer 1) until the timer value entered in this
parameter is elapsed. Then it becomes TRUE again.
All parameters in this parameter group are array
parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer 1, and so on.

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

13-20 SL Controller Timer

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

Range:

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[75]

Start command given

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning

[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

[92]

ATEX ETR freq. warning

[93]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

[95]

RS Flipflop 1

[96]

RS Flipflop 2

[97]

RS Flipflop 3

[98]

RS Flipflop 4

[99]

RS Flipflop 5

3 3

Size
related*

Function:
[0 0]

Enter the value to define the duration of

the FALSE output from the programmed
timer. A timer is only FALSE if it is started
by an action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1) and
until the given timer value has elapsed.

3.14.6 13-4* Logic Rules

Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from
timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits and events
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
boolean inputs for the calculation in 13-40 Logic Rule
Boolean 1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule
Boolean 3. Define the operators used to logically combine
the selected inputs in parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
1 and parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.

Par. 13-40
Logic Rule Boolean 1
Par. 13-42
Logic Rule Boolean 2

Par. 13-41
Logic Rule Operator 1

...
...

Par. 13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2

130BB673.10

Option:

...
...
Par. 13-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3

[100] RS Flipflop 6

Illustration 3.52 Logic Rules

[101] RS Flipflop 7
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

Priority of calculation

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

133

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

The results of 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,

parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and 13-42 Logic Rule
Boolean 2 are calculated first. The outcome (TRUE/FALSE)
of this calculation is combined with the settings of
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule
Boolean 3, yielding the final result (TRUE/FALSE) of the
logic rule.
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
Array [6]

Option:
[0]

False

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

Array [6]

Option:
[38]
[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

Function:
Select the first boolean (TRUE or
FALSE) input for the selected logic
rule.
See parameter 13-01 Start Event
([0] - [61]) and
parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] [75]) for further description.

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[50]

Comparator 4

[7]

Out of current range

[51]

Comparator 5

[8]

Below I low

[60]

Logic rule 4

[9]

Above I high

[61]

Logic rule 5

[10]

Out of speed range

[70]

SL Time-out 3
SL Time-out 4
SL Time-out 5

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

Below speed low

[71]

[12]

Above speed high

[72]

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[14]

Below feedb. low

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[15]

Above feedb. high

[75]

Start command given

[16]

Thermal warning

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[11]

Function:

Digital input DI33

[17]

Mains out of range

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[18]

Reversing

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[19]

Warning

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[22]

Comparator 0

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[23]

Comparator 1

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[24]

Comparator 2

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[25]

Comparator 3

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[26]

Logic rule 0

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[27]

Logic rule 1

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[28]

Logic rule 2

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

134

[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Selectable, ifparameter 1-90 Motor

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:
[92]

[93]

Option:

Function:

ATEX ETR freq.

warning

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[0] DISABLED

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.

[1] AND

Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42].

[2] OR

Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[3] AND NOT

Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT

[13-42].

[4] OR NOT

Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT

[13-42].

[5] NOT AND

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND

[13-42].

[6] NOT OR

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR

[13-42].

[7] NOT AND

NOT

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND

NOT [13-42].

[8] NOT OR NOT

Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT

[13-42].

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.
[94]

RS Flipflop 0

See parameter group13-1*

Comparators

[95]

See parameter group 13-1*

RS Flipflop 1

Comparators
[96]

See parameter group 13-1*

RS Flipflop 2

Comparators
[97]
[98]
[99]

Function:
Ignores 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,

See parameter group 13-1*

RS Flipflop 3
RS Flipflop 4

Comparators

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

See parameter group 13-1*

Array [6]

Comparators

Option:

See parameter group 13-1*

RS Flipflop 5

[0]

False

Comparators

parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -

Comparators

[61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop

See parameter group 13-1*

[101] RS Flipflop 7

Event ([70] - [75]) for further

description.

Comparators
[102] Relay 1

[1]

True

[103] Relay 2

[2]

Running

X47/MCB 113

[3]

In range

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[4]

On reference

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[5]

Torque limit

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[104] Relay 3

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Select the second boolean (TRUE

or FALSE) input for the selected
logic rule. See

See parameter group 13-1*

[100] RS Flipflop 6

Function:

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

Select the first logical operator to use on the

[16]

Thermal warning

Boolean inputs from 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean

[17]

Mains out of range

1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2.

[13-**] signifies the boolean input of

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control.

[20]

Alarm (trip)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

135

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[22]

Comparator 0

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[23]

Comparator 1

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[24]

Comparator 2

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[25]

Comparator 3

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[26]

Logic rule 0

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning

[27]

Logic rule 1

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[39]

Start command

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If

the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[92]

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[93]

ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

See 13-1* Comparators

[95]

RS Flipflop 1

See 13-1* Comparators

[96]

RS Flipflop 2

See 13-1* Comparators

[97]

RS Flipflop 3

See 13-1* Comparators

[98]

RS Flipflop 4

See 13-1* Comparators

[50]

Comparator 4

[99]

RS Flipflop 5

See 13-1* Comparators

[51]

Comparator 5

[100] RS Flipflop 6

See 13-1* Comparators

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[101] RS Flipflop 7

See 13-1* Comparators

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[75]

Start command given

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

136

[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Select the second logical operator to be used

on the boolean input calculated in

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,

[20]

Alarm (trip)

parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the boolean

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

[25]

Comparator 3

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

input coming from 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean

2.
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input
calculated in 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [0] Disabled
(factory setting). select this option to ignore
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[0] DISABLED
[1] AND
[2] OR
[3] AND NOT
[4] OR NOT
[5] NOT AND
[6] NOT OR
[7] NOT AND NOT
[8] NOT OR NOT

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

[34]

Digital input DI19

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

Function:

3 3

[41]

Reset Trip

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

Array [6]

[43]

Ok key

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

Select the third boolean (TRUE or

FALSE) input for the selected logic

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

rule. See parameter 13-01 Start

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

Option:
[0]

False

Function:

Event ([0] - [61]) and

parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] [75]) for further description.
[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

[16]

Thermal warning

[17]

Mains out of range

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[75]

Start command given

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[77]

Digital input x30/3

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

137

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6]

Array [6]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[103] Relay 2

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[81]

Digital input x46/5

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

[110] Relay 9

X34/MCB 105

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.
[91]

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[92]

ATEX ETR freq.

warning

[94]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

RS Flipflop 0
RS Flipflop 1

[97]
[98]

RS Flipflop 2
RS Flipflop 3
RS Flipflop 4
RS Flipflop 5

[102] Relay 1

138

[61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop

Event ([70] - [74]) for further
description.
[1]

True

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[4]

On reference

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If

the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

See parameter group 13-1*

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

See parameter group 13-1*

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

Comparators

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

See parameter group 13-1*

[16]

Thermal warning

Comparators

[17]

Mains out of range

See parameter group 13-1*

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[22]

Comparator 0

[23]

Comparator 1

[24]

Comparator 2

See parameter group 13-1*

[25]

Comparator 3

Comparators

[26]

Logic rule 0

[27]

Logic rule 1

See parameter group 13-1*

See parameter group 13-1*
Comparators

[101] RS Flipflop 7

parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -

Running

See parameter group 13-1*

Function:
Select the boolean input (TRUE or
FALSE) to define the Smart Logic
Controller event. See

In range

Comparators
[100] RS Flipflop 6

False

[3]

Comparators
[99]

Option:
[0]

[2]

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Comparators
[96]

Array [20]

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

Comparators
[95]

13-51 SL Controller Event

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[93]

3.14.7 13-5* States

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-51 SL Controller Event

13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [20]

Array [20]

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[28]

Logic rule 2

[29]

Logic rule 3

[30]

SL Time-out 0

[31]

SL Time-out 1

[32]

SL Time-out 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

[34]

Digital input DI19

ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If

the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.

[35]

Digital input DI27

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[91]

[38]

Digital input DI33

[39]

Start command

[40]

Drive stopped

[41]

Reset Trip

[42]

Auto-reset Trip

[43]

Ok key

[OK] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[44]

Reset key

[Reset] is pressed. Only available

on the graphical LCP.

[92]

[45]

Left key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[46]

Right key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[47]

Up key

[] is pressed. Only available on

the graphical LCP.

[48]

Down key

ATEX ETR cur. alarm

ATEX ETR freq.

warning

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

[70]

SL Time-out 3

[71]

SL Time-out 4

[72]

SL Time-out 5

[73]

SL Time-out 6

[74]

SL Time-out 7

[75]

Start command given

[76]

Digital input x30/2

[77]

Digital input x30/3

[78]

Digital input x30/4

[79]

Digital input x46/1

[80]

Digital input x46/3

[81]

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[93]

ATEX ETR freq. alarm

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection is set to [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.

[94]

RS Flipflop 0

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[95]

RS Flipflop 1

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[] is pressed. Only available on

[96]

RS Flipflop 2

the graphical LCP.

[50]

Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[97]

RS Flipflop 3

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[98]

RS Flipflop 4

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[99]

RS Flipflop 5

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[100] RS Flipflop 6

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[101] RS Flipflop 7

See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators

[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3

X47/MCB 113

Digital input x46/5

[105] Relay 4

X47/MCB 113

[82]

Digital input x46/7

[106] Relay 5

X47/MCB 113

[83]

Digital input x46/9

[84]

Digital input x46/11

[107] Relay 6

X47/MCB 113

[85]

Digital input x46/13

[108] Relay 7

X34/MCB 105

[90]

ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

[109] Relay 8

X34/MCB 105

Thermal Protection is set to [20]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

139

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

13-51 SL Controller Event

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Array [20]

Option:
[110] Relay 9

Function:

Option:

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Option:
[0]

DISABLED

[14] Select preset

ref 4

Selects preset reference 4.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[15] Select preset

ref 5

Selects preset reference 5.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[16] Select preset

ref 6

Selects preset reference 6.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[17] Select preset

ref 7

Selects preset reference 7.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[18] Select ramp 1

Selects ramp 1.

[19] Select ramp 2

Selects ramp 2.

[20] Select ramp 3

Selects ramp 3.

[21] Select ramp 4

Selects ramp 4.

[22] Run

Issues a start command to the frequency

converter.

[23] Run reverse

Issues a start reverse command to the

frequency converter.

Selects preset reference 0.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[24] Stop

Issues a stop command to the frequency

converter.

[25] Qstop

Issues a quick stop command to the

frequency converter.

Selects preset reference 1.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[26] Dcstop

Issues a DC stop command to the

frequency converter.

[27] Coast

The frequency converter coasts

immediately. All stop commands including
the coast command stop the SLC.

Selects preset reference 2.

If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

[28] Freeze output

Freezes the output frequency of the

frequency converter.

[29] Start timer 0

Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL

Function:
Select the action corresponding to the SLC
event. Actions are executed when the
corresponding event (defined in
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is
evaluated as true. The following actions are
available for selection:
[0] *DISABLED

[1]

No action

[2]

Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.

[3]

Select set-up 2 Changes the active set-up

parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.

[4]

Select set-up 3 Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 3.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.

[5]

Select set-up 4 Changes the active set-up

(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 4.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with
other set-up commands coming from either
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.

[10] Select preset

ref 0

[11] Select preset

ref 1

[12] Select preset

ref 2

[13] Select preset

ref 3

140

Function:
If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
inputs or via a fieldbus.

X34/MCB 105

Selects preset reference 3.

Controller Timer for further description.

[30] Start timer 1

Starts timer 1, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]

Option:
[31] Start timer 2

Function:
Starts timer 2, see parameter 13-20 SL
Controller Timer for further description.

[32] Set digital out

A low

Any output with SL output A is low.

[33] Set digital out

B low

Any output with SL output B is low.

[34] Set digital out

C low

Any output with SL output C is low.

[35] Set digital out

D low

Any output with SL output D is low.

[36] Set digital out

E low

Any output with SL output E is low.

[37] Set digital out

F low

Any output with SL output F is low.

[38] Set digital out

A high

Any output with SL output A is high.

[39] Set digital out

B high

Any output with SL output B is high.

[40] Set digital out

C high

Any output with SL output C is high.

[41] Set digital out

D high

Any output with SL output D is high.

[42] Set digital out

E high

Any output with SL output E is high.

[43] Set digital out

F high

Any output with SL output F is high.

[60] Reset Counter

A

Resets Counter A to zero.

[61] Reset Counter

B

Resets Counter B to zero.

[70] Start timer 3

3 3

Start Timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[71] Start timer 4

Start Timer 4, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[72] Start timer 5

Start Timer 5, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[73] Start timer 6

Start Timer 6, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

[74] Start timer 7

Start Timer 7, see parameter 13-20 SL

Controller Timer for further description.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

141

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions

NOTICE

3.15.1 14-0* Inverter Switching

The output frequency value of the frequency converter

must never exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency.
When the motor is running, adjust the switching
frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency to
minimise motor noise.

14-00 Switching Pattern

Option:

Function:
Select the switching pattern: 60 AVM or SFAVM.

[0]

60 AVM

NOTICE
To avoid a trip, the frequency converter can adapt the
switching frequency automatically.

[1] * SFAVM

NOTICE
The switching pattern may be automatically adapted by
the frequency converter in order to avoid a trip. See
application note on derating for more details.

14-03 Overmodulation
Option:
[0]

Off

14-01 Switching Frequency

Select the converter switching frequency. Changing the switching
frequency can reduce acoustic noise from the motor. Default
values depend on power size.

Option:

Function:

[0]

1.0 kHz

[1]

1.5 kHz

Default switching frequency for

355-1200 kW [500-1600 hp], 690
V

[2]

2.0 kHz

Default switching frequency for

250-800 kW [350-1075 hp], 400 V
and 37-315 kW [50-450 hp], 690
V

[3]

2.5 kHz

[4]

3.0 kHz

[5]

3.5 kHz

[6]

4.0 kHz

[7]

5.0 kHz

[8]

6.0 kHz

[9]

7.0 kHz

[10]

8.0 kHz

[11]

10.0 kHz

[12]

12.0kHz

[13]

14.0 kHz

[14]

16.0kHz

142

[1] * On

Default switching frequency for

18.5-37 kW [25-50 hp], 200 V and
37-200 kW [50-300 hp], 400 V

Function:
Select [0] Off for no overmodulation of the output
voltage, to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft.
This feature may be useful for applications such as
grinding machines.
Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function
for the output voltage. This is the right choice when it
is required that the output voltage is higher than 95%
of the input voltage (typical when running oversynchronously). The output voltage is increased
according to the degree of overmodulation.

NOTICE
Overmodulation leads to increased torque
ripple as harmonics are increased.
Control in FLUX mode provides an output current of
up to 98% of the input current, regardless of
parameter 14-03 Overmodulation.

14-04 PWM Random

Option: Function:

Default switching frequency for

5.515 kW [7.5-20 hp], 200 V and
11-30 kW [15-40], 400 V

[0]

Off

No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.

[1]

On

Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a

clear ringing tone to a less noticeable white noise. This
is achieved by slightly and randomly altering the
synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
phases.

Default switching frequency for

0.253,7 kW [0.34-5 hp], 200 V
and 0.37-7.5 kW [0.5-10 hp], 400
V

14-06 Dead Time Compensation

Option:

Function:

[0]

Off

No compensation.

[1] *

On

Activates dead time compensation.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.15.2 14-1* Mains On/Off

14-10 Mains Failure

Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and

handling. If a mains failure appears, the frequency
converter tries to continue in a controlled way until the
power in the DC link has been exhausted.

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

Option:

14-10 Mains Failure

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

Option:

Function:
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is typically used
where very short mains interruptions (voltage
dips) are present. At 100% load and a short
voltage interruption, the DC voltage on the main
capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency
converters it only takes a few milliseconds before
the DC level is down to about 373 V DC and the
IGBTs cut off and looses the control over the
motor. When mains is restored, and the IGBTs
start again, the output frequency and voltage
vector does not correspond to the speed/
frequency of the motor, and the result is
normally an overvoltage or overcurrent, mostly

Limitation:
See the introduction text in
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
[2]

Ctrl.
rampdown,
trip

Select the function to which the frequency

Coasting

Centrifuges can run for an hour without power

supply. In those situations, it is possible to select
a coast function at mains interruption, together
with a flying start which occurs when the mains
is restored.

[4]

Kinetic
back-up

Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency

converter keeps running as long as there is
energy in the system due to the inertia from
motor and load. This is done by converting the
mechanical energy to the DC-link and thereby
maintaining control of the frequency converter
and motor. This can extend the controlled
operation, depending on the inertia in the
system. For fans it is typically several seconds, for
pumps up to 2 seconds and for compressors only
for a fraction of a second. Many industry
applications can extend controlled operation for
many seconds, which is often enough time for
the mains to return.

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault has

been reached.

NOTICE
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure cannot be
changed while motor is running.

[1]

No
function

Ctrl.
rampdown

Limitation:
See the introduction text in

[3]

converter must act when the threshold in

[0]

This selection is similar to selection [1] except

that in [2] a reset is necessary for starting up
after power-up.

parameter 14-10 Mains Failure

resulting in a trip lock. Parameter 14-10 Mains

Failure can be programmed to avoid this
situation.

Function:
the output frequency all the way down to 0 RPM,
and when the mains is restored, the application
is ramped up from 0 RPM to the previous
reference speed via the normal ramp up). If the
energy in the DC-link disappears before the
motor is ramped to zero, the motor is coasted.

The frequency converter does not compensate

for a mains interruption. The voltage on the DC
link drops quickly and motor control is lost
within milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the
result.
The frequency converter remains control of the
motor and does a controlled ramp down from
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
level. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [0] Off or

UDC [V]

A B C

DE

UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM]
Ref

Resistor Brake the ramp follows the setting in

parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. This
selection is particularly useful in pump
applications, where the inertia is low and the
friction is high. When mains is restored, the
output frequency ramps the motor up to the
reference speed (if the mains interruption is
prolonged, the controlled ramp down might take

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

t [S]

t [S]

[2] AC brake, the ramp follows the Overvoltage

Ramping. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [1]

130BC918.10

Parameter Descriptions

A Normal operation
B Mains failure
C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return
E Normal Operation: ramping
Illustration 3.53 Kinetick Back-up

143

3 3

14-10 Mains Failure

14-10 Mains Failure

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque

is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

Option:

Option:

Function:

Function:

The DC-level during [4] Kinetic back-up is

UDC [V]

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault *

1.35.
If the mains do not return UDC is maintained as

130BC920.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

790 V

UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM]

long as possible by ramping the speed down

towards 0 RPM. Finally the frequency converter
coasts.

t [S]

Ref

t [S]

If the mains return while in kinetic, back-up UDC

increases above parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at

A Normal Operation

Mains Fault*1.35. This is detected in one of the

following ways.

B Mains failure

1.

C Kinetic back-up
D Trip

If UDC > parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage

at Mains Fault*1.35*1.05

2.

Illustration 3.54 Kinetic Back-up Trip

If the speed is above the reference. This

is relevant if the mains come back at a
lower level than before, e.g.

Limitation:
See the introduction text in

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains

Fault*1.35*1.02. This does not fulfil the
criterion in point one and the frequency
converter tries to reduce UDC to

[6]

Alarm

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains

[7]

Kin.
back-up,
trip w
recovery

Fault*1.35 by increasing the speed. This

will not succeed as the mains cannot be
lowered.
3.

[5]

144

Kinetic
back-up,
trip

parameter 14-10 Mains Failure

If running motoric. The same

mechanism as in point 2, but where the
inertia prevents that the speed goes
above the reference speed. This leads to
the motor running motoric until the
speed is above the reference speed and
the situation in point 2 occurs. Instead
of waiting for that criterion 3 is
introduced.

The difference between kinetic back-up with and

without trip is that the latter always ramps down
to 0 RPM and trip, regardless of whether mains
return or not.
The function does not detect if mains return. This
is the reason for the relatively high level on the
DC-link during ramp down.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the

features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
with trip, based on a recovery speed, configurable in parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level to enable detection of mains
returning. If mains do not return, the frequency
converter ramps down to 0 RPM and trips. If
mains return while in kinetic back-up at a speed
above the value in parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup
Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is resumed.
This is equal to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The DC-level
during [7] Kinetic back-up is
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault*
1,35.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

14-10 Mains Failure

14-10 Mains Failure

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque

Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque

is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.

UDC[V]

UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM]
Ref
14-15

t [S]

Function:

130BC922.10

Option:
A B C DA

UDC [V]
UDC

UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM]

3 3

130BC924.10

Function:

t [s]

Ref

t [S]
0

t [s]

A Normal Operation
B Mains failure

Normal Operation

C Kinetic back-up

Mains failure

D Mains return

Kinetic back-up

E Normal operation: ramping

Mains return

Illustration 3.55 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with

recovery where mains return above
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery
Level.

Kinetic back-up ramping to trip

Trip

Illustration 3.57 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with

recovery where mains return below
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery
Level. In this illustration a quick ramp is used.

If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a

speed below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level the frequency converter ramps
down to 0 RPM using the ramp and then trips. If
the ramp is slower than the system ramps down
on its own, the ramping is done motoric and UDC

Limitation:
See the introduction text in
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure

is at the normal level (UDC, m*1.35).

UDC[V]

A B C D

UDC
14-11*1.35
n [RPM]
Ref
0

130BC923.10

Option:

t [S]

t [S]

A Normal Operation
B Mains failure
C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip
F Trip
Illustration 3.56 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with
recovery, trip slow ramp where mains return
below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level. In this illustration a slow ramp
is used.

If the ramp is quicker than the systems ramp

down on, the ramping is done generatoric. This
results in a higher UDC which is limited using the
brake chopper/resistor brake.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

145

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level

Range:

Range:

Size
related*

Function:

parameter 0-02 Motor Speed

Unit.

[180 - This parameter defines the threshold voltage

600 V] at which the selected function in 14-10 Mains
Failure should be activated. It may be
considered to select 90% of the nominal
mains as the detection level, depending on

3 3

the supply quality. For a supply of 380 V

parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault
should thus be set to 342 V. This results in a
DC detection level of 462 V
(parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

3.15.3 14-16 Kin. Backup Gain

14-16 Kin. Backup Gain
Range:
100 %*

* 1.35)

NOTICE
Note for converting between VLT 5000
and FC 300:
Even though the setting of the Mains
Voltage at Mains Fault is the same for
VLT 5000 and FC 300, the detection
level is different. Use the following
formula to obtain the same detection
level as in VLT 5000:
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at
Mains Fault (VLT 5000 level) = Value
used in VLT 5000 * 1,35/sqrt(2).

14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance

Operation under severe main imbalance conditions reduces the
lifetime of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the
motor is operated continuously near nominal load (e.g. a pump
or fan running near full speed).

Option:
Trip

Select [0] Manual reset, to perform a

reset via [Reset] or via the digital
inputs.

[1]

Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1

Automatic reset x 1

x20 to perform between one and 20

automatic resets after tripping.

Trips the frequency

converter

Automatic reset x 5

[6]

Automatic reset x 6

[7]

Automatic reset x 7

[8]

Automatic reset x 8

[9]

Automatic reset x 9

[10] Automatic reset x 10

14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out

[11] Automatic reset x 15

Function:
This parameter defines the Kinetic Backup Time
Out in flux mode when running on low voltage
grids. If the supply voltage does not increase
above the value defined in 14-11 Mains Voltage
at Mains Fault +5% within the specified time, the
drive will then automatically run a controlled
ramp-down profile before stopping.

14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level

146

[0] * Manual reset

Automatic reset x 4

No action

Function:
Select the reset function after
tripping. Once reset, the frequency
converter can be restarted.

[5]

Disabled

Function:
[ 0 - 60000.000
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

Option:

Automatic reset x 3

[2]

Range:

14-20 Reset Mode

[4]

Issues a warning

Size
related*

Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip

handling and control card self test or initialisation.

Automatic reset x 2

Warning

[0 - 60
s]

3.15.4 14-2* Trip Reset

[3]

[1]

Range:

Function:
[0 - 500 %] Enter the Kinetic Backup Gain value in
percent.

[2]

Function:

[0] *

60 s*

Function:

This parameter specifies the

Kinetic Backup Trip Recovery
Level. The unit is defined in

[12] Automatic reset x 20

[13] Infinite auto reset

Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for

continuous resetting after tripping.

[14] Reset at power-up

NOTICE
The motor may start without warning. If the specified
number of AUTOMATIC RESETs is reached within 10
minutes, the frequency converter enters [0] Manual reset
mode. After the Manual reset is performed, the setting
of 14-20 Reset Mode reverts to the original selection. If
the number of automatic resets is not reached within 10
minutes, or when a Manual reset is performed, the
internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns to zero.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

14-22 Operation Mode

Option:

Function:
If the test is OK
LCP read-out: Control Card OK.
Disconnect the mains supply and remove the
test plug. The green LED on the Control Card
lights up.

14-21 Automatic Restart Time

Range:
10 s*

Function:

[0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of

the automatic reset function. This parameter

If the test fails

LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure.
Replace the frequency converter or Control
card. The red LED on the Control Card is
turned on. Test plugs (connect the following
terminals to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 33; 42 - 53 - 54

is active when 14-20 Reset Mode is set to [1] [13] Automatic reset.

NOTICE
Remember to set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) as
specified below when performing a control card test in
parameter 14-22 Operation Mode [1]. Otherwise, the test
fails.

12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37

FC 302

130BA097.12

Automatic reset is also active for resetting Safe Torque

Off function in firmware version < 4.3x.

14-22 Operation Mode

Option:

Function:
12 13 18 19 27

Use this parameter to specify normal

operation; to perform tests; or to initialise all

32 33 20

FC 301

parameters except parameter 15-03 Power Up's,

parameter 15-04 Over Temp's and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is
active only when the power is cycled to the
frequency converter.

39 42 50 53 54 55

Select [0] Normal operation for normal

operation of the frequency converter with the
motor in the selected application.

Illustration 3.58 Test Plugs

Select [1] Control card test to test the analog

and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V
control voltage. The test requires a test
connector with internal connections. Use the
following procedure for the control card test:
1.

Select [1] Control card test.

2.

Disconnect the mains supply and

wait for the light in the display to go
out.

3.
4.

values to default settings, except for

parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's, and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency
converter resets during the next power-up.
Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also reverts to
the default setting [0] Normal operation.
[0]

Normal
operation

(A54) = ON/I.

[1]

Control
card test

[2]

Initialisation

[3]

Boot mode

Insert the test plug (see

5.

Connect to mains supply.

6.

Carry out various tests.

7.

The results are displayed on the LCP

and the frequency converter moves
into an infinite loop.

8.

Select [2] Initialisation to reset all parameter

Set switches S201 (A53) and S202

Illustration 3.58).

Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is

automatically set to Normal
operation. Carry out a power cycle to
start up in Normal operation after a
control card test.

FC 301 &
FC 302

14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

Range:
60 s*

[0 60 s]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Enter the current limit trip delay in seconds. When
the output current reaches the current limit
(parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is
triggered. When the current limit warning has
been continuously present for the period specified
in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
run continuously in current limit without tripping,

147

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.15.5 14-3* Current Limit Control

14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

Range:

Function:
set the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal
monitoring of the frequency converter still remains
active.

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

Range:
60 s*

Function:

[0 60 s]

Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When

the output torque reaches the torque limits
(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a
warning is triggered. When the torque limit
warning has been continuously present for the
period specified in this parameter, the frequency
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting
the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal monitoring
of the frequency converter still remains active.

14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0 - 35
s]

When the frequency converter detects

an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time.
If value = 0, protection mode is disabled

The frequency converter features an integral Current Limit

Controller, which is activated when the motor current, and
thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to
reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as
possible without losing control of the motor.
While the current control is active, the frequency converter
can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signals on terminals
18 to 33 are not active until thefrequency converter is no
longer near the current limit.
By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast
and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down
time, since the frequency converter is coasted. If a quick
stop is necessary, use the mechanical brake control
function along with an external electro-mechanical brake
attached to the application.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain
Range:
100 %*

NOTICE
It is recommended to disable
protection mode in hoisting
applications.

Function:
[0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
current limit controller. Selection of a high
value makes the controller react faster. Too
high a setting leads to controller
instability.

14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time

Range:

14-28 Production Settings

Range:
0*

[Service reset]
Set Production Mode

14-29 Service Code

Range:
0*

Size related*

[No action]

1
[2]

Function:

[-2147483647 - 2147483647 ]

Function:
[0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
integration time. Setting it to a
lower value makes it react faster. A
setting too low leads to control
instability.

14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

Function:
For internal service only.

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[1 100 ms]

Controls the current limit control low-pass

filter.
This makes it possible to react to peak
values or to average values. When
selecting average values it is sometimes
possible to run with higher output current
and in stead trip on the hardware limit for
current. However, the control reacts slower
as it does not react on immediate values.

14-35 Stall Protection

Option:

Function:
Parameter 14-35 Stall Protection is active in Flux
mode only.

148

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

NOTICE

14-35 Stall Protection

Option:
[0]

Function:

Disabled Disables stall protection in field-weakening flux

mode and might cause the motor to be lost.

[1] * Enabled

Enables stall protection in field-weakening flux

mode.

This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor

Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency
Range:
10 Hz*

14-36 Fieldweakening Function

Select the field weakening function mode in Flux mode.

Range:
0*

Function:

[Auto] In this mode, the frequency converter calculates the

optimal torque output.
Measured DC-link voltage determines the phase-tophase motor voltage. Magnetising reference is
based on the actual voltage and utilises the
information about the model of the motor.

[1/x]

The frequency converter reduces torque output.

The frequency converter sets the magnetising
reference inversely proportional to the speed using
a static curve that represents the relationship
between DC-link voltage and the speed.

3 3

Function:
[5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the
Automatic Energy Optimisation (AEO) is to
be active.

NOTICE
This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
14-43 Motor Cosphi
Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[0.40 0.95 ]

The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set

for optimum AEO performance. This
parameter should normally not be
altered. However in some situations it
may be necessary to enter a new value
to fine-tune.

3.15.6 14-4* Energy Optimising

Parameters for adjusting the energy optimisation level in
both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic Energy Optimisation (AEO) mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics.
14-40 VT Level
Range:
66 %*

These parameters help the frequency converter to operate

under special environmental conditions.
14-50 RFI Filter

Function:

[40 - 90
%]

3.15.7 14-5* Environment

This parameter is available for FC 302 only. It is not relevant to

FC 301 due to different design and shorter motor cables.

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.

Option: Function:
[0]

Off

If a filter is used, select [0] Off during charging to

prevent a high leakage current making the RCD switch.
In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between
chassis and the mains RFI filter circuit are cut-out to
reduce the ground capacity currents.

Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low

speed. Selection of a low value reduces
energy loss in the motor, but also reduces
load capability.

NOTICE

Select [0] Off if the frequency converter is fed by an

isolated mains source (IT mains).

[1]

On

This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor

Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.

Select [1] On to ensure that the frequency converter

complies with EMC standards.

14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[40 - 75
%]

Enter the minimum allowable magnetisation for AEO. Selection of a low value
reduces energy loss in the motor, but
can also reduce resistance to sudden
load changes.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

149

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

130BB908.10

Parameter Descriptions

14-52 Fan Control

Select minimum speed of the main fan.

Option:

Function:
environments and prevent the negative effects of
this further cooling and avoid warning 66.

3 3

14-53 Fan Monitor

Option:

Function:
Select which reaction the frequency converter
should take in case a fan fault is detected.

Illustration 3.59 RFI Filter

[0] Disabled
[1] Warning

14-51 DC Link Compensation

[2] Trip

Option: Function:
The rectified AC-DC voltage at the frequency
converter's DC link is associated with voltage ripples.
These ripples can increase in magnitude with increased
load. These ripples are undesirable because they can
generate current and torque ripples. A compensation
method is used to reduce these voltage ripples at DC
link. In general, DC link compensation is recommended
for most applications, but care must be taken when
operating in field weakening as it can generate speed
oscillations at the motor shaft. In field weakening, it is
recommended to turn DC link compensation off.
[0]

Off

Disables DC Link Compensation.

[1]

On

Enables DC Link Compensation.

14-55 Output Filter

Option:

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
motor is running.
Select the type of output filter connected.
[0]
*

[1]

No
Filter

This is the default setting and should be used with

dU/dt filters or high-frequency common-mode (HFCM) filters.

SineWave
Filter

This setting is only for backwards compatibility. It

enables operation with FLUX control principle when

Select minimum speed of the main fan.

Option:

Function:
Select [0] Auto to run fan only when internal
temperature in frequency converter is in range
35 C to approx. 55 C.
Fan runs at low speed below 35 C, and at full

[2]

SineWave
Filter
Fixed

speed at approx. 55 C.
[1]

On 50%

The fan always runs at 50% speed or above. The

fan runs at 50% speed at 35 C, and at full speed
at approx. 55 C.

[2]

On 75%

The fan always runs at 75% speed or above. The

fan runs at 75% speed at 35 C, and at full speed
at approx. 55 C.

This parameter sets a minimum allowed limit to the

switching frequency and ensures that the filter is
operated within the safe range of switching
frequencies. Operation is possible with all control
principles. For FLUX control principle the parameters
parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter have to be
programmed (these parameters have no effect in
VVCplus and U/f). The modulation pattern is set to
SFAVM which gives the lowest acoustic noise in the
filter.
Note:
Reset the frequency converter after selecting [2]

[3]

On
100%

The fan runs at 100% speed always.

[4]

Auto
(Low
temp
env.)

This selection is the same as [0] Auto but with

Sine-Wafe Filter Fixed.

special considerations around and below 0C. In

selection [0] Auto there is a risk that the fan
starts running around 0 C as the frequency
converter detects a sensor fault and thus protect
the frequency converter while reporting warning
66 "Heatsink Temperature Low". Selection [4]
Auto (Low temp env.) can be used in very cold

150

the parameters parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output

Filter and parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter
are programmed with the output filter capacitance
and inductance. It DOES NOT limit the range of the
switching frequency.

14-52 Fan Control

[0] * Auto

Function:

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

CAUTION
Always set parameter 14-55 Output Filter to
[2] Sine-wave fixed when using a sine-wave
filter. Failure to do so can result in
overheating of the frequency converter,
which can result in personal injury and
equipment damage.

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.15.9 14-8* Options

14-56 Capacitance Output Filter

Compensation function of the LC-filter requires the per phase
equivalent star-connected capacitance of the filter (3 times the
capacity between 2 phases when capacitance is Delta
connection).

Range:
Size related*

Set the capacitance of the output

filter. The value can be found on the
filter label.

This is required for correct

compensation in Flux mode
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle)

No

Range:

Set the inductance of the output filter.

The value can be found on the filter
label.

NOTICE
This is required for correct
compensation in Flux mode
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control
Principle)

14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units

Range:

Function:
[1 - 1 ]

[1] * Yes Select [1] Yes if an external 24 V DC supply is used to

power the option. Inputs/Outputs are galvanically
isolated from the frequency converter when operated
from an external supply.

NOTICE
This parameter is only changing function by performing
a power cycle.

Range:

Function:
[0.001 65 mH]

Function:
Select [0] No to use the frequency converter's 24 V DC
supply.

14-88 Option Data Storage

14-57 Inductance Output Filter

Size related*

Option:
[0]

Function:
[0.1 - 6500
uF]

NOTICE

Size
related*

14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC

Set the actual number of power units.

0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] This parameter stores options data over a

power cycle.

14-89 Option Detection

Selects the behaviour of the frequency converter when a change
in the option configuration is detected.

Option:

Function:

[0] * Protect Option

Config.

Freezes the current settings and

prevents unwanted changes when
missing or defective options are
detected.

[1]

Changes frequency converter settings

and is used when modifying the
system configuration. This parameter

Enable Option
Change

setting returns to [0] Protect Option

Config. after an Option Change.

3.15.8 14-7* Compatibility

The parameters in this group are for setting of compatibility for VLT 3000, VLT 5000 to FC 300.

Use this parameter to customise fault levels.

Option:

14-72 VLT Alarm Word

Option:

14-90 Fault Level

[0] Off

Function:

[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the alarm word corresponding to

VLT 5000.

[1] Warning
[2] Trip

14-73 VLT Warning Word

Option:

Function:

14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word

0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] Read out the ext. status word

corresponding to VLT 5000

Changing a fault level from default option

[3] Trip Lock to [2] Trip leads to the
automatic reset of the alarm. For alarms
involving over-current, the frequency
converter has a hardware protection that
issues a 3 minute recovery after 2
consecutive over-current incidents, this
hardware protection cannot be overruled.

[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the warning word corresponding

to VLT 5000.

Range:

Function:
Use [0] Off with caution as it ignores all
Warnings & Alarms for the selected source.

[3] Trip Lock

[4] Trip w.
delayed reset

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

151

3 3

3 3

Parameter Descriptions

Failure

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Alarm

Off

Warning

24 V low

47

1.8 V supply low

48

Voltage limit

64

10 V low

Trip

Trip Lock
D
D

Earth fault during ramping

14

Earth fault 2 during cont. operation

45

Torque Limit

12

Over Current

13

Short Circuit

16

Heatsink temperature

29

Heatsink sensor

39

Control card temperature

65

Power card temperature

69

Heatsink

temperature1)

Heatsink sensor 1)
Power card temperature
Motor phase missing
Locked rotor

1)

244

245

30-32

99

2)

247

Table 3.24 Selection of Choice of Action when Selected Alarm Appears

D = Default setting
x = possible selection
1) Only high power drives
2) In small and medium power frequency converters A69 is only a warning

152

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information

15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter

Option:

3.16.1 15-0* Operating Data

[1]

15-00 Operating hours

Range:
0 h*

[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency

converter has run. The value is saved
when the frequency converter is
turned off.

Range:

View how many hours the motor has

run. Reset the counter in 15-07 Reset
Running Hours Counter. The value is
saved when the frequency converter is
turned off.

0 kWh*

Array [4]

Function:
[0 2147483647
kWh]

Registering the power consumption of

the motor as a mean value over one

15-03 Power Up's

Range:

Function:

Readout: actual setup

[1473] Legacy Warning Word

[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word
[1600] Control Word

[1603] Status Word

[1610] Power [kW]
[1611] Power [hp]
[1612] Motor Voltage

15-05 Over Volt's

0*

None

[15]

[1602] Reference %

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter

temperature faults which have occurred.

Range:

[0] *

[1601] Reference [Unit]

15-04 Over Temp's

0*

[1613] Frequency

Function:

[1614] Motor current

[0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter

overvoltages which have occurred.

[1616] Torque [Nm]

[1617] Speed [RPM]
[1618] Motor Thermal

15-06 Reset kWh Counter

[1621] Torque [%] High Res.

Option:

[1622] Torque [%]

[0] Do not reset

Function:
No reset of the kWh counter is desired.

[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter).

[1625] Torque [Nm] High

[1630] DC Link Voltage
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min

The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].

15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
[0] * Do not
reset

[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance

[1632] Brake Energy /s

NOTICE

Option:

Function:
Select which variables
are to be logged.

[1472] Legacy Alarm Word

[0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency

converter has been powered up.

Range:

Option:

hour. Reset the counter in

parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter.

0*

The Data Log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data

sources (15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
(parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
(15-12 Trigger Event) and window (15-14 Samples Before
Trigger) are used to start and stop the logging
conditionally.
15-10 Logging Source

15-02 kWh Counter

Range:

Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the

Running Hours counter is desired.

3.16.2 15-1* Data Log Settings

Function:

[0 - 2147483647
h]

Select [1] Reset and press [OK] to reset the

Running Hours counter to zero (see
parameter 15-01 Running Hours). This
parameter cannot be selected via the serial
port, RS-485.

Function:

15-01 Running Hours

0 h*

Reset
counter

Function:

Function:

[1634] Heatsink Temp.

[1635] Inverter Thermal
[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
[1650] External Reference
[1651] Pulse Reference
[1652] Feedback[Unit]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

153

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

15-10 Logging Source

15-12 Trigger Event

Array [4]

Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a

window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the

Option:

Function:

[1657] Feedback [RPM]

trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger).

[1660] Digital Input

Option:

[1662] Analog Input 53

Function:

[1664] Analog Input 54

[20]

Alarm (trip)

[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]

[21]

Alarm (trip lock)

[1666] Digital Output [bin]

[22]

Comparator 0

[1675] Analog In X30/11

[23]

Comparator 1

[1676] Analog In X30/12

[24]

Comparator 2

[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

[25]

Comparator 3

[1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

[26]

Logic rule 0

[1690] Alarm Word

[27]

Logic rule 1

[1692] Warning Word

[28]

Logic rule 2

[1694] Ext. Status Word

[29]

Logic rule 3

[1860] Digital Input 2

[33]

Digital input DI18

[3110] Bypass Status Word

[34]

Digital input DI19

[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1

[35]

Digital input DI27

[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2

[36]

Digital input DI29

[37]

Digital input DI32

[38]

Digital input DI33

[50]

Comparator 4

[51]

Comparator 5

[60]

Logic rule 4

[61]

Logic rule 5

15-11 Logging Interval

Array [4]

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0.000 0.000 ]

Enter the interval in milliseconds

between each sampling of the
variables to be logged.

15-13 Logging Mode

Option:

15-12 Trigger Event

Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the

Select [0] Log always for continuous logging.

[1] Log once on

trigger

start and stop logging using 15-12 Trigger

trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger).

Option:

Function:

[0] Log always

Select [1] Log once on trigger to conditionally

Event and 15-14 Samples Before Trigger.

Function:

15-14 Samples Before Trigger

[0] *

False

[1]

True

[2]

Running

[3]

In range

[4]

On reference

log. See also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and

parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.

[5]

Torque limit

[6]

Current Limit

[7]

Out of current range

[8]

Below I low

[9]

Above I high

[10]

Out of speed range

[11]

Below speed low

[12]

Above speed high

[13]

Out of feedb. range

[14]

Below feedb. low

[15]

Above feedb. high

[16]

Thermal warning

[17]

Mains out of range

[18]

Reversing

[19]

Warning

154

Range:
50*

[0 100 ]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
Enter the percentage of all samples before a
trigger event which are to be retained in the

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.16.3 15-2* Historic Log

15-21 Historic Log: Value

View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters

in this parameter group. For all parameters in the group,
[0] is the most recent data and [49] the oldest data. Data is
logged every time an event occurs (not to be confused
with SLC events). Events in this context are defined as a
change in one of the following areas
1.

Digital input

2.

Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW release)

3.

Warning word

4.

Alarm word

5.

Status word

6.

Control word

7.

Extended status word

Array [50]

Range:

Status word

Extended
status word

View the event type of the logged events.

Array [50]

Range:
[0 2147483647 ]

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-94 Ext.
Status Word for
description.

15-22 Historic Log: Time

Array [50]

Range:
0 ms*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged

ms]
event occurred. Time is measured in
ms since frequency converter start. The
max. value corresponds to approx. 24
days which means that the count
restarts at zero after this time period.

Function:

15-21 Historic Log: Value

0*

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-00 Control
Word for description.

Array [50]
[0 - 255 ]

3 3

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-03 Status
Word for description after
converting to binary
value.

15-20 Historic Log: Event

0*

Decimal value. See

16-90 Alarm Word for
description.

Control word

Events are logged with value, and time stamp in ms. The
time interval between 2 events depends on how often
events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this
parameter via the serial communication port or via the
display.

Range:

Function:
Alarm word

Function:
View the value of the logged event.
Interpret the event values according to this
table:
Digtal input

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-60 Digital
Input for description after
converting to binary
value.

Digital output
(not
monitored in
this SW
release)

Decimal value. See

parameter 16-66 Digital
Output [bin] for
description after
converting to binary
value.

Warning word Decimal value. See

3.16.4 15-3* Alarm Log

Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to
10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the most recent logged
data, and [9] the oldest. Error codes, values, and time
stamp can be viewed for all logged data.
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code
Array [10]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 255 ] View the error code and look up its meaning in

chapter 5 Troubleshooting.

15-31 Alarm Log: Value

Array [10]

Range:
0*

Function:

[-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.

This parameter is mostly used in
combination with alarm 38 internal
fault.

16-92 Warning Word for

description.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

155

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

15-32 Alarm Log: Time

15-47 Power Card Ordering No

Array [10]

Range:

Range:
0 s*

3 3

0*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event

occurred. Time is measured in seconds
from frequency converter start-up.

[0 - 8 ]

Range:

15-40 FC Type
0*

[0 - 6 ] View the frequency converter type. The read-out is

identical to the FC 300 Series power field of the
type code definition, characters 1-6.

Range:

Function:

[0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for re-ordering the

frequency converter in its original configuration.

Range:

15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number

Range:

Range:

View the frequency converter serial number.

15-53 Power Card Serial Number

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 19 ]

Size related*

View the power card serial number.

Function:
[0 - 20 ] Shows the currently used smart
application setup filename.

15-59 CSIV Filename

Function:
[0 - 16 ] Shows the currently used CSIV
(Costumer Specific Initial Values)
filename.

This read-only parameter group contains information about

the hardware and software configuration of the options
installed in slots A, B, C0 and C1.

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for reordering the frequency converter in its original
configuration.

[0 - 30 ]

Function:
View the installed option type.

15-61 Option SW Version

Array [8]

Range:
0*

156

Function:

[0 - 10 ]

Array [8]

View the actual type code string.

15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No

0*

View the power card software version number.

15-60 Option Mounted

Function:

[0 - 40 ]

Function:

[0 - 20 ]

3.16.6 15-6* Option Ident.

Function:

15-45 Actual Typecode String

0*

0*

[0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package

version) consisting of power SW and control SW.

15-44 Ordered Typecode String

0*

15-50 SW ID Power Card

Size related*

Function:

Range:

View the control card software version number.

Range:

15-43 Software Version

0*

Function:

[0 - 20 ]

Range:

Function:

[0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the

FC 300 Series power field of the type code
definition, characters 11-12.

Range:

View the LCP ID number.

15-58 Smart Setup Filename

15-42 Voltage
0*

Range:
0*

0*

[0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the

FC 300 Series power field of the type code
definition, characters 7-10.

Range:

[0 - 20 ]

Range:

Function:

15-41 Power Section

0*

Function:

15-49 SW ID Control Card

Parameters containing read only information about the

hardware and software configuration of the frequency
converter.
Range:

View the power card ordering number.

15-48 LCP Id No
0*

3.16.5 15-4* Drive Identification

Function:

[0 - 20 ]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
View the installed option software version.

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

15-62 Option Ordering No

15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Array [8]

Range:

Range:
0*

0*

Function:

[0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed

options.

[0 - 18 ]

Function:

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 2147483647
h]

View the installed option serial number.

15-70 Option in Slot A

Range:
0 h*

Function:

[0 - 99999
h]

Function:

Range:
0*

Array [1000]

Function:

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot B.

15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0

Range:
0*

3.16.7 15-9* Parameter Info

15-92 Defined Parameters

15-73 Slot B Option SW Version

0*

Range:
0*

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot C, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string CXXXX the translation is
No option.

Range:

Function:

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot C.

Range:

[0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the

frequency converter. The list ends with 0.

Array [1000]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been

changed from their default setting. The list
ends with 0. Changes may not be visible until
up to 30 s after implementation.

15-98 Drive Identification

Range:
0*

15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1

0*

Function:

15-93 Modified Parameters

Function:

15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version

0*

NOTICE
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string BX the translation is No
option.

Range:

Function:

[0 - 65535 ]

15-72 Option in Slot B

0*

Hours counter, see parameter 15-80 Fan

15-89 Configuration Change Counter

[0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed

in slot A.

Range:

Enter value to preset the Fan Running

Running Hours.
This parameter cannot be selected via the
serial port, RS-485.

15-71 Slot A Option SW Version

0*

View how many hours the heatsink

fan has run (increments for each
hour). The value is saved when the
frequency converter is turned off.

15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed

in slot A, and a translation of the type code
string. E.g. for type code string AX the translation
is No option.

Range:

3 3

15-80 Fan Running Hours

0 h*

Array [8]

Range:

[0 - 20 ] Displays the software version for the installed

option in option slot C.

Range:

15-63 Option Serial No

0*

Function:

Function:

[0 - 40 ] This parameter contains data that is used by the

MCT 10 Set-up Software.

Function:

[0 - 30 ] Displays the type code string for the option in

slot C1. (CXXXX if no option) and the translation
i.e. >No option<.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

157

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

15-99 Parameter Metadata

Array [30]

Range:
0*

3 3

158

Function:

[0 - 9999 ] This parameter contains data used by the MCT

10 Set-up Software.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs

16-00 Control Word
Range:
0*

3.17.1 16-1* Motor Status

16-10 Power [kW]

Function:

Range:

[0 - 65535 ] View the Control word sent from the

frequency converter via the serial communication port in hex code.

0 kW*

Function:

[0 10000
kW]

16-01 Reference [Unit]

Range:

Function:

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

[-999999 - 999999 View the present

ReferenceFeedreference value applied
backUnit]

on impulse or analog
basis in the unit
resulting from the
configuration selected in
1-00 Configuration Mode
(Hz, Nm, or RPM).

16-11 Power [hp]

Range:
0 hp*

Function:

[0 10000 hp]

16-02 Reference [%]

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[-200 - 200
%]

View the total reference. The total reference

is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus,
and freeze references, plus catch-up and
slow-down.

0*

Function:

View the motor power in hp. The value

shown is calculated based on the actual
motor voltage and motor current. The value
is filtered, and therefore approximately 30 ms
may pass from when an input value changes
to when the data readout values change.

16-12 Motor Voltage

Range:
0 V*

16-03 Status Word

Range:

Displays motor power in kW. The value shown

is calculated based on the actual motor
voltage and motor current. The value is
filtered, and therefore approx. 30 ms may pass
from when an input value changes to when
the data readout values change. The
resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
10 W steps.

Function:

[0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value

used for controlling the motor.

16-13 Frequency

[0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency

converter via the serial communication port in
hex code.

Range:
0 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
resonance dampening.

16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

16-14 Motor current

Range:

Range:

0 %*

Function:

[-100 - 100 %] View the 2-byte word sent with the status
word to the Bus Master reporting the
Main Actual Value.

0 A*

[0 - 10000
A]

Range:

View the motor current measured as a mean

value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus
approximately 30 ms may pass from when an
input value changes to when the data
readout values change.

16-09 Custom Readout

0 CustomReadoutUnit*

Function:

Function:
[0 - 0 Custom- View the value of custom
ReadoutUnit]
readout from
parameter 0-30 Unit for Userdefined Readout to

16-15 Frequency [%]

Range:
0 %*

parameter 0-32 Custom Readout

Max Value

[-100 100 %]

Function:
View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor
frequency (without resonance dampening) as a
percentage (scale 0000-4000 Hex) of
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set
9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send it
with the status word instead of the MAV.

16-16 Torque [Nm]

Range:
0
Nm*

[-3000
- 3000
Nm]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
View the torque value with sign, applied to the
motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between
160% motor current and torque in relation to

159

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

16-16 Torque [Nm]

16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance

Range:

Range:

Function:
the rated torque. Some motors supply more
than 160% torque. Consequently, the min.
value and the max. value depend on the max.
motor current as well as the motor used. The
value is filtered, and thus approx. 30 ms may
pass from when an input changes value to
when the data readout values change.

3 3

0.0000 Ohm*

0 RPM*

Range:

[-30000 30000 RPM]

Range:

0
Nm*

[-200000000
- 200000000
Nm]

View the torque value with sign, applied

to the motor shaft. Some motors supply
more than 160% torque. Consequently,
the min. value and the max. value
depend on the max. motor current as
well as the motor used. This specific
readout has been adapted to be able to
show higher values than the standard

View the actual motor RPM. In open loop

or closed loop process control, the
motor RPM is estimated. In speed closed
loop modes the motor RPM is measured.

readout in parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].

3.17.2 16-3* Drive Status

Function:

[0 - 100
%]

Displays the Calibrated

Stator Resistance.

Function:

Function:

16-18 Motor Thermal

0 %*

[0.0000 - 100.0000
Ohm]

16-25 Torque [Nm] High

16-17 Speed [RPM]

Range:

Function:

View the calculated thermal load on the

motor. The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for
calculation is the ETR function selected in

16-30 DC Link Voltage

Range:
0 V*

1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.

Function:

[0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered

with a 30 ms time constant.

16-19 KTY sensor temperature

Range:
0 C*

16-32 Brake Energy /s

Function:

[0 - 0 C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY

sensor built into the motor.

Range:
0 kW*

Function:
[0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
external brake resistor, stated as an
instantaneous value.

See parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature.

16-20 Motor Angle

Range:
0*

16-33 Brake Energy /2 min

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset

relative to the index position. The value range
of 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radians).

Range:
0 kW*

Function:

[0 - 10000
kW]

View the brake power transmitted to an

external brake resistor. The mean power
is calculated on an average basis for the
most recent 120 s.

16-21 Torque [%] High Res.

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[-200 - 200 %] The value shown is the torque in percent

of nominal torque, with sign and 0.1%
resolution, applied to the motor shaft.

16-34 Heatsink Temp.

Range:
0 C*

Function:

[0 - 255
C]

Range:

temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 5 C,

and the motor cuts back in at 60 5 C.

16-22 Torque [%]

0 %*

View the frequency converter heatsink

Function:

[-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of

nominal torque, with sign, applied to the
motor shaft.

16-35 Inverter Thermal

Range:
0 %*

Function:

[0 - 100 %]

View the percentage load on the inverter.

16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW]

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Range:

Range:

0 kW*

160

Function:
[0 - 10000 kW] Read-out of the mechanical power
applied to the motor shaft.

Size
related*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0.01 10000 A]

View the inverter nominal current,

which must match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

16-47 Motor Phase W Current

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

Range:

Range:

Function:

Function:
motor currents , detection of weak motor
cables or imbalance in motor windings.

data are used for calculation of

torque, motor protection, etc.

Range:
Size
related*

Range:

Function:
[0.01 10000 A]

View the inverter maximum current,

which must match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The
data are used for calculation of
torque, motor protection, etc.

0*

0 RPM*

0*

Function:

16-39 Control Card Temp.

Range:

stated in C

[0 - 8 ] Value indicates source of current faults including

short circuit, over current, and phase imbalance
(from left):
1-4 Inverter
5-8 Rectifier
0 No fault recorded

3.17.3 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

Range:

Option: Function:
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter

0*

group 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging buffer is

never full when setting parameter 15-13 Logging Mode
to [0] Log always.

[-200 - 200 ] View the total reference, the sum of digital,

analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
catch-up and slow-down.

Range:

[1] Yes

0*

16-41 Logging Buffer Full

Range:

Function:

16-51 Pulse Reference

[0] No

Function:
[0 - 50 ]

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] View the reference value from programmed

digital input(s). The readout can also reflect
the impulses from an incremental encoder.

16-52 Feedback[Unit]
Range:

16-45 Motor Phase U Current

0 A*

Function:

16-50 External Reference

16-40 Logging Buffer Full

Range:

Function:

[0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase URMS current.

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit*

Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the

motor currents, detection of weak motor
cables or imbalance in motor windings.

Function:
[-999999.999 999999.999
ReferenceFeedbackUnit]

0 A*

[0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase VRMS current.

Range:
0 A*

16-53 Digi Pot Reference

0*

Function:

[0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase WRMS current.

parameter 3-00 Reference

Range,

parameter 3-03 Maximum

Reference.

Range:

16-47 Motor Phase W Current

of unit and scaling in

parameter 3-02 Minimum

Reference and

Function:
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the
motor currents, detection of weak motor
cables or imbalance in motor windings.

View the feedback unit

resulting from the selection

parameter 3-01 Reference/

Feedback Unit,

16-46 Motor Phase V Current

Range:

This parameter specifies the

reference given to the frequency
converter after the speed ramp.

Function:

[0 - 100 C] View the temperature on the control card,

0*

[-30000 - 30000
RPM]

16-49 Current Fault Source

[0 - 100 ] View the state of the event under execution by

the SL controller.

0 C*

Function:

Range:

16-38 SL Controller State

Range:

3 3

16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]

16-37 Inv. Max. Current

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the Digital Potentiometer to the actual reference.

Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

161

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

16-57 Feedback [RPM]

16-62 Analog Input 53

Range:

Range:

0 RPM*

3 3

Function:
[-30000 30000
RPM]

Read-out parameter where the actual

motor RPM from the feed-back source can
be read in both closed loop and open
loop. The feed-back source is selected by
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.

3.17.4 16-6* Inputs and Outputs

0
*

[0 1023 ]

[-20 - 20 ]

View the actual value at input 53.

16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

Option:

Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54.

[0]

Current

[1]

Voltage

16-64 Analog Input 54

16-60 Digital Input

Range:

0*

Function:

Range:

Function:
View the signal states from the active digital inputs.
Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit no. 5, 0 = no
signal, 1 = connected signal. Bit 6 works in the
opposite way, on = '0', off = '1' (safe stop input).

0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ]

View the actual value at input 54.

16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The

Bit 0

Digital input term. 33

Bit 1

Digital input term. 32

Bit 2

Digital input term. 29

Bit 3

Digital input term. 27

16-66 Digital Output [bin]

Bit 4

Digital input term. 19

Bit 5

Digital input term. 18

Range:

Bit 6

Digital input term. 37

Bit 7

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4

Bit 8

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3

Bit 9

Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2

Bit 10-63

Reserved for future terminals

Table 3.25 Active Digital Inputs

value shown reflects the selection in 6-50 Terminal

42 Output.

0*

[0 - 15 ]

Function:
View the binary value of all digital outputs.

16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal

29.

16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 130000 ] View the actual value of the frequency

applied at terminal 33 as an impulse input.

16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses applied to

terminal 27 in digital output mode.

16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range:
Illustration 3.60 Relay Settings

0*

16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

Option:

Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.

[0]

Current

[1]

Voltage

162

Function:

[0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29

in digital output mode.
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

16-71 Relay Output [bin]

16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

Range:

Range:

0*

Function:

[0 - 511 ]

0*

View the settings of all relays.

[0 - 30 ]

Function:
View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.

16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output X45/1. The value

shown reflects the selection in 6-70 Terminal X45/1
Output.

16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

Range:
Illustration 3.62 Relay Settings

0*

Function:

[0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output X45/3. The value

shown reflects the selection in 6-80 Terminal X45/3
Output.

16-72 Counter A
Range:
0*

3.17.5 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port

Function:

[-2147483648
- 2147483647 ]

View the present value of Counter A.

Counters are useful as comparator operands,
see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
The value can be reset or changed either via
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).

Parameters for reporting the BUS references and control

words.
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
Range:
0*

[0 65535 ]

16-73 Counter B
Range:
0*

Function:

[-2147483648
- 2147483647 ]

in 8-10 Control Profile.

For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

View the present value of Counter B.

Counters are useful as comparator operands
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).
The value can be reset or changed either via
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).

16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

Range:
0*

16-74 Prec. Stop Counter

Range:
0*

Function:

Function:

[-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control
word from the Bus-Master to set the
reference value.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

[0 - 2147483647 ] Returns the actual counter value of

precise counter (parameter 1-84 Precise
Stop Counter Value).

Range:

16-84 Comm. Option STW

Range:
0*

16-75 Analog In X30/11

0*

Function:
View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option
installed and the control word profile selected

Function:

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB

101.

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus comm. option

status word.
For more information, refer to the relevant
fieldbus manual.

16-85 FC Port CTW 1

16-76 Analog In X30/12
Range:
0*

Range:

Function:

0*

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB

101.

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the two-byte control word (CTW)

received from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of
the control word depends on the fieldbus
option installed and the control word profile
selected in 8-10 Control Profile.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

163

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

16-86 FC Port REF 1

16-94 Ext. Status Word

Range:

Range:

0*

[-200 200 ]

3 3

Function:
View the two-byte status word (STW) sent to
the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the status
word depends on the fieldbus option installed
and the control word profile selected in

0*

[0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word sent

via the serial communication port in hex
code.

8-10 Control Profile.

16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] Alarm and Warning numbers in hex as

displayed in the Alarm log. The High byte
contains the Alarm, the Low byte the Warning.
The Alarm number is the first one that
occurred after the last reset.

16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] This Alarm/Warning word is configured in

parameter parameter 8-17 Configurable
Alarm and Warningword to match the
actual requirements.

3.17.6 16-9* Diagnosis Read-Outs

NOTICE
When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
parameters can only be read online, i.e. as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.
16-90 Alarm Word
Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

16-91 Alarm Word 2

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

16-92 Warning Word

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the

serial communication port in hex code.

16-93 Warning Word 2

Range:
0*

164

Function:

Function:

[0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the serial

communication port in hex code.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.18 Parameters: 17-** Motor Feedb.

Option

17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)

Range:

Additional parameters to configure the Encoder (MCB 102)

or the Resolver (MCB 103) Feedback Option.

Size
related*

Function:
[4 131072 ]

The value depends on setting in

3.18.1 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface

parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection.

Parameters in this group configure the incremental

interface of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the
incremental and absolute interfaces are active at the same
time.

17-24 SSI Data Length

Range:
13*

NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.

17-25 Clock Rate

Range:

17-10 Signal Type

Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use.
Find the information on the encoder data sheet.
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an absolute encoder
only.

Option:

Function:
None

[1] *

RS422 (5V TTL)

[2]

Sinusoidal 1Vpp

1024*

Function:
[ 100 - 260
kHz]

Set the SSI clock rate. With long

encoder cables the clock rate must
be reduced.

17-26 SSI Data Format

Option:

Function:

[0] * Gray code

[1]

Binary code Set the data format of the SSI data. Choose
between Gray or Binary format.

17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate

17-11 Resolution (PPR)

Range:

Function:

[13 - 25 ] Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram.

Choose 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25
bits for multi-turn encoder.

Size related*

[0]

Select the resolution of the absolute

encoder, i.e. the number of counts per
revolution.

Option:

Function:

NOTICE

Function:
[10 - 10000 ] Enter the resolution of the incremental
track, i.e. the number of pulses or periods
per revolution.

This parameter cannot be adjusted while the

motor is running.
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder.

3.18.2 17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface

The parameter is only accessible when

Parameters in this group configure the absolute interface

of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the incremental
and absolute interfaces are active at the same time.

HIPERFACE.

parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection is set to [1]

[0]

600

[1]

1200

17-20 Protocol Selection

[2]

2400

Option:

[3]

4800

[0] * None

Function:

NOTICE

[4] * 9600
[5]

19200

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

the motor is running.

[6]

38400

Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an

incremental encoder only.

[1]

HIPERFACE Select [1] HIPERFACE if the encoder is absolute

only.

[2]

EnDat

[4]

SSI

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

165

3 3

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.18.3 17-5* Resolver Interface

17-59 Resolver Interface

This parameter group is used for setting parameters for

the Resolver Option MCB 103.
Usually the resolver feedback is used as motor feedback
from Permanent Magnet motors with parameter 1-01 Motor
Control Principle set to Flux with motor feedback.
Resolver parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
running.
17-50 Poles
Range:
2*

17-51 Input Voltage

7 V*

To avoid damage to resolvers parameter 17-50 Poles

parameter 17-53 Transformation Ratio must be adjusted before
activating this parameter.

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

3.18.4 17-6* Monitoring and Application

Function:

[2 - 8 ] Set the number of poles on the resolver.

The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers.

Range:

Activate the MCB 103 resolver option when the resolver

parameters are selected.

Function:

[2 - 8 V] Set the input voltage to the resolver. The

voltage is stated as RMS value.
The value is stated in the data sheet for
resolvers

This parameter group is for selecting additional functions

when Encoder option MCB 102 or Resolver Option MCB
103 is fitted into option slot B as speed feedback.
Monitoring and Application parameters cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
17-60 Feedback Direction
Option:

Function:

NOTICE

17-52 Input Frequency

Range:
10 kHz*

This parameter cannot be adjusted

while the motor is running.

Function:
[2 - 15 kHz] Set the input frequency to the resolver.
The value is stated in the data sheet for
resolvers.

Change the detected encoder rotation

direction without changing the wiring to
the encoder.

17-53 Transformation Ratio

[0] * Clockwise

Range:

[1]

0.5*

Function:

[0.1 - 1.1 ] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver.

The transformation ration is:
Tratio =

VOut
VIn

Counter
clockwise

17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring

The value is stated in the data sheet for

Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in

case a faulty encoder signal is detected.

resolvers.

The encoder function in parameter 17-61 Feedback Signal

Monitoring is an electrical check of the hardware circuit in the
encoder system.

17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution

Set the resolution and activate the encoder emulation function
(generation of encoder signals from the measured position from
a resolver). Needed when necessary to transfer the speed or
position information from one frequency converter to another.
To disable the function, select [0] Disabled.

Option:

Function:

Option:

Function:

[0]

Disabled

[1] *

Warning

[2]

Trip

[3]

Jog

[4]

Freeze Output

[0] *

Disabled

[5]

Max Speed

[1]

512

[6]

Switch to Open Loop

[2]

1024

[7]

Select Setup 1

[3]

2048

[8]

Select Setup 2

[4]

4096

[9]

Select Setup 3

[10]

Select Setup 4

[11]

stop & trip

166

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2

18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
Range:
0*

Function:

[-20 - 20 ] View the actual current measured at input X48/2.

3 3

18-37 Temp. Input X48/4

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/4. The temperature unit is based on the
selection in parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4
Temperature Unit.

18-38 Temp. Input X48/7

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/7. The temperature unit is based on the
selection in parameter 35-02 Term. X48/7
Temperature Unit.

18-39 Temp. Input X48/10

Range:
0*

[-500 500 ]

Function:
View the actual temperature measured at input
X48/10. The temperature unit is based on the
selection in parameter 35-04 Term. X48/10
Temperature Unit.

18-60 Digital Input 2

Range:
0*

Function:

[0 - 65535 ] View the signal states from the active digital

inputs. '0' = no signal, '1' = connected signal.

18-90 Process PID Error

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200 %]

18-91 Process PID Output

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200 %]

18-92 Process PID Clamped Output

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200 %]

18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output

Range:
0 %*

Function:
[-200 - 200 %]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

167

3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features

30-00 Wobble Mode

Option:

3.20.1 30-0* Wobble Function

[3]

The wobble function is primarily used for synthetic yarn

winding applications. The wobble option is to be installed
in the frequency converter controlling the traverse drive.
The yarn moves back and forth in a diamond pattern
across the surface of the yarn package. To prevent a buildup of yarn at the same points at the surface, this pattern
must be altered. The wobble option can accomplish this
by continuously varying the traverse velocity in a
programmable cycle. The wobble function is created by
superimposing a delta frequency around a center
frequency. To compensate for the inertia in the system a
quick frequency jump can be included. Especially suitable
for elastic yarn applications the option features a
randomized wobble ratio.
Frequency
[Hz]

Par. 30-07: WOBB TIME

Par. 30-06: JUMP TIME
Par. 30-04 [Hz]: JUMP FREQ
Par. 30-09 [%] : JUMP FREQ

Par. 30-01 [Hz]: DELTA FREQ.

Par. 30-02 [%]: DELTA FREQ.
(Par. 30-03)

CENTER FREQ

Par. 30-01 [Hz]

Par. 30-02 [%]
(Par. 30-03:)
Par. 30-*1: RAMP UP

3.20.2 Center Frequency

NOTICE
The setting of Center Frequency takes place via the
normal reference handling parameter group, 3-1*
References.
30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
Range:
5 Hz*

[0 25
Hz]

Function:
The delta frequency is determining the magnitude
of the wobble frequency. The delta frequency is
superimposed on the center frequency.
parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] is
selecting both the positive and negative delta
frequency. The setting of parameter 30-01 Wobble
Delta Frequency [Hz] must thus not be higher than
the setting of the center frequency. The initial
ramp up time from standstill until the wobble
sequence is running is determined by parameter

Par. 30-09: RANDOM FUNC

Par 30-11: RANDOM MAX
Par 30-12: RANDOM MIN
TUP
TDOWN
Par. 30-10: [RATIO TUP/ TDOWN ]
Par. 30-08: [INDEPENDENT UP and DOWN]

group 3-1* References.

Time [s]

Illustration 3.63 Wobble Function

Function:

Rel. Freq.,
Up/ Down
Time

175ZB001.10

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%]

Range:

30-00 Wobble Mode

Option:

25 %*

Function:

NOTICE

Function:

[0 - 100 The delta frequency can also be expressed as

%]
percentage of the center frequency and can
thus be maximum 100%. The function is the
same as for parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta

This parameter cannot be adjusted while

running.

Frequency [Hz].

30-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource

The standard speed open loop mode in
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is extended
with a wobble function. In this parameter it is
possible to select which method to be used for
the wobbler. The parameters can be set as
absolute values (direct frequencies) or as
relative values (percentage of other parameter).
The wobble cycle time can be set as an
absolute alue or as independent up- and down
times. When using an absolute cycle time, the
up- and down times are configured through
the wobble ratio.
[0]
*

[1]

[2]

168

Abs. Freq.,
Abs. Time
Abs. Freq.,
Up/ Down
Time
Rel. Freq.,
Abs. Time

Option:

Function:
Select which frequency converter
input should be used to scale the
delta frequency setting.

[0] * No function
[1]

Analog Input 53

[2]

Analog Input 54

[3]

Frequency input 29

[4]

Frequency input 33

[7]

Analog Input X30/11

[8]

Analog Input X30/12

FC 302 only

[15] Analog Input X48/2

30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]

Range:
0 Hz*

[0 20.0
Hz]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
The jump frequency is used to compensate for
the inertia in the traverse system. If a jump in

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]

30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min.

Range:

Range:

Function:
the output frequency is required in the top and
in the bottom of the wobble sequence, the
frequency jump is set in this parameter. If the
traverse system has a very high inertia a high
jump frequency may create a torque limit
warning or trip (warning/alarm 12) or an
overvoltage warning or trip (warning/alarm 7).
This parameter can only be changed in stopmode

0 %*

[0 - 100
%]

[ 0.1 - par. 30-11 ] Enter the minimum allowed wobble

ratio.

Range:
0 Hz*

Function:
[0 - 1000 Hz] Readout parameter. View the actual
wobble delta frequency after scaling has
been applied.

Function:
The jump frequency can also be expressed as
percentage of the center frequency. The
function is the same as for
parameter 30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz].

30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]

Range:

Function:

Size related*

30-06 Wobble Jump Time

Range:
Size related*

Function:
[ 0.005 - 5.000 s]

Range:

Function:

[0.1 - 1000 s] Defines the individual up- and down times

for each wobble cycle.

Option:

This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM

motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVC Plus open loop
mode.

Option:

Off

[1]

On

[1]

On

Function:

[0.1 - 10 ] If the ratio 0.1 is selected: tdown is 10 times

greater than tup.
If the ratio 10 is selected: tup is 10 times greater

This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM

motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVC Plus open loop
mode.

Range:
Size related*

than tdown.

30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max.

Range:
10*

Protects the motor from the Locked Rotor condition.

The control algorithm detects a possible locked rotor
condition in motor and trips the frequency converter
to protect the motor.

30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]

30-10 Wobble Ratio

1*

Function:

[0] * Off

Function:

[0] *

[ 0 - 200.0 %] High starting torque current for

PM-Motor in and Flux mode
without feedback. This parameter is
available for FC 302 only.

30-22 Locked Rotor Protection

30-09 Wobble Random Function

Range:

Function:

Function:

[1 - 1000 s] This parameter determines the wobble

sequence period. This parameter can only be
changed in stop-mode.
Wobble time = tup + tdown

Range:

30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]

Size related*

30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time

5 s*

[0 - 60 s] High starting torque time for PM-Motor

in Flux mode without feedback. This
parameter is available for FC 302 only.

Range:

30-07 Wobble Sequence Time

10 s*

3 3

30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled

3.20.3 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust

30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%]

Range:

0.1*

Function:

Function:
[0.05 - 1 s] Time period for detecting the locked
rotor condition. A low parameter
value leads to faster detection.

30-24 Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error [%]

Function:

[ par. 17-53 - 10 ] Enter the maximum allowed wobble

ratio.

This parameter is available for FC 302 only.

Range:
25 %*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0 - 100 %]

169

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.20.4 30-8* Compatibility

30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
Range:

Function:

Size
related*

[0.000 1000.000 mH]

Enter the value of the d-axis

inductance. Obtain the value from
the permanent magnet motor data
sheet. The d-axis inductance cannot
be found by performing an AMA.

30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range:
Size
related*

Function:
[ 0.01 65535.00
Ohm]

Set the brake resistor value in . This

value is used for monitoring the power
to the brake resistor in
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
This parameter is only active in
frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.

30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[0 - 1 ] Enter the speed controller proportional

gain. Quick control is obtained at high
amplification. However if amplification is
too great, the process may become
unstable.

30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain

Range:
0.100*

170

Function:
[0 - 10 ] Enter the process controller proportional gain.
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
However if amplification is too great, the
process may become unstable.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option

3.21.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings

and readouts:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

Option:

Function:
Off

[2]

Stop

[5] *

Stop and trip

35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant

Range:

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4:

Option:

0.001 s*

Function:

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

[5]

PT100 3-wire

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

3 3

3.21.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)

35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type

[0] *

Select the alarm function:

[0]

35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit

Option:

35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit

35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings

and readouts:

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the

temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. The temperature limits

Option:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

Option:

35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7:

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

[5]

PT100 3-wire

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10

settings and readouts:

Function:

[60] *

[160]

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit

Range:

Function:

Size related*

35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit

Option:

can be set in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit and
parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.

[ -50 - par.
35-17 ]

35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ par. 35-16 204 ]

35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type

View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10:

Option:
[0] *

Function:

Enter the minimum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/4.

Enter the maximum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/4.

3.21.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)

Not Connected

[1]

PT100 2-wire

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant

[3]

PT1000 2-wire

Range:

[5]

PT100 3-wire

[7]

PT1000 3-wire

0.001 s*

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital lowpass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/7. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also

171

3 3

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Descriptions

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant

35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit

Range:

Range:

Function:
increases the time delay through the
filter.

Function:

Size related*

[ -50 - par.
35-37 ]

Enter the minimum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/10.

35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. The temperature limits
can be set in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit and

35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit

parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit.

Range:

Option:

Function:

[0] *

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

Function:

Size related*

[ par. 35-36 204 ]

35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit

Range:

Function:

Size related*

[ -50 - par.
35-27 ]

Enter the minimum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/7.

3.21.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)

35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
Range:
4 mA*

Range:

Function:

[ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to

35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in

35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit

parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in
order to activate the Live Zero Time-out

Function:

Size related*

[ par. 35-26 204 ]

Enter the maximum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/7.

3.21.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114)

Function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout

Function.

35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current

Range:
20 mA*

Function:
[ par. 35-42
- 20 mA]

35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant

Range:
0.001 s*

[0.001 - 10
s]

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

can be set in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit/

parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit.

35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range:
0*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Disabled

[1]

Enabled

Enter the reference or feedback value (in

RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds to
the voltage or current set in
parameter 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current.

Range:
100*

Function:

[-999999.999 999999.999 ]

Enter the reference or feedback value

(in RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds
to the voltage or current set in

Function:

[0] *

to the high reference value (set in

35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the

temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. The temperature limits

Option:

Enter the current (mA) that corresponds

parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
Feedb. Value).

Function:

35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor

parameter 35-43 Term. X48/2 High

Current.

35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

Range:
0.001 s*

172

Enter the maximum temperature

reading that is expected for
normal operation of the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/10.

Function:
[0.001 - 10
s]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Enter the filter time constant. This is a

first-order digital low pass filter time

Parameter Descriptions

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

35-46 Term. X48/2 Filter Time Constant

Range:

Function:
constant for suppressing electrical noise
in terminal X48/2. A high time constant
value improves dampening but also
increases the time delay through the
filter.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3 3

173

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Lists and Options
4.1.1 Introduction
Frequency converter series
All = valid for FC 301 and FC 302 series
01 = valid for FC 301 only
02 = valid for FC 302 only
Changes during operation
TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while
the frequency converter is in operation and FALSE means
that the frequency converter must be stopped before a
change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each
of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter can have
four different data values.
1 set-up: data value is the same in all set-ups.
Data
type

Description

Type

Integer 8

Int8

Integer 16

Int16

Integer 32

Int32

Unsigned 8

Uint8

Unsigned 16

Uint16

Unsigned 32

Uint32

Visible String

VisStr

33

Normalized value 2 bytes

N2

35

Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables

V2

54

Time difference w/o date

TimD

Table 4.1 Data Type

174

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

4.1.2 Conversion

Conversion index

Conversion factor

100

The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in

factory setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to
transfer decimals.

75
74
67

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of

0.1. To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer
the value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the
value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is
therefore read as 10.0.
Examples:
0 s conversion index 0
0.00 s conversion index -2
0 ms conversion index -3
0.00 ms conversion index -5

1000000

100000

10000

1000

100

10

-1

0.1

-2

0.01

-3

0.001

-4

0.0001

-5

0.00001

-6

0.000001

-7

0.0000001

4 4

Table 4.2 Conversion Table

4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

+ = active
- = not active
Parameter 1-10 Motor
Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

[0] Speed Open Loop

[1] Speed Closed Loop

[2] Torque

[3] Process

[4] Torque Open Loop

[5] Wobble

[6] Surface Winder

[7] Ext. PID Open Loop

[8] Ext. PID Closed Loop

Parameter 1-02 Flux Motor

Feedback Source

Parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics

Parameter 1-04 Overload

Mode

Parameter 1-05 Local Mode

Configuration

Parameter 1-06 Clockwise

Direction

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle
0-** Operation and Display (all
parameters)

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode

+
see

1, 2, 3)

see

1, 3, 4)

+
see

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1, 3, 4)

175

4 4

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 1-20 Motor Power

[kW]
(Par. 023 = International)

Parameter 1-21 Motor Power

[HP]
(Par. 023 = US)

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage

Parameter 1-23 Motor

Frequency

Parameter 1-24 Motor Current

Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal

Speed

Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont.

Rated Torque

Parameter 1-29 Automatic

Motor Adaptation (AMA)

Parameter 1-30 Stator

Resistance (Rs)

Parameter 1-31 Rotor

Resistance (Rr)

Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage

Reactance (X1)

Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage

Reactance (X2)

Parameter 1-35 Main

Reactance (Xh)

Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss

Resistance (Rfe)

Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles

Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at

1000 RPM

Parameter 1-41 Motor Angle

Offset

1-50 Motor Magnetisation at

Zero Speed

1-51 Min Speed Normal

Magnetising [RPM](Par. 002 =
rmp)

Parameter 1-52 Min Speed

Normal Magnetising [Hz](Par.
002 = Hz)

Parameter 1-53 Model Shift

Frequency

Parameter 1-54 Voltage

reduction in fieldweakening

Parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

Parameter 1-37 d-axis

Inductance (Ld)

176

+
see

5)

+
+
see

5)

+
see
-

6)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

U/f
mode

Parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F

Parameter 1-58 Flystart Test

Pulses Current

Parameter 1-59 Flystart Test

Pulses Frequency

Parameter 1-60 Low Speed

Load Compensation

Parameter 1-61 High Speed

Load Compensation

Parameter 1-62 Slip Compensation

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

1-63 Slip Compensation Time

Constant

Flux w/
motor
feedback

+
see

+
see

Flux
sensorless

8)

7)

+
see

8)

+
see

VVCplus

+
8)

see

8)

1-64 Resonance Damping

1-65 Resonance Damping Time

Constant

Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed

Parameter 1-67 Load Type

Parameter 1-68 Minimum

Inertia

Parameter 1-69 Maximum

Inertia

Parameter 1-71 Start Delay

Parameter 1-72 Start Function

Parameter 1-73 Flying Start

Parameter 1-75 Start Speed

[Hz](Par. 002 = Hz)

Parameter 1-76 Start Current

Parameter 1-80 Function at

Stop

1-81 Min Speed for Function

at Stop [RPM]
(Par. 002 = rpm)

1-82 Min Speed for Function

at Stop [Hz]
(Par. 002 = Hz)

Parameter 1-83 Precise Stop

Function

Parameter 1-84 Precise Stop

Counter Value

Parameter 1-85 Precise Stop

Speed Compensation Delay

Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal

Protection

1-91 Motor External Fan

1-93 Thermistor Resource

Parameter 1-74 Start Speed

[RPM](Par. 002 = rmp)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4 4

177

4 4

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor

Type

Parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor

Resource

Parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold

level

Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR

interpol. points freq.

Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR

interpol points current

Parameter 2-00 DC Hold

Current

Parameter 2-01 DC Brake

Current

2-02 DC Braking Time

Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut

In Speed [RPM]

Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut

In Speed [Hz]

Parameter 2-05 Maximum

Reference

Parameter 2-10 Brake Function

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

see

9)

2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)

Parameter 2-13 Brake Power

Monitoring

Parameter 2-15 Brake Check

+
see

9)

Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max.

Current

Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage

Control

Parameter 2-18 Brake Check

Condition

Parameter 2-19 Over-voltage

Gain

Parameter 2-20 Release Brake

Current

Parameter 2-21 Activate Brake

Speed [RPM]

Parameter 2-22 Activate Brake

Speed [Hz]

Parameter 2-23 Activate Brake

Delay

Parameter 2-24 Stop Delay

Parameter 2-25 Brake Release

Time

Parameter 2-26 Torque Ref

178

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 2-27 Torque Ramp

Up Time

Parameter 2-28 Gain Boost

Factor

2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time

2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain

2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

2-32 Speed PID Start Integral

Time

2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass

Filter Time

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

3-** Reference/Ramps (all

parameters)

Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed

Direction

Parameter 4-11 Motor Speed

Low Limit [RPM]

Parameter 4-12 Motor Speed

Low Limit [Hz]

Parameter 4-13 Motor Speed

High Limit [RPM]

Parameter 4-14 Motor Speed

High Limit [Hz]

Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit

Motor Mode

Parameter 4-17 Torque Limit

Generator Mode

Parameter 4-18 Current Limit

Parameter 4-19 Max Output

Frequency

Parameter 4-20 Torque Limit

Factor Source

4-21 Speed Limit Factor

Source

+ see

10)

+ see

11)

Parameter 4-30 Motor

Feedback Loss Function

+ see

12)

+ see

12)

Parameter 4-31 Motor

Feedback Speed Error

+ see

12)

+ see

12)

Parameter 4-32 Motor

Feedback Loss Timeout

+ see

12)

+ see

12)

Parameter 4-34 Tracking Error

Function

Parameter 4-35 Tracking Error

Parameter 4-36 Tracking Error

Timeout

Parameter 4-37 Tracking Error

Ramping

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

4 4

179

4 4

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 4-38 Tracking Error

Ramping Timeout

Parameter 4-39 Tracking Error

After Ramping Timeout

Parameter 4-50 Warning

Current Low

Parameter 4-51 Warning

Current High

Parameter 4-52 Warning Speed

Low

Parameter 4-53 Warning Speed

High

Parameter 4-54 Warning

Reference Low

Parameter 4-55 Warning

Reference High

Parameter 4-56 Warning

Feedback Low

Parameter 4-57 Warning

Feedback High

Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor

Phase Function

Parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed

From [RPM]

Parameter 4-61 Bypass Speed

From [Hz]

Parameter 4-62 Bypass Speed

To [RPM]

Parameter 4-63 Bypass Speed

To [Hz]

5-** Digital In/Out (all

parameters except 5-70 and
71)

Parameter 5-70 Term 32/33

Pulses Per Revolution

+ see

12)

Parameter 5-71 Term 32/33

Encoder Direction

+ see

12)

6-** Analog In/Out (all

parameters)

Parameter 7-00 Speed PID

Feedback Source

+ see

12)

Parameter 7-02 Speed PID

Proportional Gain

+ see

12)

Parameter 7-03 Speed PID

Integral Time

+ see

12)

Parameter 7-04 Speed PID

Differentiation Time

+ see

12)

Parameter 7-05 Speed PID Diff.

Gain Limit

+ see

12)

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

180

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

12)

+ see

12)

+ see

12)

Parameter 7-12 Torque PI

Proportional Gain

+ see

10)

Parameter 7-13 Torque PI

Integration Time

+ see

10)

Parameter 7-20 Process CL

Feedback 1 Resource

Parameter 7-22 Process CL

Feedback 2 Resource

Parameter 7-30 Process PID

Normal/ Inverse Control

Parameter 7-31 Process PID

Anti Windup

Parameter 7-32 Process PID

Start Speed

Parameter 7-33 Process PID

Proportional Gain

Parameter 7-34 Process PID

Integral Time

Parameter 7-35 Process PID

Differentiation Time

Parameter 7-36 Process PID

Diff. Gain Limit

Parameter 7-38 Process PID

Feed Forward Factor

Parameter 7-39 On Reference

Bandwidth

Parameter 7-40 Process PID Ipart Reset

Parameter 7-41 Process PID

Output Neg. Clamp

Parameter 7-42 Process PID

Output Pos. Clamp

Parameter 7-43 Process PID

Gain Scale at Min. Ref.

Parameter 7-44 Process PID

Gain Scale at Max. Ref.

Parameter 7-45 Process PID

Feed Fwd Resource

Parameter 7-46 Process PID

Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.

Parameter 7-48 PCD Feed

Forward

Parameter 7-49 Process PID

Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

U/f
mode

Parameter 7-06 Speed PID

Lowpass Filter Time

+ see

Parameter 7-07 Speed PID

Feedback Gear Ratio

Parameter 7-08 Speed PID

Feed Forward Factor

VVCplus

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

4 4

181

4 4

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 7-50 Process PID

Extended PID

Parameter 7-51 Process PID

Feed Fwd Gain

Parameter 7-52 Process PID

Feed Fwd Ramp up

Parameter 7-53 Process PID

Feed Fwd Ramp down

Parameter 7-56 Process PID

Ref. Filter Time

Parameter 7-57 Process PID Fb.

Filter Time

8-** Communications and

Options (all parameters)

13-** Smart Logic Control (all

parameters)

Parameter 14-00 Switching

Pattern

Parameter 14-01 Switching

Frequency

Parameter 14-03 Overmodulation

Parameter 14-04 PWM Random

Parameter 14-06 Dead Time

Compensation

[0] No function

[1] Ctrl. rampdown

[2] Ctrl. rampdown, trip

[3] Coasting

[4] Kinetic back-up

[5] Kinetic back-up, trip

[6] Alarm

Parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage

at Mains Fault

Parameter 14-12 Function at

Mains Imbalance

Parameter 14-14 Kin. Backup

Time Out

Parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup

Trip Recovery Level

Parameter 14-20 Reset Mode

Parameter 14-21 Automatic

Restart Time

Parameter 14-22 Operation

Mode

Parameter 14-24 Trip Delay at

Current Limit

Parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at

Torque Limit

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure

182

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

Parameter 1-10 Motor

Construction

AC motor

PM non-salient motor

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

Parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at

Inverter Fault

Parameter 14-29 Service Code

Parameter 14-30 Current Lim

Ctrl, Proportional Gain

Parameter 14-31 Current Lim

Ctrl, Integration Time

Parameter 14-32 Current Lim

Ctrl, Filter Time

Parameter 14-35 Stall

Protection

Parameter 1-01 Motor

Control Principle

Parameter 14-36 Fieldweakenin

g Function
Parameter 14-40 VT Level

Parameter 14-41 AEO

Minimum Magnetisation

Parameter 14-42 Minimum

AEO Frequency

Parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi

Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter

Parameter 14-51 DC Link

Compensation

Parameter 14-52 Fan Control

Parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor

Parameter 14-55 Output Filter

Parameter 14-56 Capacitance

Output Filter

Parameter 14-57 Inductance

Output Filter

Parameter 14-74 Leg. Ext.

Status Word

Parameter 14-80 Option

Supplied by External 24VDC

Parameter 14-89 Option

Detection

Parameter 14-90 Fault Level

U/f
mode

VVCplus

Flux
sensorless

Flux w/
motor
feedback

4 4

Table 4.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

1) Constant torque
2) Variable torque
3) AEO
4) Constant power
5) Used in flystart
6) Used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics is constant power
7) Not used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics = VT
8) Part of resonance damping
9) Not AC brake
10) Torque open loop
11) Torque
12) Speed closed loop

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

183

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.4 0-** Operation/Display

Par. Parameter description
No. #

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

0-0* Basic Settings

0-01

Language

[0] English

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-02

Motor Speed Unit

[0] RPM

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-03

Regional Settings

[0] International

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-04

Operating State at Power-up (Hand)

[1] Forced stop, ref=old

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-09

Performance Monitor

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

0-1* Set-up Operations

0-10

Active Set-up

[1] Set-up 1

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0-11

Edit Set-up

[1] Set-up 1

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-12

This Set-up Linked to

0-13

Readout: Linked Set-ups

[0] Not linked

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

0-14

Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

0-15

Readout: actual setup

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1617

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-2* LCP Display

0-20

Display Line 1.1 Small

0-21

Display Line 1.2 Small

1614

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-22

Display Line 1.3 Small

1610

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-23

Display Line 2 Large

1613

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-24

Display Line 3 Large

1602

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0-25

My Personal Menu

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16
Uint8

0-3* LCP Custom Readout

0-30

Unit for User-defined Readout

[0] None

All set-ups

TRUE

0-31

Min Value of User-defined Readout

0 CustomReadoutUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

0-32

Max Value of User-defined Readout

100 CustomReadoutUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

0-37

Display Text 1

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[
25]

0-38

Display Text 2

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[
25]

0-39

Display Text 3

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[
25]

0-4* LCP Keypad

0-40

[Hand on] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-41

[Off] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-42

[Auto on] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-43

[Reset] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-44

[Off/Reset] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-45

[Drive Bypass] Key on LCP

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0-5* Copy/Save
0-50

LCP Copy

[0] No copy

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-51

Set-up Copy

[0] No copy

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0-6* Password
0-60

Main Menu Password

0-61

Access to Main Menu w/o Password

0-65

Quick Menu Password

0-66

Access to Quick Menu w/o Password

0-67

Bus Password Access

0-68

Safety Parameters Password

0-69

Password Protection of Safety Parameters

184

100 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Int16

[0] Full access

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

200 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Int16

[0] Full access

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

300 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Disabled

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.5 1-** Load/Motor

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

Uint8

1-0* General Settings

1-00

Configuration Mode

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

1-01

Motor Control Principle

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-02

Flux Motor Feedback Source

[1] 24V encoder

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-03

Torque Characteristics

[0] Constant torque

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-04

Overload Mode

1-05

Local Mode Configuration

1-06
1-07

[0] High torque

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[2] As mode par 1-00

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Clockwise Direction

[0] Normal

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

Motor Angle Offset Adjust

[0] Manual

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

FALSE

Uint8

FALSE

Uint8

4 4

1-1* Special Settings

1-10

Motor Construction

1-11

Motor Model

[0] Asynchron

All set-ups

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

1-14

Damping Gain

140 %

All set-ups

TRUE

1-15

Int16

Low Speed Filter Time Const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-16

High Speed Filter Time Const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-17

Voltage filter time const.

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

1-18

Min. Current at No Load

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-2* Motor Data

1-20

Motor Power [kW]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

1-21

Motor Power [HP]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

1-22

Motor Voltage

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-23

Motor Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-24

Motor Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

1-25

Motor Nominal Speed

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

67

Uint16

1-26

Motor Cont. Rated Torque

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint32

1-29

Automatic Motor Adaptation

(AMA)

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-3* Adv. Motor Data

1-30

Stator Resistance (Rs)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-31

Rotor Resistance (Rr)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-33

Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-34

Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-35

Main Reactance (Xh)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-36

Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint32

1-37

d-axis Inductance (Ld)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Int32

1-38

q-axis Inductance (Lq)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-6

Int32

1-39

Motor Poles

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-40

Back EMF at 1000 RPM

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-41

Motor Angle Offset

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16
Int32

1-44

d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

1-45

q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Int32

1-46

Position Detection Gain

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-47

Low Speed Torque Calibration

1-48

Inductance Sat. Point

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

35 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

TRUE

Int16

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-5* Load Indep. Setting

1-50

Motor Magnetisation at Zero

Speed

1-51

Min Speed Normal Magnetising

[RPM]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

185

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

TRUE

-1

Uint16

FALSE

-1

Uint16

1-52

Min Speed Normal Magnetising

[Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

1-53

Model Shift Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

1-54

Voltage reduction in
fieldweakening

0V

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-55

U/f Characteristic - U

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-56

U/f Characteristic - F

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-58

Flystart Test Pulses Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-59

Flystart Test Pulses Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

1-6* Load Depen. Setting

1-60

Low Speed Load Compensation

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-61

High Speed Load Compensation

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-62

Slip Compensation

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

1-63

Slip Compensation Time Constant

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1-64

Resonance Damping

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

1-65

Resonance Damping Time

Constant

5 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint8

1-66

Min. Current at Low Speed

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

1-67

Load Type

[0] Passive load

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-68

Minimum Inertia

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

1-69

Maximum Inertia

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

[0] Rotor Detection

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

[2] Coast/delay time

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-7* Start Adjustments

1-70

PM Start Mode

1-71

Start Delay

1-72

Start Function

1-73

Flying Start

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1-74

Start Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-75

Start Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-76

Start Current

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

1-8* Stop Adjustments

1-80

Function at Stop

[0] Coast

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-81

Min Speed for Function at Stop

[RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

1-82

Min Speed for Function at Stop

[Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

[0] Precise ramp stop

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

100000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

10 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint8

[0] No protection

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint16

1-83

Precise Stop Function

1-84

Precise Stop Counter Value

1-85

Precise Stop Speed Compensation

Delay

1-9* Motor Temperature

1-90

Motor Thermal Protection

1-91

Motor External Fan

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

1-93

Thermistor Resource

[0] None

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1-94

ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction

0%

2 set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

[0] KTY Sensor 1

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] None

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

80 C

1 set-up

TRUE

100

Int16

1-95

KTY Sensor Type

1-96

KTY Thermistor Resource

1-97

KTY Threshold level

1-98

ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-1

Uint16

1-99

ATEX ETR interpol points current

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

186

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.6 2-** Brakes

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

2-0* DC-Brake
2-00

DC Hold Current

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-01

DC Brake Current

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

2-02

DC Braking Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

2-03

DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16
Uint16

2-04

DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz]

2-05

Maximum Reference

2-06

Parking Current

2-07

Parking Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

MaxReference (P303)

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

3s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

2-1* Brake Energy Funct.

2-10

Brake Function

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-11

Brake Resistor (ohm)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint32

2-12

Brake Power Limit (kW)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

2-13

Brake Power Monitoring

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-15

Brake Check

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

2-16

AC brake Max. Current

Uint32

2-17

Over-voltage Control

2-18

Brake Check Condition

2-19

Over-voltage Gain

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] At Power Up

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

ImaxVLT (P1637)

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

2-2* Mechanical Brake

2-20

Release Brake Current

2-21

Activate Brake Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

2-22

Activate Brake Speed [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16
Uint8

2-23

Activate Brake Delay

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

2-24

Stop Delay

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

2-25

Brake Release Time

0.20 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

2-26

Torque Ref

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

2-27

Torque Ramp Up Time

0.2 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

2-28

Gain Boost Factor

1 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

2-29

Torque Ramp Down Time

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

Position P Start Proportional Gain

0.0000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

2-3* Adv. Mech Brake

2-30
2-31

Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

0.0150 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

2-32

Speed PID Start Integral Time

200.0 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

2-33

Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter

Time

10.0 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint16

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

187

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.7 3-** Reference/Ramps

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

3-0* Reference Limits

3-00

Reference Range

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-01

Reference/Feedback Unit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-02

Minimum Reference

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

3-03

Maximum Reference

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

3-04

Reference Function

[0] Sum

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-1* References
3-10

Preset Reference

3-11

Jog Speed [Hz]

3-12

Catch up/slow Down Value

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

-2

Int16
Uint8

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

[0] Linked to Hand /

Auto

All set-ups

TRUE

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

3-13

Reference Site

3-14

Preset Relative Reference

3-15

Reference Resource 1

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-16

Reference Resource 2

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-17

Reference Resource 3

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-18

Relative Scaling Reference

Resource

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-19

Jog Speed [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

3-4* Ramp 1
3-40

Ramp 1 Type

[0] Linear

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-41

Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-42

Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-45

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-46

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-47

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-48

Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-5* Ramp 2
3-50

Ramp 2 Type

[0] Linear

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-51

Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-52

Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-55

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-56

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-57

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-58

Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-6* Ramp 3
3-60

Ramp 3 Type

[0] Linear

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-61

Ramp 3 Ramp up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-62

Ramp 3 Ramp down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-65

Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-66

Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

188

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

3-67

Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-68

Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-7* Ramp 4
3-70

Ramp 4 Type

[0] Linear

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-71

Ramp 4 Ramp up Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-72

Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-75

Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-76

Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-77

Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-78

Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-8* Other Ramps

3-80

Jog Ramp Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-81

Quick Stop Ramp Time

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

3-82

Quick Stop Ramp Type

[0] Linear

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-83

Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

Start

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

3-84

Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.

End

50 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0.10 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

1s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32
Uint8

3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

3-90

Step Size

3-91

Ramp Time

3-92

Power Restore

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

3-93

Maximum Limit

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

3-94

Minimum Limit

-100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

3-95

Ramp Delay

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

TimD

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

189

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.8 4-** Limits/Warnings

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

4-1* Motor Limits

4-10

Motor Speed Direction

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

4-11

Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-12

Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-13

Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-14

Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-16

Torque Limit Motor Mode

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-17

Torque Limit Generator Mode

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-18

Current Limit

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint32

4-19

Max Output Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint16

4-2* Limit Factors

4-20

Torque Limit Factor Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4-21

Speed Limit Factor Source

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[2] Trip

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

300 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

0.05 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-3* Motor Speed Mon.

4-30

Motor Feedback Loss Function

4-31

Motor Feedback Speed Error

4-32

Motor Feedback Loss Timeout

4-34

Tracking Error Function

4-35

Tracking Error

4-36

Tracking Error Timeout

1s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

4-37

Tracking Error Ramping

100 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-38

Tracking Error Ramping Timeout

1s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

4-39

Tracking Error After Ramping

Timeout

5s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

4-5* Adj. Warnings

4-50

Warning Current Low

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

4-51

Warning Current High

ImaxVLT (P1637)

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

4-52

Warning Speed Low

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-53

Warning Speed High

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-54

Warning Reference Low

-999999.999 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-55

Warning Reference High

999999.999 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

Warning Feedback Low

-999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-57

Warning Feedback High

999999.999 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

4-58

Missing Motor Phase Function

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4-56

4-6* Speed Bypass

4-60

Bypass Speed From [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-61

Bypass Speed From [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

4-62

Bypass Speed To [RPM]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4-63

Bypass Speed To [Hz]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

190

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.9 5-** Digital In/Out

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

5-0* Digital I/O mode

5-00

Digital I/O Mode

[0] PNP

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

5-01

Terminal 27 Mode

[0] Input

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-02

Terminal 29 Mode

[0] Input

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4 4

5-1* Digital Inputs

5-10

Terminal 18 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-11

Terminal 19 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-12

Terminal 27 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-13

Terminal 29 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-14

Terminal 32 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-15

Terminal 33 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-16

Terminal X30/2 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-17

Terminal X30/3 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-18

Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-19

Terminal 37 Safe Stop

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

5-20

Terminal X46/1 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-21

Terminal X46/3 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-22

Terminal X46/5 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-23

Terminal X46/7 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-24

Terminal X46/9 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-25

Terminal X46/11 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-26

Terminal X46/13 Digital Input

[0] No operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

5-3* Digital Outputs

5-30

Terminal 27 Digital Output

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

5-31

Terminal 29 Digital Output

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

TRUE

5-32

Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)

ExpressionLimit

Uint8

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-33

Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-40
5-41

Function Relay

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

On Delay, Relay

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-42

Off Delay, Relay

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-4* Relays

5-5* Pulse Input

5-50

Term. 29 Low Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-51

Term. 29 High Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-52

Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-53

Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-54

Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

100 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

5-55

Term. 33 Low Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-56

Term. 33 High Frequency

100 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32
Int32

5-57

Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

5-58

Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

5-59

Pulse Filter Time Constant #33

100 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

5-6* Pulse Output

5-60

Terminal 27 Pulse Output

Variable

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-62

Pulse Output Max Freq #27

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

191

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

5-63

Terminal 29 Pulse Output

Variable

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-65

Pulse Output Max Freq #29

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-66

Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output

Variable

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

5-68

Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

5-7* 24V Encoder Input

5-70

Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution

5-71

Term 32/33 Encoder Direction

1024 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

[0] Clockwise

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

25 s

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint32

5-8* I/O Options

5-80

AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

5-9* Bus Controlled

5-90

Digital & Relay Bus Control

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

5-93

Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-94

Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-95

Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-96

Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

5-97

Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

5-98

Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

Default value

4-set-up

4.1.10 6-** Analog In/Out

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

6-0* Analog I/O Mode

6-00

Live Zero Timeout Time

6-01

Live Zero Timeout Function

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Int16

6-1* Analog Input 1

6-10

Terminal 53 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

6-11

Terminal 53 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-12

Terminal 53 Low Current

0.14 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-13

Terminal 53 High Current

20 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-14

Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-15

Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.

Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-16

Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16
Int16

6-2* Analog Input 2

6-20

Terminal 54 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

6-21

Terminal 54 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-22

Terminal 54 Low Current

0.14 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-23

Terminal 54 High Current

20 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

6-24

Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-25

Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.

Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-26

Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

6-3* Analog Input 3

6-30

Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-31

Terminal X30/11 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

192

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

6-34

Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-35

Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.

Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-36

Term. X30/11 Filter Time

Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

0.07 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

4 4

6-4* Analog Input 4

6-40

Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage

6-41

Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

10 V

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-44

Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb.

Value

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-45

Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb.

Value

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

6-46

Term. X30/12 Filter Time

Constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16
Uint8

6-5* Analog Output 1

6-50

Terminal 42 Output

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

6-51

Terminal 42 Output Min Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-52

Terminal 42 Output Max Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-53

Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-54

Terminal 42 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

6-55

Analog Output Filter

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

6-6* Analog Output 2

6-60

Terminal X30/8 Output

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-61

Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-62

Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-63

Terminal X30/8 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-64

Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-7* Analog Output 3

6-70

Terminal X45/1 Output

6-71

Terminal X45/1 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-72

Terminal X45/1 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-73

Terminal X45/1 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-74

Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

6-8* Analog Output 4

6-80

Terminal X45/3 Output

6-81

Terminal X45/3 Min. Scale

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-82

Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int16

6-83

Terminal X45/3 Bus Control

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

N2

6-84

Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout

Preset

0%

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint16

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

193

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.11 7-** Controllers

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.

7-00

Speed PID Feedback Source

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

7-02

Speed PID Proportional Gain

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

7-03

Speed PID Integral Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

7-04

Speed PID Differentiation Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint16

7-05

Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit

5 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

7-06

Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint16

7-07

Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio

1 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-4

Uint32

7-08

Speed PID Feed Forward Factor

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

7-09

Speed PID Error Correction w/

Ramp

300 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint32

7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.

7-12

Torque PI Proportional Gain

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

7-13

Torque PI Integration Time

0.020 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

7-19

Current Controller Rise Time

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb

7-20

Process CL Feedback 1 Resource

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-22

Process CL Feedback 2 Resource

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-3* Process PID Ctrl.

7-30

Process PID Normal/ Inverse

Control

[0] Normal

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-31

Process PID Anti Windup

[1] On

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-32

Process PID Start Speed

0 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

7-33

Process PID Proportional Gain

0.01 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

7-34

Process PID Integral Time

10000 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

7-35

Process PID Differentiation Time

0s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

7-36

Process PID Diff. Gain Limit

5 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

7-38

Process PID Feed Forward Factor

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

7-39

On Reference Bandwidth

5%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint8

7-4* Adv. Process PID I

7-40

Process PID I-part Reset

[0] No

All set-ups

TRUE

7-41

Process PID Output Neg. Clamp

-100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

7-42

Process PID Output Pos. Clamp

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

7-43

Process PID Gain Scale at Min.

Ref.

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

7-44

Process PID Gain Scale at Max.

Ref.

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

7-45

Process PID Feed Fwd Resource

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-46

Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/

Inv. Ctrl.

[0] Normal

All set-ups

7-48

PCD Feed Forward

0 N/A

All set-ups

7-49

Process PID Output Normal/ Inv.

Ctrl.

[0] Normal

TRUE

Uint8

TRUE

Uint16

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-5* Adv. Process PID II

7-50

Process PID Extended PID

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

7-51

Process PID Feed Fwd Gain

1 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

7-52

Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

7-53

Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp

down

0.01 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint32

194

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

7-56

Process PID Ref. Filter Time

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

7-57

Process PID Fb. Filter Time

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

Default value

4-set-up

[0] Digital and ctrl.word

All set-ups

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

1s

1 set-up

TRUE

-1

Uint32

4.1.12 8-** Comm. and Options

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

4 4

Type

8-0* General Settings

8-01

Control Site

8-02

Control Word Source

8-03

Control Word Timeout Time

8-04

Control Word Timeout Function

8-05

End-of-Timeout Function

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

[1] Resume set-up

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-06

Reset Control Word Timeout

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-07

Diagnosis Trigger

[0] Disable

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-08

Readout Filtering

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings

8-10

Control Word Profile

8-13

Configurable Status Word STW

8-14

Configurable Control Word CTW

8-19

Product Code

[0] FC profile

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] Profile default

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint32

8-3* FC Port Settings

8-30

Protocol

[0] FC

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-31

Address

1 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-32

FC Port Baud Rate

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop

Bit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

8-33

Parity / Stop Bits

8-34

Estimated cycle time

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

8-35

Minimum Response Delay

10 ms

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

Uint16

8-36

Max Response Delay

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

Uint16

8-37

Max Inter-Char Delay

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-5

Uint16

[1] Standard telegram 1

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8
Uint16

8-4* FC MC protocol set

8-40

Telegram Selection

8-41

Parameters for Signals

All set-ups

FALSE

8-42

PCD Write Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

8-43

PCD Read Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint8

8-45

BTM Transaction Command

[0] Off

All set-ups

FALSE

8-46

BTM Transaction Status

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-47

BTM Timeout

60 s

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint16

8-48

BTM Maximum Errors

8-49

BTM Error Log

21 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

0.255 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50

Coasting Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-51

Quick Stop Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-52

DC Brake Select

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-53

Start Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-54

Reversing Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-55

Set-up Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-56

Preset Reference Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-57

Profidrive OFF2 Select

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

195

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

8-58

Profidrive OFF3 Select

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

[3] Logic OR

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

8-8* FC Port Diagnostics

8-80

Bus Message Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-81

Bus Error Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-82

Slave Messages Rcvd

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-83

Slave Error Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

8-9* Bus Jog

8-90

Bus Jog 1 Speed

100 RPM

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

8-91

Bus Jog 2 Speed

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint16

4.1.13 9-** Profibus

Par. Parameter description
No. #

Default value

4-set-up

0 N/A

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16
Uint16

9-00

Setpoint

9-07

Actual Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

9-15

PCD Write Configuration

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

9-16

PCD Read Configuration

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-18

Node Address

126 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

9-19

Drive Unit System Number

1034 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-22

Telegram Selection

[100] None

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

9-23

Parameters for Signals

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-27

Parameter Edit

[1] Enabled

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-28

Process Control

[1] Enable cyclic master

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

9-44

Fault Message Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-45

Fault Code

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-47

Fault Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-52

Fault Situation Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-53

Profibus Warning Word

9-63

Actual Baud Rate

9-64

Device Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

[255] No baudrate found

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

OctStr[
2]

9-65

Profile Number

0 N/A

9-67

Control Word 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

9-68

Status Word 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

V2

9-70

Edit Set-up

[1] Set-up 1

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

9-71

Profibus Save Data Values

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

9-72

ProfibusDriveReset

[0] No action

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

9-75

DO Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

9-80

Defined Parameters (1)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-81

Defined Parameters (2)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-82

Defined Parameters (3)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-83

Defined Parameters (4)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-84

Defined Parameters (5)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-85

Defined Parameters (6)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-90

Changed Parameters (1)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-91

Changed Parameters (2)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-92

Changed Parameters (3)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-93

Changed Parameters (4)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

9-94

Changed Parameters (5)

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

196

All set-ups

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

TRUE

Parameter Lists

9-99

Profibus Revision Counter

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

4.1.14 10-** CAN Fieldbus

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operatio
n

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

FALSE

Type

4 4

10-0* Common Settings

10-00

CAN Protocol

10-01

Baud Rate Select

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

10-02

MAC ID

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

Uint8

TRUE

Uint8

TRUE

Uint8

10-05

Readout Transmit Error Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-06

Readout Receive Error Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-07

Readout Bus Off Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-1* DeviceNet
10-10

Process Data Type Selection

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-11

Process Data Config Write

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-12

Process Data Config Read

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-13

Warning Parameter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-14

Net Reference

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-15

Net Control

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-2* COS Filters

10-20

COS Filter 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-21

COS Filter 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-22

COS Filter 3

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

10-23

COS Filter 4

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-3* Parameter Access

10-30

Array Index

10-31

Store Data Values

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

10-32

Devicenet Revision

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-33

Store Always

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

10-34

DeviceNet Product Code

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

10-39

Devicenet F Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

10-5* CANopen
10-50

Process Data Config Write.

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

10-51

Process Data Config Read.

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

Default value

4-set-up

4.1.15 12-** Ethernet

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

12-0* IP Settings
12-00

IP Address Assignment

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-01

IP Address

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

OctStr[4]

12-02

Subnet Mask

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

OctStr[4]

12-03

Default Gateway

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

OctStr[4]

12-04

DHCP Server

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

OctStr[4]

12-05

Lease Expires

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

TimD

12-06

Name Servers

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

OctStr[4]

12-07

Domain Name

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[48]

12-08

Host Name

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[48]

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

197

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

12-09

Physical Address

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Type

VisStr[17]
Uint8

12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters

12-10

Link Status

[0] No Link

All set-ups

TRUE

12-11

Link Duration

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

TimD

12-12

Auto Negotiation

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-13

Link Speed

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-14

Link Duplex

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-2* Process Data

12-20

Control Instance

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

12-21

Process Data Config Write

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-22

Process Data Config Read

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-23

Process Data Config Write Size

16 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-24

Process Data Config Read Size

16 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-27

Master Address

0 N/A

2 set-ups

FALSE

OctStr[4]

12-28

Store Data Values

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-29

Store Always

[0] Off

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

12-3* EtherNet/IP
12-30

Warning Parameter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-31

Net Reference

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-32

Net Control

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-33

CIP Revision

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-34

CIP Product Code

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

12-35

EDS Parameter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-37

COS Inhibit Timer

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-38

COS Filter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-4* Modbus TCP

12-40

Status Parameter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-41

Slave Message Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-42

Slave Exception Message Count

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-5* EtherCAT
12-50

Configured Station Alias

0 N/A

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint16

12-51

Configured Station Address

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-59

EtherCAT Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-6* Ethernet PowerLink

12-60

Node ID

12-62

SDO Timeout

12-63

Basic Ethernet Timeout

12-66
12-67

30000 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

5000.000 ms

All set-ups

TRUE

-6

Uint32

Threshold

15 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

Threshold Counters

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-68

Cumulative Counters

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-69

Ethernet PowerLink Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-8* Other Ethernet Services

12-80

FTP Server

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-81

HTTP Server

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-82

SMTP Service

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-89

Transparent Socket Channel

Port

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services

12-90

Cable Diagnostic

[0] Disabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-91

Auto Cross Over

[1] Enabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-92

IGMP Snooping

[1] Enabled

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

198

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

12-93

Cable Error Length

0 N/A

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint16

12-94

Broadcast Storm Protection

-1 %

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int8

12-95

Broadcast Storm Filter

[0] Broadcast only

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-96

Port Config

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

12-98

Interface Counters

4000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

12-99

Media Counters

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

Default value

4-set-up

4 4

4.1.16 13-** Smart Logic

Par. No. #

Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

13-0* SLC Settings

13-00

SL Controller Mode

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-01

Start Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-02

Stop Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-03

Reset SLC

[0] Do not reset SLC

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-1* Comparators
13-10

Comparator Operand

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-11

Comparator Operator

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-12

Comparator Value

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

13-1* RS Flip Flops

13-15

RS-FF Operand S

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-16

RS-FF Operand R

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

SL Controller Timer

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-3

TimD

13-2* Timers
13-20

13-4* Logic Rules

13-40

Logic Rule Boolean 1

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-41

Logic Rule Operator 1

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-42

Logic Rule Boolean 2

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-43

Logic Rule Operator 2

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-44

Logic Rule Boolean 3

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-5* States
13-51

SL Controller Event

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

13-52

SL Controller Action

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

4.1.17 14-** Special Functions

Par. Parameter description
No. #

Default value

4-set-up

14-00 Switching Pattern

ExpressionLimit

14-01 Switching Frequency

ExpressionLimit

14-03 Overmodulation

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] On

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-04 PWM Random

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-06 Dead Time Compensation

[1] On

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-10 Mains Failure

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance

[0] Trip

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-0* Inverter Switching

14-1* Mains On/Off

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

199

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

14-13 Mains Failure Step Factor

1 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

100 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out

14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level
14-16 Kin. Backup Gain

Uint8

14-2* Trip Reset

14-20 Reset Mode

[0] Manual reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-21 Automatic Restart Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Normal operation

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-22 Operation Mode

14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit

60 s

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] No action

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

14-28 Production Settings

14-29 Service Code
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain

100 %

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint16

14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint16

[1] Enabled

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[0] Auto

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-35 Stall Protection

14-36 Fieldweakening Function

14-4* Energy Optimising

66 %

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation

14-40 VT Level

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-43 Motor Cosphi

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter

[1] On

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-52 Fan Control

[0] Auto

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-53 Fan Monitor

[1] Warning

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

14-51 DC Link Compensation

[0] No Filter

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-56 Capacitance Output Filter

14-55 Output Filter

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-7

Uint16

14-57 Inductance Output Filter

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-6

Uint16

14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

14-7* Compatibility
14-72 Legacy Alarm Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

14-73 Legacy Warning Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC

[1] Yes

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

14-88 Option Data Storage

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Protect Option Config.

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

14-8* Options

14-89 Option Detection

14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level

4.1.18 15-** Drive Information

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

0h

All set-ups

FALSE

74

Uint32

15-0* Operating Data

15-00

Operating hours

15-01

Running Hours

0h

All set-ups

FALSE

74

Uint32

15-02

kWh Counter

0 kWh

All set-ups

FALSE

75

Uint32

15-03

Power Up's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

200

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

15-04

Over Temp's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-05

Over Volt's

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-06

Reset kWh Counter

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-07

Reset Running Hours Counter

[0] Do not reset

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-1* Data Log Settings

15-10

Logging Source

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

15-11

Logging Interval

ExpressionLimit

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

TimD

15-12

Trigger Event

[0] False

1 set-up

TRUE

Uint8

15-13

Logging Mode

[0] Log always

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-14

Samples Before Trigger

50 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

15-2* Historic Log

15-20

Historic Log: Event

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

15-21

Historic Log: Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

15-22

Historic Log: Time

0 ms

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Uint32
Uint8

15-3* Fault Log

15-30

Fault Log: Error Code

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

15-31

Fault Log: Value

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16

15-32

Fault Log: Time

0s

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

15-4* Drive Identification

15-40

FC Type

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[6]

15-41

Power Section

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-42

Voltage

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-43

Software Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[5]

15-44

Ordered Typecode String

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-45

Actual Typecode String

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-46

Frequency Converter Ordering

No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-47

Power Card Ordering No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-48

LCP Id No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-49

SW ID Control Card

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-50

SW ID Power Card

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-51

Frequency Converter Serial

Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[10]

15-53

Power Card Serial Number

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[19]

15-58

Smart Setup Filename

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

VisStr[16]

15-59

CSIV Filename

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

FALSE

VisStr[16]

15-6* Option Ident

15-60

Option Mounted

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-61

Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-62

Option Ordering No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[8]

15-63

Option Serial No

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[18]

15-70

Option in Slot A

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-71

Slot A Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-72

Option in Slot B

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-73

Slot B Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-74

Option in Slot C0/E0

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-75

Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

15-76

Option in Slot C1/E1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[30]

15-77

Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[20]

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

15-8* Operating Data II

15-80

Fan Running Hours

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

201

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

Par. No. # Parameter description

15-81

Preset Fan Running Hours

15-89

Configuration Change Counter

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

0h

All set-ups

TRUE

74

Uint32

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16
Uint16

15-9* Parameter Info

15-92

Defined Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

15-93

Modified Parameters

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

15-98

Drive Identification

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

VisStr[40]

15-99

Parameter Metadata

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

4.1.19 16-** Data Readouts

Par. Parameter description
No. #

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion
index

Type

16-0* General Status

16-00 Control Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-02 Reference %

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

16-03 Status Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

N2

0 CustomReadoutUnit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Int32

16-10 Power [kW]

0 kW

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-11 Power [hp]

0 hp

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Int32

16-12 Motor Voltage

0V

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint16

16-01 Reference [Unit]

16-05 Main Actual Value [%]

16-09 Custom Readout
16-1* Motor Status

16-13 Frequency

0 Hz

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint16

16-14 Motor current

0A

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Int32

16-15 Frequency [%]

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

N2

16-16 Torque [Nm]

0 Nm

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

16-17 Speed [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

FALSE

67

Int32

16-18 Motor Thermal

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

16-19 KTY sensor temperature

0 C

All set-ups

FALSE

100

Int16

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

16-22 Torque [%]

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16

16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW]

0 kW

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

0.0000 Ohm

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

0 Nm

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int32

0V

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

16-20 Motor Angle

16-21 Torque [%] High Res.

16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance

16-25 Torque [Nm] High

16-3* Drive Status

16-30 DC Link Voltage
16-32 Brake Energy /s

0 kW

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-33 Brake Energy /2 min

0 kW

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-34 Heatsink Temp.

0 C

All set-ups

FALSE

100

Uint8

16-35 Inverter Thermal

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

16-37 Inv. Max. Current

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Uint32

16-38 SL Controller State

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

16-39 Control Card Temp.

0 C

All set-ups

FALSE

100

Uint8

16-40 Logging Buffer Full

[0] No

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

VisStr[
50]

16-45 Motor Phase U Current

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

202

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Parameter Lists

16-46 Motor Phase V Current

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

16-47 Motor Phase W Current

0A

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Int32

16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

FALSE

67

Int32

16-49 Current Fault Source

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

16-50 External Reference

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

16-51 Pulse Reference

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

16-52 Feedback[Unit]

0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-53 Digi Pot Reference

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-2

Int16

16-57 Feedback [RPM]

0 RPM

All set-ups

FALSE

67

Int32

16-5* Ref. & Feedb.

16-6* Inputs & Outputs

16-60 Digital Input
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting
16-62 Analog Input 53
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

[0] Current

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

[0] Current

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

16-64 Analog Input 54

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-66 Digital Output [bin]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16

16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int32

16-71 Relay Output [bin]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Int16

16-72 Counter A

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-73 Counter B

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

16-74 Prec. Stop Counter

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

16-75 Analog In X30/11

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-76 Analog In X30/12

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int32

16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

-3

Int16

16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

16-82 Fieldbus REF 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

N2

16-84 Comm. Option STW

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

16-85 FC Port CTW 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

V2

16-86 FC Port REF 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

N2

16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

16-90 Alarm Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-91 Alarm Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-92 Warning Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-93 Warning Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-94 Ext. Status Word

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port

16-9* Diagnosis Readouts

4.1.20 17-** Motor Feedb.Option

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

[1] RS422 (5V TTL)

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

1024 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface

17-10

Signal Type

17-11

Resolution (PPR)

17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

203

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

[0] None

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

17-20

Protocol Selection

17-21

Resolution (Positions/Rev)

17-24

SSI Data Length

17-25

Clock Rate

17-26

SSI Data Format

17-34

HIPERFACE Baudrate

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

13 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

[0] Gray code

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

[4] 9600

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

2 N/A

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

7V

1 set-up

FALSE

-1

Uint8

17-5* Resolver Interface

17-50

Poles

17-51

Input Voltage

17-52

Input Frequency

10 kHz

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

17-53

Transformation Ratio

0.5 N/A

1 set-up

FALSE

-1

Uint8

17-56

Encoder Sim. Resolution

[0] Disabled

1 set-up

FALSE

Uint8

17-59

Resolver Interface

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

17-6* Monitoring and App.

17-60

Feedback Direction

[0] Clockwise

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

17-61

Feedback Signal Monitoring

[1] Warning

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Default value

4-set-up

4.1.21 18-** Data Readouts 2

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

18-3* Analog Readouts

18-36

Analog Input X48/2 [mA]

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

18-37

Temp. Input X48/4

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

18-38

Temp. Input X48/7

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

18-39

Temp. Input X48/10

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint16

18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2

18-60

Digital Input 2

18-9* PID Readouts

18-90

Process PID Error

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

18-91

Process PID Output

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

18-92

Process PID Clamped Output

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

18-93

Process PID Gain Scaled

Output

0%

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Int16

Default value

4-set-up

[0] Abs. Freq., Abs.

Time

All set-ups

4.1.22 30-** Special Features

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

30-0* Wobbler
30-00

Wobble Mode

FALSE

Uint8

30-01

Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]

5 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

30-02

Wobble Delta Frequency [%]

25 %

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30-03

Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling

Resource

[0] No function

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30-04

Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]

0 Hz

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

30-05

Wobble Jump Frequency [%]

0%

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30-06

Wobble Jump Time

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

204

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

30-07

Wobble Sequence Time

10 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

30-08

Wobble Up/ Down Time

5s

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint16

30-09

Wobble Random Function

[0] Off

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30-10

Wobble Ratio

1 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

30-11

Wobble Random Ratio Max.

10 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

30-12

Wobble Random Ratio Min.

0.1 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint8

30-19

Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled

0 Hz

All set-ups

FALSE

-1

Uint16

30-2* Adv. Start Adjust

30-20

High Starting Torque Time [s]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint16

30-21

High Starting Torque Current

[%]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-1

Uint32

30-22

Locked Rotor Protection

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

30-23

Locked Rotor Detection Time

[s]

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-2

Uint8

30-8* Compatibility (I)

30-80

d-axis Inductance (Ld)

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

FALSE

-6

Int32

30-81

Brake Resistor (ohm)

ExpressionLimit

1 set-up

TRUE

-2

Uint32

30-83

Speed PID Proportional Gain

ExpressionLimit

All set-ups

TRUE

-4

Uint32

30-84

Process PID Proportional

Gain

0.100 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

Default value

4-set-up

4.1.23 32-** MCO Basic Settings

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

32-0* Encoder 2
32-00

Incremental Signal Type

[1] RS422 (5V TTL)

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-01

Incremental Resolution

1024 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-02

Absolute Protocol

[0] None

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-03

Absolute Resolution

8192 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-04

Absolute Encoder Baudrate

X55

[4] 9600

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

32-05

Absolute Encoder Data

Length

25 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-06

Absolute Encoder Clock

Frequency

262 kHz

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-07

Absolute Encoder Clock

Generation

[1] On

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-08

Absolute Encoder Cable

Length

0m

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

32-09

Encoder Monitoring

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-10

Rotational Direction

[1] No action

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-11

User Unit Denominator

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-12

User Unit Numerator

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-13

Enc.2 Control

[0] No soft changing

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-14

Enc.2 node ID

127 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-15

Enc.2 CAN guard

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-3* Encoder 1
32-30

Incremental Signal Type

[1] RS422 (5V TTL)

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-31

Incremental Resolution

1024 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

205

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

32-32

Absolute Protocol

[0] None

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-33

Absolute Resolution

8192 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-35

Absolute Encoder Data

Length

25 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-36

Absolute Encoder Clock

Frequency

262 kHz

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-37

Absolute Encoder Clock

Generation

[1] On

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-38

Absolute Encoder Cable

Length

32-39

Encoder Monitoring

0m

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-40

Encoder Termination

[1] On

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-43

Enc.1 Control

[0] No soft changing

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-44

Enc.1 node ID

127 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-45

Enc.1 CAN guard

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[2] Encoder 2 X55

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-5* Feedback Source

32-50

Source Slave

32-51

MCO 302 Last Will

32-52

Source Master

[1] Trip

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] Encoder 1 X56

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-6* PID Controller

32-60

Proportional factor

30 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-61

Derivative factor

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-62

Integral factor

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-63

Limit Value for Integral Sum

1000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

32-64

PID Bandwidth

1000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

32-65

Velocity Feed-Forward

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-66

Acceleration Feed-Forward

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-67

Max. Tolerated Position Error

20000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-68

Reverse Behavior for Slave

[0] Reversing allowed

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-69

Sampling Time for PID

Control

1 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

32-70

Scan Time for Profile

Generator

1 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint8

32-71

Size of the Control Window

(Activation)

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-72

Size of the Control Window

(Deactiv.)

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-73

Integral limit filter time

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int16

32-74

Position error filter time

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int16

1500 RPM

2 set-ups

TRUE

67

Uint32

1s

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

32-8* Velocity & Accel.

32-80

Maximum Velocity (Encoder)

32-81

Shortest Ramp

32-82

Ramp Type

[0] Linear

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

32-83

Velocity Resolution

100 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-84

Default Velocity

50 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-85

Default Acceleration

50 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

32-86

Acc. up for limited jerk

100 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

32-87

Acc. down for limited jerk

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

32-88

Dec. up for limited jerk

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

32-89

Dec. down for limited jerk

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

32-9* Development

206

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

32-90

[0] Controlcard

2 set-ups

Default value

4-set-up

Debug Source

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation
TRUE

Type

Uint8

4.1.24 33-** MCO Adv. Settings

Par. No. # Parameter description

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

4 4

33-0* Home Motion

33-00

Force HOME

[0] Home not forced

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-01

Zero Point Offset from Home

Pos.

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-02

Ramp for Home Motion

10 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-03

Velocity of Home Motion

10 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-04

Behaviour during
HomeMotion

[0] Revers and index

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-1* Synchronization
33-10

Sync Factor Master

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-11

Sync Factor Slave

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-12

Position Offset for Synchronization

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-13

Accuracy Window for Position

Sync.

1000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-14

Relative Slave Velocity Limit

0%

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-15

Marker Number for Master

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-16

Marker Number for Slave

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-17

Master Marker Distance

4096 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-18

Slave Marker Distance

4096 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-19

Master Marker Type

[0] Encoder Z positive

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-20

Slave Marker Type

[0] Encoder Z positive

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

Master Marker Tolerance

33-21

Window

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-22

Slave Marker Tolerance

Window

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-23

Start Behaviour for Marker

Sync

[0] Leading marker

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-24

Marker Number for Fault

10 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-25

Marker Number for Ready

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-26

Velocity Filter

0 us

2 set-ups

TRUE

-6

Int32

33-27

Offset Filter Time

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32

33-28

Marker Filter Configuration

[0] Marker filter 1

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-29

Filter Time for Marker Filter

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

33-30

Maximum Marker Correction

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-31

Synchronisation Type

[0] Standard

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-32

Feed Forward Velocity

Adaptation

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-33

Velocity Filter Window

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint32

33-34

Slave Marker filter time

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint32
Uint8

33-4* Limit Handling

33-40

Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch

[0] Call error handler

2 set-ups

TRUE

33-41

Negative Software End Limit

-500000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

33-42

Positive Software End Limit

500000 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int32

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

207

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring sion index
operation

Type

33-43

Negative Software End Limit

Active

[0] Inactive

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-44

Positive Software End Limit

Active

[0] Inactive

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-45

Time in Target Window

0 ms

2 set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint8

33-46

Target Window LimitValue

1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-47

Size of Target Window

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-5* I/O Configuration

33-50

Terminal X57/1 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-51

Terminal X57/2 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-52

Terminal X57/3 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-53

Terminal X57/4 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-54

Terminal X57/5 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-55

Terminal X57/6 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-56

Terminal X57/7 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-57

Terminal X57/8 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-58

Terminal X57/9 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-59

Terminal X57/10 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-60

Terminal X59/1 and X59/2

Mode

[1] Output

2 set-ups

FALSE

Uint8

33-61

Terminal X59/1 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-62

Terminal X59/2 Digital Input

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-63

Terminal X59/1 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-64

Terminal X59/2 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-65

Terminal X59/3 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-66

Terminal X59/4 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-67

Terminal X59/5 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-68

Terminal X59/6 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-69

Terminal X59/7 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-70

Terminal X59/8 Digital Output

[0] No function

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

33-8* Global Parameters

33-80

Activated Program Number

33-81

Power-up State

33-82

Drive Status Monitoring

33-83

Behaviour afterError

33-84

Behaviour afterEsc.

33-85

MCO Supplied by External

24VDC

33-86

Terminal at alarm

33-87

Terminal state at alarm

33-88

Status word at alarm

-1 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Int8

[1] Motor on

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[1] On

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Coast

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Controlled stop

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] No

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Relay 1

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Do nothing

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

0 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

33-9* MCO Port Settings

33-90

X62 MCO CAN node ID

33-91

X62 MCO CAN baud rate

33-94

X60 MCO RS485 serial

termination

33-95

X60 MCO RS485 serial baud

rate

208

127 N/A

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[20] 125 Kbps

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[0] Off

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

[2] 9600 Baud

2 set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.25 34-** MCO Data Readouts

Par. No. # Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
Converduring
sion index
operation

Type

34-0* PCD Write Par.

34-01

PCD 1 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-02

PCD 2 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-03

PCD 3 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-04

PCD 4 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-05

PCD 5 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-06

PCD 6 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-07

PCD 7 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-08

PCD 8 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-09

PCD 9 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-10

PCD 10 Write to MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-2* PCD Read Par.

34-21

PCD 1 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-22

PCD 2 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-23

PCD 3 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-24

PCD 4 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-25

PCD 5 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-26

PCD 6 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-27

PCD 7 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-28

PCD 8 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-29

PCD 9 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-30

PCD 10 Read from MCO

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-4* Inputs & Outputs

34-40

Digital Inputs

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-41

Digital Outputs

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-5* Process Data

34-50

Actual Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-51

Commanded Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-52

Actual Master Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-53

Slave Index Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-54

Master Index Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-55

Curve Position

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-56

Track Error

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-57

Synchronizing Error

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-58

Actual Velocity

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-59

Actual Master Velocity

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-60

Synchronizing Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-61

Axis Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-62

Program Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Int32

34-64

MCO 302 Status

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-65

MCO 302 Control

0 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint16

34-7* Diagnosis readouts

34-70

MCO Alarm Word 1

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

34-71

MCO Alarm Word 2

0 N/A

All set-ups

FALSE

Uint32

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

209

4 4

4 4

Parameter Lists

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

4.1.26 35-** Sensor Input Option

Par. No. #

Parameter description

Default value

4-set-up

FC 302
only

Change
during
operation

Conversion index

Type

35-0* Temp. Input Mode

35-00

Term. X48/4 temp. unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-01

Term. X48/4 input type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-02

Term. X48/7 temp. unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-03

Term. X48/7 input type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-04

Term. X48/10 temp. unit

[60] C

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-05

Term. X48/10 input type

[0] Not Connected

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-06

Temperature sensor alarm

function

[5] Stop and trip

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-1* Temp. Input X48/4

35-14

Term. X48/4 filter time

constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

35-15

Term. X48/4 temp. monitor

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-16

Term. X48/4 low temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-17

Term. X48/4 high temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

35-2* Temp. Input X48/7

35-24

Term. X48/7 filter time

constant

35-25

Term. X48/7 temp. monitor

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-26

Term. X48/7 low temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-27

Term. X48/7 high temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-3* Temp. Input X48/10

35-34

Term. X48/10 filter time

constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

35-35

Term. X48/10 temp. monitor

[0] Disabled

All set-ups

TRUE

Uint8

35-36

Term. X48/10 low temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-37

Term. X48/10 high temp. limit

App.Dependent

All set-ups

TRUE

Int16

35-4* Analog Input X48/2

35-42

Term. X48/2 low current

4.00 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

35-43

Term. X48/2 high current

20.00 mA

All set-ups

TRUE

-5

Int16

35-44

Term. X48/2 low ref./feedb.

value

0.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

35-45

Term. X48/2 high ref./feedb.

value

100.000 N/A

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Int32

35-46

Term. X48/2 filter time

constant

0.001 s

All set-ups

TRUE

-3

Uint16

210

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Status Messages

If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its

cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
(see also Table 5.1).

5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages

A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a
code on the display.
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be
critical, but are not necessarily so.

Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,

meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.
Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
automatic wake-up is possible!)

In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips.

Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has
been rectified.

If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 5.1,

this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm,
or else that it is possible to specify whether a warning or
an alarm should be displayed for a given fault.

Three ways to reset:

Press [Reset].

Via a digital input with the Reset function.

Via serial communication/optional fieldbus.
NOTICE
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to
restart the motor.

This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries
on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
flashing until the frequency converter is reset.

NOTICE
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and
no stall detection is active when 1-10 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
No.

Description

Warning

Alarm/Trip

Alarm/Trip Lock

10 Volts low

Live zero error

(X)

No motor

(X)

Mains phase loss

(X)

DC link voltage high

DC link voltage low

DC over-voltage

DC under voltage

Inverter overloaded

10

Motor ETR over temperature

(X)

(X)

Parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection

11

Motor thermistor over temperature

(X)

(X)

Parameter 1-90 Motor

Thermal Protection

12

Torque limit

13

Over Current

(X)

Parameter
Reference
Parameter 6-01 Live
Zero Timeout Function
Parameter 1-80 Functio
n at Stop

(X)

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

(X)

Parameter 14-12 Functi

on at Mains Imbalance

211

5 5

5 5

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

No.

Description

Warning

Alarm/Trip

14

Earth Fault

15

Hardware mismatch

16

Short Circuit

17

Control word time-out

20

Temp. Input Error

21

Param Error

22

Hoist Mech. Brake

(X)

23

Internal Fans

24

External Fans

25

Brake resistor short-circuited

26

Brake resistor power limit

(X)

27

Brake chopper short-circuited

28

Brake check

(X)

(X)

29

Heatsink temp

30

Motor phase U missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor

Phase Function

31

Motor phase V missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor

Phase Function

32

Motor phase W missing

(X)

(X)

(X)

4-58 Missing Motor

Phase Function

33

Inrush Fault

34

Fieldbus communication fault

35

Option Fault

36

Mains failure

37

Phase imbalance

38

Internal Fault

39

Heatsink sensor

40

Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27

(X)

Alarm/Trip Lock

(X)

Parameter
Reference

Parameter 8-04 Control

Word Timeout Function

X
X

(X)

Parameter group 2-2*

(X)

Parameter 2-13 Brake

Power Monitoring
Parameter 2-15 Brake
Check

X
X

(X)

Parameter 5-00 Digital

I/O Mode,
parameter 5-01 Termina
l 27 Mode

41

Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29

(X)

42

Ovrld X30/6-7

(X)

43

Ext. Supply (option)

45

Earth Fault 2

46

Pwr. card supply

47

24 V supply low

48
49

Parameter 5-00 Digital

I/O Mode,
parameter 5-02 Termina
l 29 Mode

X
X

1.8 V supply low

Speed limit

50

AMA calibration failed

51

AMA check Unom and Inom

52

AMA low Inom

53

AMA motor too big

54

AMA motor too small

55

AMA parameter out of range

212

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-86 Trip Speed Low

[RPM]

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

No.

Description

Warning

Alarm/Trip

Alarm/Trip Lock

Parameter
Reference

56

AMA interrupted by user

57

AMA time-out

58

AMA internal fault

59

Current limit

60

External Interlock

61

Feedback Error

(X)

(X)

Parameter 4-30 Motor

Feedback Loss Function

62

Output Frequency at Maximum Limit

63

Mechanical Brake Low

(X)

Parameter 2-20 Release

Brake Current

64

Voltage Limit

65

Control Board Over-temperature

66

Heat sink Temperature Low

67

Option Configuration has Changed

68

Safe Stop

69

Pwr. Card Temp

70

Illegal FC configuration

71

PTC 1 Safe Stop

72

Dangerous failure

73

Safe Stop Auto Restart

74

PTC Thermistor

75

Illegal Profile Sel.

76

Power Unit Setup

77

Reduced power mode

78

Tracking Error

(X)

79

Illegal PS config

80

Drive Initialized to Default Value

81

CSIV corrupt

82

CSIV parameter error

83

Illegal Option Combination

84

No Safety Option

88

Option Detection

89

Mechanical Brake Sliding

90

Feedback Monitor

(X)

91

Analog input 54 wrong settings

99

Locked rotor

104

Mixing Fans

122

Mot. rotat. unexp.

123

Motor Mod. Changed

163

ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning

164

ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm

165

ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning

166

ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm

246

Pwr.card supply

250

New spare part

251

New Type Code

X
(X)

Parameter 5-19 Termina

l 37 Safe Stop

(X)1)
X

X
X

X
X
(X)

(X)

Parameter 5-19 Termina

l 37 Safe Stop
X

X
Parameter 14-59 Actual
Number of Inverter
Units
(X)

Parameter 4-34 Trackin

g Error Function
X

X
X
X
(X)

Parameter 17-61 Feedb

ack Signal Monitoring
X

X
X

S202

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

213

5 5

5 5

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Troubleshooting

frequency converter or connected parts. A trip lock

situation can only be reset by a power cycling.

(X) Dependent on parameter

1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode

A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the

motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs [1]). The origin event
that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency
converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an
action when an alarm occurs, which could damage the
Bit Hex

Dec

Alarm Word

Warning

yellow

Alarm

flashing red

Trip locked

yellow and red

Table 5.2 LED Indication

Alarm Word 2 Warning

Word

Warning
Word 2

Extended
Status Word

Extended
Status Word
2

Alarm Word Extended Status Word

0

00000001

Brake Check
(A28)

ServiceTrip,
Read/Write

Brake Check
(W28)

Start Delayed Ramping

Off

00000002

Pwr.card temp
(A69)

ServiceTrip,
(reserved)

Pwr.card temp
(A69)

Stop Delayed AMA Running

Hand/Auto

00000004

Earth Fault
(A14)

ServiceTrip,
Typecode/
Sparepart

Earth Fault
(W14)

reserved

Start CW/CCW
start_possible is active,
when the DI selections
[12] OR [13] are active
and the requested
direction matches the
reference sign

Profibus OFF1
active

00000008

Ctrl.Card Temp ServiceTrip,

(A65)
(reserved)

Ctrl.Card Temp
(W65)

reserved

Slow Down
Profibus OFF2
slow down command
active
active, e.g. via CTW bit 11
or DI

00000010

16

Ctrl. Word TO
(A17)

ServiceTrip,
(reserved)

Ctrl. Word TO
(W17)

00000020

32

Over Current
(A13)

reserved

Over Current
(W13)

reserved

Feedback High
feedback > 4-57

Relay 123
active

00000040

64

Torque Limit
(A12)

reserved

Torque Limit
(W12)

reserved

Feedback Low
feedback < 4-56

Start
Prevented

00000080

128

Motor Th Over
(A11)

reserved

Motor Th Over
(W11)

reserved

Output Current High

current > 4-51

Control Ready

00000100

256

Motor ETR
Over (A10)

reserved

Motor ETR Over reserved

(W10)

Output Current Low

current < 4-50

Drive Ready

00000200

512

Inverter Overld. Discharge High

(A9)

Inverter Overld Discharge

(W9)
High

Output Freq High

speed > 4-53

Quick Stop

10 00000400

1024

DC under Volt
(A8)

Start Failed

DC under Volt
(W8)

Multi-motor
underload

Output Freq Low

speed < 4-52

DC Brake

11 00000800

2048

DC over Volt
(A7)

Speed Limit

DC over Volt
(W7)

Multi-motor
Overload

Brake Check OK
brake test NOT ok

Stop

12 00001000

4096

Short Circuit
(A16)

External
Interlock

DC Voltage
Low (W6)

Compressor
Interlock

Braking Max
BrakePower > BrakePowerLimit (2-12)

Stand by

13 00002000

8192

Inrush Fault
(A33)

Illegal Option
Combi.

DC Voltage
High (W5)

Mechanical
Brake Sliding

Braking

Freeze Output
Request

14 00004000

16384

Mains ph. Loss

(A4)

No Safety
Option

Mains ph. Loss

(W4)

Safe Option
Warning

Out of Speed Range

Freeze Output

15 00008000

32768

AMA Not OK

reserved

No Motor (W3)

Auto DC
Braking

OVC Active

Jog Request

214

Catch Up
Profibus OFF3
catch up command
active
active, e.g. via CTW bit 12
or DI

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Troubleshooting

Bit Hex

Dec

Alarm Word

Alarm Word 2 Warning

Word

Warning
Word 2

Extended
Status Word

Extended
Status Word
2

AC Brake

Jog

Password Timelock
number of allowed
password trials exceeded
- timelock active

Start Request

16 00010000

65536

Live Zero Error reserved

(A2)

Live Zero Error

(W2)

17 00020000

131072

Internal Fault
(A38)

10V Low (W1)

18 00040000

262144

Brake Overload Fans error

(A26)

Brake Overload Fans Warn

(W26)

Password Protection
0-61 = ALL_NO_ACCESS
OR BUS_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_READONLY

Start

19 00080000

524288

U phase Loss
(A30)

ECB error

Brake Resistor
(W25)

ECB Warn

Reference High
reference > 4-55

Start Applied

20 00100000

1048576

V phase Loss
(A31)

Hoist
mechanical
brake (A22)

Brake IGBT
(W27)

Hoist
mechanical
brake (W22)

Reference Low
reference < 4-54

Start delay

21 00200000

2097152

W phase Loss
(A32)

reserved

Speed Limit
(W49)

reserved

Local Reference
Sleep
reference site = REMOTE > auto on pressed &
active

22 00400000

4194304

Fieldbus Fault
(A34)

reserved

Fieldbus Fault
(W34)

reserved

Protection mode notification

Sleep Boost

23 00800000

8388608

24 V Supply
Low (A47)

reserved

24V Supply
Low (W47)

reserved

Unused

Running

24 01000000

16777216

Mains Failure
(A36)

reserved

Mains Failure
(W36)

reserved

Unused

Drive Bypass

25 02000000

33554432

1.8V Supply
Low (A48)

Current Limit
(A59)

Current Limit
(W59)

reserved

Unused

Fire Mode

26 04000000

67108864

Brake Resistor
(A25)

Motor Rota-ting
Unexpectedly
(A122)

Low Temp
(W66)

reserved

Unused

External
Interlock

reserved

Voltage Limit
(W64)

reserved

Unused

Firemode
Limit Exceed

28 10000000 268435456 Option Change reserved

(A67)

Encoder loss
(W90)

reserved

Unused

Flying Start
active

29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialised Encoder loss

(A80)
(A90)

Output freq.
lim. (W62)

BackEMF too
High

Unused

30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop (A68) PTC Thermi-stor

(A74)

Safe Stop
(W68)

PTC Thermistor (W74)

Unused

31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake

low (A63)

Extended
Status Word

27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT

(A27)

KTY error

Dangerous
failure (A72)

KTY Warn

Protection Mode

Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word

The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnostics. See also parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50.
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 .
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or improper
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition.

Troubleshooting
Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the
warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If
the warning does not clear, replace the control
card.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

215

5 5

5 5

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error

This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one of the
analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value
programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty device
sending the signal can cause this condition.
Troubleshooting
Check connections on all the analog input
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for
signals, terminal 55 common. MCB 101 terminals
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common. MCB
109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6
common).

Check that the frequency converter programming

and switch settings match the analog signal type.

Perform input terminal signal test.

WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
No motor has been connected to the output of the
frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears
for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Options are programmed at 14-12 Function at Mains
Imbalance.
Troubleshooting
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to
the frequency converter.
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the
high-voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the lowvoltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
frequency converter trips after a time.
Troubleshooting
Connect a brake resistor

216

WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage

If the DC-link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit,
the frequency converter checks if a 24 V DC backup supply
is connected. If no 24 V DC backup supply is connected,
the frequency converter trips after a fixed time delay. The
time delay varies with unit size.
Troubleshooting
Check that the supply voltage matches the
frequency converter voltage.

Change the ramp type

Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function
Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag,
use kinetic back-up (parameter 14-10 Mains
Failure)

Perform soft charge circuit test.

WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload

The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning at
98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is
below 90%.
The fault is that the frequency converter has run with
more than 100% overload for too long.
Troubleshooting
Compare the output current shown on the LCP
with the frequency converter rated current.

Compare the output current shown on the LCP

with measured motor current.

Display the thermal drive load on the LCP and

monitor the value. When running above the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
the counter increases. When running below the
frequency converter continuous current rating,
the counter decreases.

WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature

According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter
issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault occurs
when the motor runs with more than 100% overload for
too long.
Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating.

Extend the ramp time

Perform input voltage test.

Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded

Check that the motor current set in 1-24 Motor
Current is correct.

Ensure that Motor data in parameters 1-20 to

1-25 are set correctly.

If an external fan is in use, check in

parameter 1-91 Motor External Fan that it is
selected.

Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation

(AMA) tunes the frequency converter to the
motor more accurately and reduces thermal
loading.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp

Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an
alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection.
Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating.

Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.

When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
thermistor is connected correctly between either
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage.
Check parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source selects
terminal 53 or 54.
When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that
the thermistor is connected correctly between
either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
and terminal 50. Check parameter 1-93 Thermistor
Source selects terminal 18 or 19.

WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit

The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this
warning from a warning-only condition to a warning
followed by an alarm.
Troubleshooting
If the motor torque limit is exceeded during ramp
up, extend the ramp up time.

ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault

There is current from the output phases to ground, either
in the cable between the frequency converter and the
motor or in the motor itself.
Troubleshooting
Remove power to the frequency converter and
repair the earth fault.
Check for earth faults in the motor by measuring
the resistance to ground of the motor leads and
the motor with a megohmmeter.
ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
A fitted option is not operational with the present control
board hardware or software.
Record the value of the following parameters and contact
Danfoss:

parameter 15-40 FC Type

parameter 15-41 Power Section
parameter 15-42 Voltage
15-43 Software Version
15-45 Actual Typecode String
15-49 SW ID Control Card
15-50 SW ID Power Card
15-60 Option Mounted
15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)

ALARM 16, Short circuit

There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.

If the generator torque limit is exceeded during

ramp down, extend the ramp down time.

Remove power to the frequency converter and repair the

short circuit.

If torque limit occurs while running, possibly

increase the torque limit. Make sure that the
system can operate safely at a higher torque.

Check the application for excessive current draw

on the motor.

WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout

There is no communication to the frequency converter.
The warning is only active when parameter 8-04 Control
Word Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
If parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5]
Stop and Trip, a warning appears and the frequency
converter ramps down until it stops then displays an
alarm.

WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current

The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s,
then the frequency converter trips and issues an alarm.
Shock loading or quick acceleration with high inertia loads
can cause this fault. If the acceleration during ramp up is
quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic back-up. If
extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can be
reset externally.
Troubleshooting
Remove power and check if the motor shaft can
be turned.

Check that the motor size matches the frequency

converter.

Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor

data.

Troubleshooting
Check connections on the serial communication
cable.

Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time

Verify a proper installation based on EMC

requirements.

Check the operation of the communication

equipment.

WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error

The temperature sensor is not connected.
WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is
reported in the LCP.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

217

5 5

5 5

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Troubleshooting
The affected parameter must be set to a valid
value.
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake
Report value shows what kind it is.
0 = The torque ref. was not reached before time out
(Parameter 2-27).
1 = Expected brake feedback not received before time out
(Parameters 2-23, 2-25).
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
For the D, E, and F Frame filters, the regulated voltage to
the fans is monitored.
Troubleshooting
Check for proper fan operation.

Cycle power to the frequency converter and

check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.

Check the sensors on the heat sink and control

card.

WARNING 24, External fan fault

The fan warning function is an extra protective function
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Troubleshooting
Check for proper fan operation.

Cycle power to the frequency converter and

check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.

Check the sensors on the heat sink and control

card.

WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit

The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
warning appears. The frequency converter is still
operational, but without the brake function.
Troubleshooting
Remove power to the frequency converter and
replace the brake resistor (see
parameter 2-15 Brake Check).
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The
calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and
the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC brake Max.
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking
power is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If
[2] Trip is selected in parameter 2-13 Brake Power
Monitoring, the frequency converter trips when the
dissipated braking power reaches 100%.

218

WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault

The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if a
short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still
operational but, since the brake transistor has shortcircuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
resistor, even if it is inactive.
Troubleshooting
Remove power to the frequency converter and
remove the brake resistor.
WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
Check 2-15 Brake Check.
ALARM 29, Heat Sink temp
The maximum temperature of the heat sink has been
exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the
temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature.
The trip and reset points are different based on the
frequency converter power size.
Troubleshooting
Check for the following conditions.
Ambient temperature too high.

Motor cable too long.

Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.

Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the

frequency converter.
Damaged heatsink fan.
Dirty heat sink.

ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing

Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase U.
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase V.
ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
motor is missing.
Remove power from the frequency converter and check
motor phase W.
ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
working.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault

An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific.
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication
fault.

No.

Text

3072-5122

Parameter value is outside its limits

5123

Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with

control board hardware

5124

Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with

control board hardware

5125

Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with

control board hardware

5126

ALARM 37, Phase imbalance

There is a current imbalance between the power units

Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with

control board hardware

5376-6231

ALARM 38, Internal fault

When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in
Table 5.4 is displayed.

Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or

Danfoss Service Department.

Table 5.4 Internal Fault Codes

WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure

This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to
the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is
not set to [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the
frequency converter and mains supply to the unit.

ALARM 39, Heat Sink sensor

No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor.

Troubleshooting
Cycle power

Check that the option is properly installed

Check for loose or missing wiring

It may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier or

service department. Note the code number for further
troubleshooting directions.
No.
0

Text
Serial port cannot be initialised. Contact your
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department.

256-258

Power EEPROM data is defective or too old.

Replace power card.

512-519

Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or

Danfoss Service Department.

783
1024-1284
1299

Parameter value outside of min/max limits

Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or the
Danfoss Service Department.
Option SW in slot A is too old

1300

Option SW in slot B is too old

1302

Option SW in slot C1 is too old

1315

Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed)

1316

Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)

1318

Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not

allowed)

1379-2819

Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or

Danfoss Service Department.

1792

HW reset of DSP

1793

Motor derived parameters not transferred correctly

to DSP

1794

Power data not transferred correctly at power up

to DSP

1795

The DSP has received too many unknown SPI

telegrams

1796

RAM copy error

2561

Replace control card

2820

LCP stack overflow

2821

Serial port overflow

2822

USB port overflow

5 5

The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on

the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the
power card and gate drive card.
WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27
Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove shortcircuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or
overload of digital output on X30/7
For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove
the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-32 Term
X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101).
For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-33 Term
X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101).
ALARM 43, Ext. supply
MCB 113 Ext. Relay Option is mounted without ext. 24 V
DC. Either connect an ext. 24 V DC supply or specify that
no external supply is used via parameter 14-80 Option
Supplied by External 24VDC [0]. A change in
parameter 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC requires
a power cycle.
ALARM 45, Earth fault 2
Ground fault.
Troubleshooting
Check for proper grounding and loose
connections.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Check for proper wire size.

Check motor cables for short-circuits or leakage
currents.

219

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

ALARM 46, Power card supply

The supply on the power card is out of range.
There are 3 power supplies generated by the switch mode
power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V, 18 V.
When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 option,
only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When
powered with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are
monitored.
Troubleshooting
Check for a defective power card.

5 5

Check for a defective control card.

Check for a defective option card.
If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper
supply power.

WARNING 47, 24 V supply low

The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. This alarm
arises when the detected voltage of terminal 12 is lower
than 18 V.
Troubleshooting
Check for a defective control card.
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
control card. Check for a defective control card. If an
option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition.
WARNING 49, Speed limit
When the speed is not within the specified range in
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed
High Limit [RPM], the frequency converter shows a warning.
When the speed is below the specified limit in 1-86 Trip
Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or stopping), the
frequency converter trips.

ALARM 57, AMA internal fault

Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can over heat
the motor.
ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
Contact the Danfoss supplier.
WARNING 59, Current limit
The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
Ensure that motor data in parameters 120 to 125 are set
correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that
the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
WARNING 60, External interlock
A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external
to the frequency converter. An external interlock has
commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the
external fault condition. To resume normal operation,
apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external
interlock. Reset the frequency converter.
WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
An error between calculated speed and speed
measurement from feedback device. The function Warning/
Alarm/Disabling setting is in parameter 4-30 Motor
Feedback Loss Function. Accepted error setting in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error and the allowed
time the error occur setting in parameter 4-32 Motor
Feedback Loss Timeout. During a commissioning procedure
the function may be effective.
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
The output frequency has reached the value set in
4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application to
determine the cause. Possibly increase the output
frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a
higher output frequency. The warning clears when the
output drops below the maximum limit.

ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed

Contact Danfoss supplier or Danfoss service department.

ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low

The actual motor current has not exceeded the release
brake current within the start delay time window.

ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom

The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to
1-25.

WARNING 64, Voltage limit

The combination of load and speed demands a motor
voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.

ALARM 52, AMA low Inom

The motor current is too low. Check the settings.

Troubleshooting
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits

ALARM 53, AMA motor too big

The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the
acceptable range. AMA cannot run.
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user
The user has interrupted the AMA.

220

WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature

The cut-out temperature of the control card is 80 C.

Check for clogged filters

Check fan operation
Check the control card

WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low

The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
module.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a

trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at
Stop
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed
One or more options have either been added or removed
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
change is intentional and reset the unit.
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated
Safe Torque Off has been activated. To resume normal
operation, apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset
signal (via bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]).
ALARM 69, Power card temperature
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too
hot or too cold.
Troubleshooting
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits.

Check for clogged filters.

Check fan operation.
Check the power card.

ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration

The control card and power card are incompatible. To
check compatibility, contact the Danfoss supplier with the
type code of the unit from the nameplate and the part
numbers of the cards.
ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
Safe Torque Off has been activated from the PTC
Thermistor Card MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal
operation can be resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V
DC to Terminal 37 again (when the motor temperature
reaches an acceptable level) and when the Digital Input
from the MCB 112 is deactivated. When that happens, a
reset signal must be is be sent (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by
pressing [Reset]).
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure
Safe Torque Off with trip lock. An unexpected combination
of Safe Torque Off commands has occurred:

MCB 112 VLT PTC Thermistor Card enables

X44/10, but safe stop is not enabled.

MCB 112 is the only device using Safe Torque Off

(specified through selection [4] or [5] in
parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop), Safe Torque
Off is activated, and X44/10 is not activated.

WARNING 73, Safe Stop auto restart

Safe stopped. With automatic restart enabled, the motor
could start when the fault is cleared.
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor
Alarm related to the ATEX option. The PTC is not working.

ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel.

Parameter value must not be written while motor is
running. Stop motor before writing MCO profile to
parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile for instance.
WARNING 76, Power unit setup
The required number of power units does not match the
detected number of active power units.
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
The frequency converter is operating in reduced power
mode (less than the allowed number of inverter sections).
This warning is generated on power cycle when the
frequency converter is set to run with fewer inverters, and
remains on.
ALARM 78, Tracking error
The difference between set point value and actual value
has exceeded the value in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error.
Disable the function by parameter 4-34 Tracking Error
Function or select an alarm/warning also in
parameter 4-34 Tracking Error Function. Investigate the
mechanics around the load and motor, check feedback
connections from motor encoder to frequency
converter. Select motor feedback function in
parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function. Adjust
tracking error band in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error and
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping.
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
The scaling card has an incorrect part number or is not
installed. The MK102 connector on the power card could
not be installed.
ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
Parameter settings are initialised to default settings after a
manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt
CSIV file has syntax errors.
ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
CSIV failed to init a parameter.
ALARM 83, Illegal option combination
The mounted options are incompatible.
ALARM 84, No safety option
The safety option was removed without applying a general
reset. Reconnect the safety option.
ALARM 88, Option detection
A change in the option layout was detected.
parameter 14-89 Option Detection is set to [0] Frozen configuration and the option layout has been changed.

To apply the change, enable option layout

changes in parameter 14-89 Option Detection.

Alternatively, restore the correct option configuration.

WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding

The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
RPM.

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

221

5 5

5 5

Troubleshooting

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

ALARM 90, Feedback monitor

Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and
eventually replace the MCB 102 or MCB 103.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input)
when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal
54.
ALARM 99, Locked rotor
Rotor is blocked.

WARNING 250, New spare part

A component in the frequency converter has been
replaced. Reset the frequency converter for normal
operation.
WARNING 251, New typecode
The power card or other components have been replaced
and the typecode changed. Reset to remove the warning
and resume normal operation.

WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault

The fan is not operating. The fan monitor checks that the
fan is spinning at power-up or whenever the mixing fan is
turned on. The mixing-fan fault can be configured as a
warning or an alarm trip by parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Cycle power to the frequency converter to
determine if the warning/alarm returns.
WARNING/ALARM 122, Mot. rotat. unexp.
Frequency converter is performing a function that requires
the motor to be at standstill, e.g. DC hold for PM motors.
WARNING 123, Motor Mod. Changed
The motor selected in parameter 1-11 Motor Model is not
correct and the selection has been corrected
WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
The frequency converter has run above the characteristic
curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83%
and de-activated at 65% of the permitted thermal
overload.
ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm
Operating above the characteristic curve for more than 60
s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm and the
frequency converter trips.
WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning
The frequency converter is running more than 50 s below
the permitted minimum frequency (parameter 1-98 ATEX
ETR interpol. points freq. [0]).
ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
The frequency converter has operated more than 60 s (in a
period of 600 s) below the permitted minimum frequency
(parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. [0]).
ALARM 246, Power card supply
This alarm is only for F Frame frequency converters. It is
equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log
indicates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
converter.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
222

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Index

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Index

Control
cables................................................................................................... 10
card..................................................................................................... 216
principle.............................................................................................. 36

Abbreviations.......................................................................................... 3

Conventions............................................................................................. 4

Abs. Enc. Interface, 17-2*............................................................... 165

Cooling.................................................................................................... 54

Adjustable Warnings, 4-5*.............................................................. 77

Copy/Save, 0-5*................................................................................... 34

Adv.
Motor Data, 1-3*............................................................................... 41
Start Adjust, 30-2*......................................................................... 169

Ctrl. Word Settings, 8-1*................................................................ 115

Advanced Process PID Ctrl., 7-4*................................................ 112

Current
Limit Control, 14-3*...................................................................... 148
rating.................................................................................................. 216

Alarm
Log, 15-3*......................................................................................... 155
Messages.......................................................................................... 211

AMA............................................................................................... 216, 220

Analog
I/O Mode, 6-0*................................................................................ 100
input................................................................................................... 216
Input 1, 6-1*..................................................................................... 100
Input 2, 6-2*..................................................................................... 101
Input 3 MCB 101............................................................................. 102
Input 4 MCB 101............................................................................. 102
Input X48/2 (MCB 114), 35-4*.................................................... 172
inputs...................................................................................................... 5
Output 1, 6-5*................................................................................. 103
Output 2 MCB 101......................................................................... 103
Output 3 MCB 113, 6-7*.............................................................. 105
Output 4 MCB 113, 6-8*.............................................................. 106
signal.................................................................................................. 216

Brake
control............................................................................................... 217
Energy Funct...................................................................................... 58
power...................................................................................................... 5
resistor............................................................................................... 216
Braking.................................................................................................. 218
Break-away torque................................................................................ 5
Bus
Controlled, 5-9*................................................................................ 98
Jog, 8-9*............................................................................................ 122

Data
Log Settings, 15-1*........................................................................ 153
Readouts 2, 18-**........................................................................... 167
Readouts, 16-**.............................................................................. 159
DC-Brakes............................................................................................... 57
DC-link................................................................................................... 216
Default
settings................................................................................................ 22
Settings............................................................................................. 174
DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus, 10-**................................................... 123
Diagnosis Read-Outs, 16-9*......................................................... 164
Digital
I/O Mode, 5-0*................................................................................... 80
input................................................................................................... 217
Inputs, 5-1*......................................................................................... 80
Pot.Meter, 3-9*.................................................................................. 72
Digital/Bus, 8-5*................................................................................ 120
Display Mode........................................................................................ 15
Drive
Identification, 15-4*...................................................................... 156
Status, 16-3*.................................................................................... 160

Energy Optimising, 14-4*.............................................................. 149

Environment, 14-5*.......................................................................... 149
Ethernet, 12-**................................................................................... 123
ETR........................................................................................................... 160

Catch up.................................................................................................. 82

Ext. Process PID Ctrl., 7-5*............................................................. 112

Clockwise................................................................................................ 49
Coasting....................................................................................... 4, 14, 80
Communication option.................................................................. 218
Comparators, 13-1*......................................................................... 128
Compatibility,
14-7*................................................................................................... 151
30-8*................................................................................................... 170
Configuration..................................................................................... 114

FC
MC Protocol Set, 8-4*................................................................... 118
Port Diagnostics, 8-8*.................................................................. 122
Port Settings, 8-3*......................................................................... 117
Feedback.............................................................................................. 219
Fieldbus & FC Port, 16-8*............................................................... 163
Freeze output................................................................................... 4, 80
Fuses....................................................................................................... 219

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

223

Index

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Mechanical brake................................................................................ 60

Monitoring and Application, 17-6*........................................... 166

General
settings................................................................................................ 36
Settings, 8-0*................................................................................... 114
Status, 16-0*.................................................................................... 159

Historic Log, 15-2*............................................................................ 155

Motor
current............................................................................................... 220
data........................................................................................... 216, 220
Data, 1-2*............................................................................................ 40
Feedb. Option, 17-**.................................................................... 165
Feedback Monitoring, 4-3*........................................................... 76
Limits, 4-1*.......................................................................................... 74
power................................................................................................. 220
protection........................................................................................... 52
Status, 16-1*.................................................................................... 159
Temperature, 1-9*............................................................................ 52

Graphical display................................................................................. 12

Heat sink............................................................................................... 219

I/O Options, 5-8*.................................................................................. 98

Numerical Local Control Panel...................................................... 21

Inc. Enc. Interface, 17-1*................................................................ 165

Indexed parameters........................................................................... 21
Indicator lights..................................................................................... 13
Initialisation........................................................................................... 22
Input terminal.................................................................................... 216
Inputs and Outputs, 16-6*............................................................ 162
Intermediate circuit......................................................................... 216
Inverter Switching, 14-0*.............................................................. 142

Operating
Data, 15-0*....................................................................................... 153
mode.................................................................................................... 25

Operation/Display, 0-**.................................................................... 25
Option Ident. , 15*6*....................................................................... 156
Options, 14-8*.................................................................................... 151
Other Ramps, 3-8*............................................................................... 71

Jog................................................................................................................ 4

Output
current............................................................................................... 216
speed.................................................................................................... 49

Language package............................................................................. 25
LCP
LCP.................................................................................. 4, 6, 12, 14, 21
Custom Readout, 0-3*.................................................................... 31
Display, 0-2*....................................................................................... 28
Keypad, 0-4*....................................................................................... 33
Keys......................................................................................................... 1
LEDs........................................................................................................... 12

Parameter
Info, 15-9*......................................................................................... 157
selection.............................................................................................. 19
Set-Up.................................................................................................. 16
Password, 0-6*...................................................................................... 34
Phase loss............................................................................................. 216
Potentiometer Reference................................................................ 11

Local reference..................................................................................... 26

Process
Ctrl. Feedb., 7-2*............................................................................ 110
PID Ctrl., 7-3*................................................................................... 111

Logic Rules, 13-4*............................................................................. 133

Profibus, 9-**...................................................................................... 123

Load Depend. Setting, 1-6*............................................................ 47

Programming..................................................................................... 216

Protection Mode.................................................................................... 8

Main
Menu..................................................................................................... 16
Menu mode........................................................................................ 13
Menu Mode........................................................................................ 19
reactance............................................................................................. 41

Pulse
Input, 5-5*........................................................................................... 95
Outputs, 5-6*..................................................................................... 96
Start/Stop............................................................................................ 11

Mains
On/Off, 14-1*................................................................................... 143
supply..................................................................................................... 7

MCB
113............................................................................... 85, 90, 105, 106
114...................................................................................................... 171

224

Quick
Menu.............................................................................................. 13, 16
Menu mode................................................................................. 13, 16
Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters...... 14

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Index

VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide

Symbols..................................................................................................... 3

Synchronous motor speed................................................................ 4

Ramp
2, 3-5*................................................................................................... 69
3, 3-6*................................................................................................... 69
4, 3-7*................................................................................................... 70
Ramps, 3-4* Ramp 1........................................................................... 67
Rated motor speed............................................................................... 4
RCD.............................................................................................................. 6

Temp.
Input Mode (MCB 114), 35-0*.................................................... 171
Input X48/10 (MCB 114), 35-3*................................................. 172
Input X48/4 (MCB 114), 35-1*.................................................... 171
Input X48/7 (MCB 114), 35-2*.................................................... 171

Reference/Reference Limits/Ramps, 3-**................................. 64

Terminal
54......................................................................................................... 222
X45/1 Output Min Scale, 6-71................................................... 106
X45/3 Output Min Scale, 6-81................................................... 107

References, 3-1*................................................................................... 65

Thermal load................................................................................ 45, 160

Relay outputs........................................................................................ 85

Thermistor......................................................................................... 52, 6

Relays, 5-4*............................................................................................ 90

Timers, 13-2*....................................................................................... 133

Reset............................................................................. 216, 217, 221, 14

Resolver Interface, 17-5*............................................................... 166

Torque
Torque........................................................................................ 40, 217
PI Control, 7-1*............................................................................... 110

RS Flip Flops, 13-1*.......................................................................... 131

Trip Reset, 14-2*................................................................................ 146

Ref. & Feedb., 16-5*......................................................................... 161

Reference Limits, 3-0*....................................................................... 64

Safety Precautions................................................................................ 7
Screened/armoured........................................................................... 10
Sensor
Input Option parameters............................................................ 210
Input Option, 35-**....................................................................... 171

Value......................................................................................................... 20
Voltage
imbalance......................................................................................... 216
reference via a potentiometer.................................................... 11
VVCplus................................................................................................. 4, 6

Serial communication.......................................................................... 5
Set-up operations, 0-1*.................................................................... 26
Short circuit......................................................................................... 217
Smart
Application Setup (SAS)................................................................. 19
Logic Control, 13-**...................................................................... 124

Warnings.............................................................................................. 211
Wobble Function, 30-0*................................................................. 168

Special
Features, 30-**................................................................................ 168
Settings, 1-1*..................................................................................... 38
Speed
Bypass, 4-6*........................................................................................ 78
PID Ctrl............................................................................................... 108
Up/Down............................................................................................. 11
Start
Adjustments, 1-7*............................................................................ 49
delay..................................................................................................... 49
function............................................................................................... 49
Start/Stop............................................................................................... 10
States, 13-5*........................................................................................ 138
Stator leakage reactance................................................................. 41
Status
Status.................................................................................................... 13
messages............................................................................................. 12
Step-by-Step......................................................................................... 20
Stop Adjustments, 1-8*.................................................................... 50
Supply voltage................................................................................... 219
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

225

www.danfoss.com/drives
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.

130R0334

MG33MI02

*MG33MI02*

Rev. 2013-11-20